PART I

POLICE ORGANIZATION & ADMINISTRATION

 2

CHAPTER

EVOLUTION OF THE PHILIPPINE POLICING SYSTEM

===========================================================

Introduction

From the simplest social structure-the family to the

most complex-the community of nations, it is essential that
certain norms and conduct are to be established and observed
in order to ensure that the cordial and harmonious
relationship among its members are preserved and maintained.

Primitive Evolution of the Philippine Policing System

The police under the local setting primitively evolved

from the practice of the different tribes to select able-
bodied young men to protect the people from the assault of
the rival tribe, and to maintain peace and order within the
village.

The Spanish Era

By the coming of the Spaniards, who ruled the country,

using sword after the cross for more than three centuries,
the country’s police system started. Police were then
called Cuardillo, later the general function of law
enforcement were assumed by the Cuerpo de Carabineros de
Seguridad Republica, in which the native Filipinos were
appointed up to the rank of Sergeant under the command of a
Spanish Officer. In 1852, Guardia Civil took over the peace
keeping duties in the island under a Royal Decree.
 3

The American Era

After the Spanish Era ends, another master begin, the

Americans came to our country not to help the force of the
then Philippine Army, but to conquer and rule the Philippine
Republic. While the American Soldiers were busy fighting
the tug army of Gen. Emilio F. Aguinaldo in the hinterlands,
Gov. William H. Taft, established a police which shall
maintain peace and order. On January 9, 1901, Manila
Police was formally organized by virtue of Act No. 183 of
the Philippine Commission. Thereafter adjoining
municipalities follow through.

The Political Era

The Administrative Code of the Philippines, promulgated

on September 10, 1955, provided for the constitution of a
police forces in every cities and municipalities with the
officers and members thereof being appointed by the City or
Municipal Mayor with the consent of the City or Municipal
Council. Under this set-up the police is primarily a
political entity that tended to serve the wills of those in
power. By this system, law enforcement suffers ignominy of
being subservient to the political conditions prevailing at
any given time.

In an effort to improve the quality and morale of all

existing police forces, Republic Act No. 4864, known as the
Police Act of 1966 was enacted, by virtue of which, the
National Police Commission was created, vested with the
power to supervise and control the police forces all over
the country. Under this act, the power to appoint members
of the police forces remain rested on the Local Executives,
but administration, control and disciplinary measures,
including training of each member are placed under the
exclusive jurisdiction of the National Police Commission.
Qualification standards were also set in an effort to
upgrade the quality of police officers, thereby improving
the law enforcement aim of the government.
 4

The Reform or New Society Era

As the political situation worsened during the late

1960’s, giving rise to the collapse of law and order,
drastic measures had to be instituted only to save the
Republic from self-destruction. The early 1970’s saw the
advent of Military Rule, when the entire nation was placed
under Martial Law, and the Writ of Habeas Corpus was
suspended. To ensure that beleaguered sectors of the
society will conform to the policies promulgated by the
government, then Pres. Marcos issued Proclamation No. 1081,
and subsequently Presidential Decree No. 765 was put into
effect. This instituted the integration of the nation’s
police forces with the Philippine Constabulary, virtually
making the Integrated National Police a component of the
Armed Forces of the Philippines, and under the general
supervision of the Department of National Defense.

The Present Police System

Based on the provision of Section 6, Article XVI, New

Philippine Constitution, it expressly provide that, “The
state shall establish and maintain one national police
force, which shall be national in scope and civilian in
character, to be administered and controlled by a national
police commission. The authority of local executives over
the police units in their respective jurisdiction shall be
provided by the law.”

The Future of the Philippine Policing System

Another impending amendment is in progress under Senate

Series No. 1261 prepared by the Committee on Local
Government and National Defense and Security, entitled “An
Act Further Amending Republic Act No. 6975, as Amended by
Republic Act No. 8551, Restructuring the Philippine National
Police and Empowering Local Government Units for the
Maintenance of Law and Order, and for Other Purposes.”

In addition, “The Magna Carta for Police Officers” is

also being proposed by the Philippine National Police
hierarchy for the legislation of the joint Congress. This
covers three (3) bills pertaining to the police officer.
 5

CHAPTER

POLICE SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT

===========================================================

Introduction

The police are most involved in the complicated inter-

relationship within a social structure. Due this, the
effectiveness of the organization is essentially dependent
on the manner the same is managed, administered and
controlled and most especially on the trust that the
citizens-clientele of policing business bestow upon it.

Definition of Police Management

In modern police administrative terminology, police

management is defines as the process of directing and
controlling people and things so that organizational
objectives can be accomplished.

Definition of Police Supervision

It is a part of the police management process, and it

is refers to the act of overseeing subordinates and line
officers.

Basic Police Supervisory Responsibilities

1. Planner

As a planner, he must be an expert in planning

operational activities and methods. He must capable of
inspecting work systems, conducting studies, analyzing data,
and developing matured recommendations for constructive
changes in organization and operation when necessary.
 6

2. Personnel Officer

As personnel officer, he should strive to assign his

subordinates as scientifically as possible to the positions
for which they are best suited and to the places and at
times they are most needed.

3. Trainer

As a trainer, he must develop his abilities to train

subordinates to be efficient, effective producers who gain
satisfaction from their work.

4. Controller

As a controller, he must be worthy on his position, and

he must learn how to control his subordinates properly.

5. Decision Maker and Communicator

As a decision maker and communicator, the supervisor’s

primary function is the decision making, when he makes
decision, he often helps to shape the policy for the
organization.

6. Motivating Employees

Unless the employee agrees with the objectives of his

organization and believes that they are attainable, they
won’t be able to commit themselves to them.

7. Leadership Responsibilities

A major responsibility of every supervisor is to

provide leadership for the men and women under him, and to
become a good leader, he must possess the traits of
honorableness, courageousness, vitality, reasonably
intelligent, and good common sense.

Definition of Organization
 7

An organization is a structure through people work as

group, and it presupposes an orderly arrangement between
individuals and groups.

Three Categories of Supervisor’s Job

1. Leading

2. Directing

3. Controlling

The Supervisor’s Administrative Functions

1. Planning

That is working out in broad outline the things that

need to accomplish the purpose set for the enterprise.

2. Organizing

That is the establishment of the formal structure of

authority through which work subdivisions are arranged,
defined and coordinated for the defined objectives.

3. Staffing

That is the whole personnel functions of bringing in

and training the staff and maintaining favorable conditions
of work.

4. Directing

That is the continuous task of making decisions,

embodying them in specific general orders and instructions
and serving as the leader of the enterprise.

5. Coordinating

That is the all important duty of interrelating the

various part of the work.
6. Reporting
 8

That is keeping those to whom the executive is

responsibly informed as what is going on, which thus
included keeping himself and his subordinates informed
through records, research and inspection.

7. Budgeting

That is the accounting and control of funds and

resources in the form of fiscal and budget plans.

Definition of Organizational Structure

An organizational structure is a mechanical means of

depicting by an arrangement of symbols the relationships
that exist between individuals, groups and functions within
the organization.

Types of Organizational Structures

1. The Line Organization

The straight line organization, often called as the

individual, military or departmental type of organization,
is the simplest and perhaps the oldest type, but it is
seldom encountered in its true form except in any but the
smallest of establishment.

2. The Functional Type of Organization

The functional type of organization in its pure form is

rarely found in present day organization except at or near
the top of a very largest establishment. This type of
structure violated the primary rule that man perform best
when he is under one supervisor.

3. The Line and Staff Type of Organization

The line and staff type of organization is a

combination of the line and functional types and is found in
almost all but the very smallest police organization today.
Principles Involved in Police Management and Supervision
 9

1. Division of Work

Organizational structure is established to designate

how work is to be divided among the various components of
the establishment.

2. Unity of Command

In addition of providing a logical arrangement of work,

organizational structure should provide clear-cut channels
of authority. It is also being called as “chain of command,”
“scalar chain,” or “scalar principle.”

3. Span of Control

The principle of “span of attention,” was initially

adopted from psychologists, and it refers to the number of
persons an individual can supervise effectively.

4. Delegation of Work

The principle of delegation relates to the process of

committing an activity to another’s care.

5. Personnel Development

The practices of delegation contribute to the

development of subordinates to perform the supervisor’s job
in his absence or when he is unable to act.

6. Exception Principle

The development of the subordinates to take over in the

boss’ absence involves training, just as does the exception
principle, which specifies that the head of an organization
should not find it necessary to act personally on each
matter coming under his general jurisdiction.

7. Completed Staff Work

The principle of completed staff work require that the

person to whom work has been assigned through the delegation
process is to complete it to such an extent that the only
thing left to be done by the person who delegated it is to
approved it.
 10

Definition of Leadership

Leadership is the art of influencing, directing,

guiding and controlling others in such a way as to obtain
their willing obedience, confidence, respect, and loyal
cooperation in the accomplishment of an objective.

Types of Leaders

1. The Autocratic

The autocratic leader is highly authoritative. He

makes decisions without allowing subordinates to
participate.

2. The Democratic

The supervisor who leads democratically, seeking ideas

and suggestions from his subordinates and allowing them to
participate in decision making that affects them, by and
large and secures the best results as a leader.

3. The Free Rain

The leader who plays down his role as such and

exercises a minimum control, seldom gives his subordinates
the attention or help they need.

Definition of Command Presence, How it Affects Leadership

Command presence to some denotes a military bearing.

To others, it means a distinctive type of appearance and
conduct. Others feel command presence is comprised of the
same ingredients as leadership. In reality, it is a
composite of all those traits. It is a natural manner of an
individual indicating a complete command of his mental and
physical faculties and emotions.

It encompasses the qualities of dignity, self-assurance

and poise. It is that outward appearances which denotes
 11

that the person has the ability and qualifications to take

command of any situation. It is often said that command
presence is best reflected by the leader who looks calmer
and calmer as things getting worse and worse. The leader’s
attitude quickly permeates a group.

If he displays anxiety, they will develop it. They

will not perform well in atmosphere of anxiety, and tension.
He maintains a deportment of calmness and evidence of high
degree of emotional security, even under provocation.

Ways of Giving Orders

1. Direct Command

Orders may be best given by command when emergent

conditions require direct prompt action.

2. Request

Most orders should be framed as requests. Employees

will resent the authoritarian and dictatorial method.

3. Implied or Suggestive Orders

Implied or suggestive directives can be employed to

good effect with the reliable employee who readily assumes
responsibility for a task.

4. Request for Volunteers

Occasionally, a supervisor will call for volunteers to

perform some dangerous assignment which he cannot or should
not perform himself.
 12

CHAPTER

REPUBLIC ACT NO. 6975

===========================================================

What is Republic Act No. 6975

It is an act establishing the Philippine National

Police under a reorganized Department of Interior and Local
Government, and for other purposes.

The Department of the Interior and Local Government

To carry out the policies and purpose of this Act, the

Department of Local Government is hereby reorganized into
the Department of Interior and Local Government, hereinafter
referred to as the Department, in accordance with the
provisions of this Act.

Powers and Functions of the DILG

In furtherance of the objectives of this Act, the

Department shall continue to exercise the powers and
functions of the Department of Local Government in addition
to the powers and functions as herein provided.

Organization of the DILG

The Department shall consist of the Department Proper,

the existing bureaus and offices of Department of Local
Government, the National Police Commission, the Philippine
Public Safety College, and the following bureaus: the
Philippine National Police, the Bureau of Fire Protection,
and the Bureau of Jail Management and Penology.
 13

Specific Powers and Functions of the Secretary

In addition to the powers and functions as provided in

Executive Order No. 252, the Secretary as Department head
shall have the following powers and functions.

a) Prepare and submit periodic reports, including a

Quarterly Anti-Crime Operation Report, and such other
reports as the President and Congress may require.

b) Act as Chairman and Presiding Officer of the

National Police Commission; and

c) Delegate authority to exercise any substantive or

administrative function to the members of the National
Police Commission or other officers of rank within the
Department.

Regional Offices of the DILG

The Department shall establish, operate and maintain a

regional office in each of the administrative regions of the
country to implement the policies and programs of the
Department. Each regional office shall be headed by a
regional director to be assisted by two (2) assistant
regional directors: one (1) for jail management and
penology and another one (1) for fire protection in addition
to the present regional directors of the Department of Local
Government.

Removal from Office

The members of the Commission may be removed from

office for cause. All vacancies in the Commission, except
through expiration of term shall be filled up for the
unexpired term only: Provided, That any person who shall be
appointed in this case shall be eligible for regular
appointment for another full term.
 14

Prohibitions to the Members of the Commission

The Chairman and members of the Commission shall not

engage in the practice of any profession, or intervene,
directly or indirectly, in the management and control of any
private enterprise. They shall not, directly or indirectly,
have any financial or material interest in any transaction
requiring the approval of their office.

Composition of the PNP

Subject to the limitations provided for in this Act,

the Philippine National Police, hereinafter referred to as
the PNP, is hereby establish, initially consisting of the
members of the police forces who were integrated into the
Integrated National Police (INP) pursuant to Presidential
Decree No. 765, and the officers and enlisted personnel of
the Philippine Constabulary (PC). For purposes of this Act,
the officers and enlisted personnel of the PC shall include
those assigned with the Narcotics Command (NARCOM) or the
Criminal Investigation Service (CIS); those of the technical
services of the AFP assigned with the PC and the civilian
operatives of the CIS. The regular operative of the
abolished NAPOLCOM Inspection, Investigation and
Intelligence Branch may also be absorbed by the PNP. In
addition, a PC officer or enlisted personnel may transfer to
any of the branches or services of the Armed Forces of the
Philippines in accordance with the provisions of Section 85
of this Act.

Powers and Functions of the PNP

a) Enforce all laws and ordinances relative to the

protection of lives and properties;

b) Maintain peace and order and take all necessary

steps to ensure pubic safety;

c) Investigate and prevent crimes, effect the arrest

of criminal offenders, bring offenders to justice and assist
in their prosecution;
 15

d) Exercise the general powers to make arrest, search

and seizure in accordance with the Constitution and
pertinent laws;

e) Detain an arrested person for a period not beyond

what is prescribed by law, informing the person so detained
of all his rights under the Constitution;

f) Issue licenses for the possession of firearms and

explosives in accordance with law;

g) Supervise and control the training and operations

of security agencies and issue licenses to operate security
agencies, and to security guards and private detectives, for
the practice of their professions, and

h) Perform such other duties and exercise all other

functions as may be provided by law.

In addition, the PNP shall absorb the office of the

National Action Committee on Anti-Hijacking (NACAH) of the
Department of National Defense, all the functions of the
present Philippine Air Force Security Command (PAFSECOM), as
well as the police functions of the Coast Guard. In order
to perform its powers and functions efficiently and
effectively, the PNP shall be provided with adequate land,
sea, and air capabilities and all necessary material means
or resources.

Organization of the PNP

The PNP shall be headed by a Chief who shall be

assisted by two (2) deputy chiefs, one (1) for operations
and one (1) for administration, both of whom shall be
appointed by the President upon recommendation of the
Commission from among the most senior and qualified officers
in the service: Provided, however, That in no case shall
any officer who has retired or is retirable within six (6)
months from his compulsory retirement age be appointed as
Chief of the PNP.

The PNP shall be composed of a national office,

regional offices, provincial offices, district offices and
city or municipal station.
 16

At the national level, the PNP shall maintain its

office in Metropolitan Manila which shall house the
directorial staff, service staff and special support units.

At the regional level, the PNP shall have regional

offices, including that of the National Capital Region,
which may be divided into two (2) separate regions without
prejudice to the pertinent provisions of the Organic Act for
Autonomous Regions of the Cordillera and Muslim Mindanao
relative to the creation or a regional police force in the
area of autonomy. Each of these regional offices shall be
headed by a regional director for peace and order.

At the provincial level, there shall be a PNP office,

each headed by a provincial director. In case of large
provinces, police districts may be established by the
Commission to be headed by a district director.

At the city or municipal level, there shall be a PNP

station, each headed by a chief police.

The Chief of the PNP shall, within sixty (60) days from
effectivity of this Act and in accordance with the broad
guidelines set forth herein, recommend the organizational
structure and staffing pattern of the PNP to the Commission.

Powers, Functions and Term of Office of the PNP Chief

The command and direction of the PNP shall be vested in

the Chief of the PNP who shall have the power to direct and
control tactical as well as strategic movements, deployment,
placement, utilization of the PNP or any units and
personnel, including its equipment, facilities and other
resources. Such command and direction of the Chief of PNP
may be delegated to subordinate officials with respect to
the units under their respective commands, in accordance
with the rules and regulations prescribed by the Commission.
The Chief of the PNP shall also have the power to issue
detailed implementing policies and instructions regarding
personnel, funds, properties, records, correspondence and
such other matters as may be necessary to effectively carry
out the function, powers and duties of the bureau. The
Chief of the PNP shall be appointed by the President from
 17

among the senior officers down to the rank of chief

superintendent, subject to the confirmation of the
Commission on Appointments. Provided, that the Chief of the
PNP shall serve a term of office not to exceed four (4)
years. Provided, further, that in times of war or other
national emergencies declared by Congress, the President may
extend such term office.

Manning Levels of the PNP

On the average nationwide, the manning levels of the

PNP shall be approximately in accordance with a police-to-
population ratio of one (1) policeman for every five hundred
(500) persons. The actual strength by cities and
municipalities shall depend on the state of peace and order,
population density and actual demands of the service in the
particular area. Provided, that the minimum police-to-
population ratio shall not be less than one (1) policeman
for every one thousand (1,000) persons. Provided, further,
that urban areas shall have a higher minimum police-to-
population ratio as may be prescribed by regulations.

Key Positions in the PNP

The head of the PNP with the rank of director general

shall have the position title of Chief of the PNP. The
second in command of the PNP with the rank of deputy
director general shall be the Deputy Chief of the PNP for
Administration. The third in command with the rank also of
deputy director general shall be the Deputy Chief of the PNP
for Operations.

At the national office, the head of the directorial

staff with the rank of deputy director general shall be
known as the Chief of the Directorial Staff of the PNP.

The heads of the various staff divisions in the

directorial staff shall have the rank of director with the
position title of Director of the Directorial Staff of their
respective functional division. The head of the
Inspectorate Division with the rank of chief superintendent
shall assume the position title of Inspector General. The
heads of the administrative and operational support division
 18

shall have the rank of chief superintendent.

The head of the NCR with the rank of director shall

assume the position title of NCR director.

The heads of the regional offices with the rank of

chief superintendent shall assume the position title of
Regional Director.

The heads of the NCR district offices with the rank of

chief superintendent shall have the position title of
District Director.

The heads of the provincial offices with the rank of

senior superintendent shall be known as Provincial Director.

The heads of the district offices with the rank of

superintendent shall have the position title of District
Director.

The heads of the municipality or city offices with the

rank of chief inspector shall be known as Chief of Police.

Appointment of PNP Officers and Members

a) Police Officer I to Senior Police Officer IV. –

Appointed by the PNP regional director for regional
personnel or by the Chief of the PNP for the national
headquarters personnel and attested by the Civil Service
Commission;

b) Inspector to Superintendent. – Appointed by the

Chief of the PNP, as recommended by their immediate
superiors, and attested by the Civil Service Commission;

c) Senior Superintendent to Deputy Director General.

– Appointed by the President upon recommendation of the
Chief of the PNP, with proper endorsement by the Chairman of
the Civil Service Commission and subject to confirmation by
the Commission on Appointments; and
d) Director General. Appointed by the President from
among the senior officers down to the rank of chief
superintendent in the service, subject to confirmation by
the Commission on Appointments: Provided, That the Chief of
 19

the PNP shall serve a tour of duty not to exceed four (4)
years; Provided, further, That, in times of war or other
national emergency declared by Congress, the President may
extend such tour of duty.

Lateral Entry of Officers into the PNP

In general, all original appointments of commissioned

officers in the PNP shall commence with the rank of
inspector, to include all those highly technical
qualifications applying for the PNP technical services, such
as dentists, optometrists, nurses, engineers, and graduates
of forensic sciences. Doctors of medicine, members of the
Bar, and chaplains shall be appointed to the rank of senior
inspector in their particular technical service. Graduates
of the Philippine National Police Academy (PNPA) shall be
automatically appointed to the initial rank of inspector.
Licensed criminologists may be appointed to the rank of
inspector to fill up any vacancy after promotions from the
ranks are completed.

Support Units of the PNP

The PNP shall be supported by administrative and

operational support units. The administrative support units
shall consist of Crime Laboratory, Logistics Unit,
Communications Unit, Computer Center, Finance Center and
Civil Security Unit. The operational support units shall be
composed of the Maritime Police Units, Police Intelligence,
Police Security Unit, Criminal Investigation Unit, Special
Action Force, Narcotics Unit, Aviation Security Unit,
Traffic Management Unit, the Medical and Dental Centers and
the Civil Relations Unit. To enhance police operational
efficiency and effectiveness, the Chief of the PNP may
constitute such other support units as may be necessary
subject to the approval of the Commission: Provided, That
no support unit headed by a chief superintendent or a higher
rank can be created unless provided by law.

a) Administrative Support Units. – 1) Crime

Laboratory. There shall be established a central Crime
Laboratory to be headed by a Director with the rank of chief
superintendent, which shall provide scientific and technical
 20

investigative aid and support to the PNP and other

government investigative agencies.

It shall also provide crime laboratory examination,

evaluation and identification of physical evidences involved
in crimes with primary emphasis on their medical, chemical,
biological and physical nature.

2) Logistics Units. Headed by a Director with the

rank of chief superintendent, the Logistics Unit shall be
responsible for the procurement, distribution, and
management of all the logistical requirements of the PNP
including firearms and ammunition.

3) Communications Unit. Headed by a Director with

the rank of chief superintendent, the Communications Unit
shall be responsible for establishing an effective police
communications network.

4) Computer Center. Headed by a Director with the

rank of chief superintendent, the Computer Center shall be
responsible for the design, implementation and maintenance
of a database system for the PNP.

5) Finance Center. Headed by a Director with the

rank of chief superintendent, the Finance Center shall be
responsible for providing finance services to the PNP.

6) Civil Security Unit. Headed by a Director with

the rank of chief superintendent, the Civil Security Unit
shall provide administrative services and general
supervision over the organization, business operation and
activities of all organized private detectives, watchmen,
security guard agencies and company guards.

The unit shall likewise supervise the licensing and

registration of firearms and explosives.

The approval of applications for licenses to operate

private security agencies, as well as the issuance of
licenses to security guards and the licensing of firearms
and explosives, shall be decentralized to the PNP regional
offices.

b) Operational Support Units. – 1) Maritime Police

 21

Units. Headed by a Director with the rank of chief

superintendent, the Maritime Police Unit shall perform all
police functions over Philippine territorial waters and
rivers.

2) Police Intelligence Unit. Headed by a Director

with the rank of chief superintendent, the Police
Intelligence Unit shall serve as the intelligence and
counter-intelligence operating unit of the PNP.

3) Police Security Unit. Headed by a Director with

the rank of chief superintendent, the Police Security Unit
shall provide security for government officials, visiting
dignitaries and private individuals authorized to be given
protection.

4) Criminal Investigation Unit. Headed by a Director

with the rank of chief superintendent, the Criminal
Investigation Unit shall undertake the monitoring,
investigation and prosecution of all crimes involving
economic sabotage, and other crimes of such magnitude and
extent as to indicate their commission by highly placed or
professional criminal syndicates and organizations.

5) Special Action Force. Headed by a Director with

the rank of chief superintendent, the Special Action Force
shall function as a mobile strike force or reaction unit to
augment regional, provincial, municipal and city police
forces for civil disturbance control, counter-insurgency,
hostage-taking rescue operations, and other special
operations.

6) Narcotics Unit. Headed by a Director with the

rank of chief superintendent, the Narcotics Unit shall
enforce all laws relative to the protection of the citizenry
against dangerous and other prohibited drugs and substances.

7) Aviation Security Unit. Headed by a Director with

the rank of chief superintendent, the Aviation Security
Unit, in coordination with airport authorities shall secure
all the country’s airport against offensive and terroristic
acts that threaten civil aviation, exercise operational
control and supervisions over all agencies involved in
airport security operation, and enforce all laws and
regulations relative to air travel protection and safety.
 22

8) Traffic Management Unit. Headed by a Director

with the rank of chief superintendent, the Traffic
Management Unit shall enforce traffic laws and regulations.

9) Medical and Dental Centers. Headed by a director

with the rank of chief superintendent, the Medical and
Dental Centers shall be responsible for providing medical
and dental services for the PNP.

10) Civil Relations Unit. Headed by a Director with

the rank of chief superintendent, the Civil Relations Unit
shall implement plans and programs that will promote
community and citizens participation in the maintenance of
peace and order and public safety.

Performance Evaluation System of the PNP

There shall be established a performance evaluation

system which shall be administered in accordance with the
rules and regulations and standards, and a code of conduct
promulgated by the Commission for members of the PNP. Such
performance evaluation system shall administered in such a
way as to foster the improvement of individual efficiency
and behavioral discipline as well as the promotion of
organizational effectiveness and respect for the
constitutional and human rights of the citizens, democratic
principles and ideals and the supremacy of civilian
authority over the military.

The rating system as contemplated herein shall be based

on standards prescribed by the Commission and shall consider
the results of annual physical, psychological and
neuropsychiatric examinations conducted on the PNP officers
or members concerned.

Compulsory Retirement

Compulsory retirement, for officer and non-officer,

shall be upon the attainment of age fifty-six (56):
Provided, that in case of any officer with the rank of chief
superintendent, director or deputy director general, the
commission may allow his retention in the service for an
 23

unextendible period of one (1) year.

Optional Retirement

Upon accumulation of at least twenty (20) years of

satisfactory active service, an officer or non-officer at
his own request and with the approval of the Commission,
shall be retired from the service and entitled to receive
benefits provided for by law.

Finality of Disciplinary Actions

The disciplinary action imposed upon a member of the

PNP shall be final and executory. Provided, that a
disciplinary demotion or dismissal from the service may be
appealed to the regional appellate board within (10) days
from receipt of the copy of the notice of decision:
Provided, further, that the disciplinary action imposed by
the Chief of the PNP involving demotion or dismissal may be
appealed to the National Appellate Board within ten (10)
days from receipt thereof. Provided, furthermore, that the
National or Regional Appellate Boards as the case may be,
shall decide the appeal within sixty (60) days from the
receipt of the notice of appeal: Provided, finally, That
failure of the National and Regional Appellate Boards to act
on the appeal within said period shall render the decision
final and executory without prejudice, however, to the
filing of an appeal by either party with the secretary.

Jurisdiction in Criminal Cases

Any provisions of law to the contrary notwithstanding,

criminal cases involving PNP members shall be within the
exclusive jurisdiction of the regular courts. Provided,
that the court-martial appointed pursuant to Presidential
Decree No. 1850 shall continue to try PC-INP members who
have already been arraigned, to include appropriate actions
thereon by the reviewing authorities pursuant to
Commonwealth Act No. 408, otherwise known as the Manual for
Court-Martial. Provided, further, that criminal cases
against PC-INP members who may have not yet been arraigned
upon the effectivity of this Act shall be transferred to the
 24

proper city or provincial prosecutor or municipal trial

court judge.

Entitlement to Reinstatement and Salary

A member of the PNP who may have been suspended from

office in accordance with the provisions of this Act or who
shall have been terminated or separated from office shall,
upon acquittal from the charge against him, be entitled to
reinstatement and prompt payment of salary, allowances and
other benefits withheld from him by reason of such
suspension or termination.

Power to Administer Oaths

Officials of the Commission who are appointed by the

President, as well as officers of the PNP from rank of
inspector to senior superintendent, shall have the power to
administer oaths on matters which are connected with the
performance of their official duties.

Creation of the Philippine Public Safety College

There is hereby created the Philippine Public Safety

College (PPSC), which shall be the premier educational
institution for the training, human resource development and
continuing education of all personnel of the PNP, Fire and
Jail Bureaus.

Said college shall be under the direct supervisions of

a Board of Trustees composed of the Secretary and the three
(3) bureaus head.

Composition, Powers and Functions of the PPSC

The College shall consist of the present Philippine

National Police Academy established pursuant to Section 13
of Presidential Decree No. 1184, the Fire Service Training
Center, the Philippine National Police Training Centers, the
National Police College, Jail National Training Institute,
 25

and other special training centers as may be created by the

Department, whose functions shall be as follows:

a) Formulate and implement training programs for the

personnel of the Department;

b) Establish and maintain adequate physical training

facilities;

c) Develop and implement research and development to

support educational training programs;

d) Conduct an assessment of the training needs of all

its clientele, and

e) Perform such other related functions as may be

prescribed by the Secretary.

Incentives and Awards

There shall be established an incentives and awards

system which shall be administered by a board under such
rules, regulations and standards as may be promulgated by
the Department: Provided, that equivalent awards shall be
given by the Department for every award duly given by
respectable civic organization in a nationwide selection for
outstanding achievement and/or performance of any member.

Longevity Pay and Allowances

Uniformed personnel of the Department shall be entitled

to a longevity pay of ten percent (10%) of their basic
salaries for every five (5) years of service, which shall be
reckoned from the date of the personnel’s original
appointment in the AFP, or appointment in the police, fire,
jail or other allied services prior to the integration of
the PC and the INP. Provided, that the totality of such
longevity pay shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the
basic pay. They shall also continue to enjoy subsistence
allowance, quarter allowances, clothing allowance, cost of
living allowance, hazard pay, and all other allowances as
provided by existing laws.
 26

Retirement in the Next Higher Grade

Uniformed personnel covered under this Act shall, for

purposes of retirement pay, be retired in one (1) grade
higher than the permanent grade last held. Provided, that
they have served for at least one (1) year of active service
in the permanent grade.
 27

CHAPTER

REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551

===========================================================

What is Republic Act No. 8551

It is an act providing for the reform and

reorganization of the Philippine National Police, and for
other purposes.

Relationship of the DILG with the DND

The Department of the Interior and Local Government

shall be relieved of the primary responsibility on matters
involving the suppression of insurgency and other serious
threats to national security. The Philippine National
Police shall, through information gathering and performance
of its ordinary police functions, support the Armed Forces
of the Philippines on matters involving suppression of
insurgency, except in cases where the president shall call
on the PNP to support the AFP in combat operations.

Creation and Composition of NAPOLCOM

A National Police Commission, hereinafter referred to

as the Commission, is hereby created for the purpose of
effectively discharging the functions prescribed in the
Constitution and provided in this Act. The Commission shall
be composed of a Chairperson, four (4) regular
Commissioners, and the Chief PNP as ex-officio member.
Three of the regular commissioners, shall come from the
civilian sector who are neither active nor former members of
the police or military one (1) of whom shall be designated
as Vice-Chairperson by the President.
 28

The fourth regular commissioner shall come from the law

enforcement sector, either active or retired. Provided,
that an active member of a law enforcement agency shall be
considered resigned from said agency once appointed to the
Commission. Provided, further, that at least one (1) of the
Commissioners shall be a woman. The Secretary of the
Department shall be the ex-officio Chairperson of the
Commission, while the Vice-Chairperson shall act as the
executive officer of the Commission.

Powers and Functions of the Commission

The Commission shall exercise the following powers and

functions:”

“a) Exercise administrative control and operational

supervision over the Philippine National Police which shall
mean the power to:

“1) Develop policies and promulgate a police manual

prescribing rules and regulations for efficient
organization, administration, and operation, including
criteria for manpower allocation, distribution and
deployment, recruitment, selection, promotion and retirement
of personnel and the conduct of qualifying entrance and
promotional examinations for uniformed members;”

“2) Examine and audit, and thereafter establish the

standards for such purposes on a continuing basis, the
performance, activities, and facilities of all police
agencies throughout the country”

“3) Establish a system of uniform crime reporting;”

“4) Conduct an annual self-report survey and compile

statistical data for the accurate assessment of the crime
situation and the proper evaluation of efficiency and
effectiveness of all police units in the country;”

“5) Approve or modify plans and programs on education

and training, logistical requirements, communications,
records, information systems, crime laboratory, crime
prevention and crime reporting;”
“6) Affirm, reverse or modify through the National
 29

Appellate Board, personnel disciplinary actions involving

demotion or dismissal from the service imposed upon members
of the Philippine National Police by the Chief of the
Philippine National Police;”

“7) Exercise appellate jurisdiction through the

Regional Appellate Boards over administrative cases against
policemen and over decisions on claims for police benefits;”

“8) Prescribe minimum standards for arms, equipment,

and uniforms and, after consultation with the Philippine
Heraldry Commission, for insignia of ranks, awards, and
medals of honor. Within ninety (90) days from the
effectivity of this Act, the standards of the uniformed
personnel of the PNP must be revised which should be clearly
distinct from the military and reflective of the civilian
character of the police;”

“9) Issue subpoena and subpoena duces tecum in matters

pertaining to the discharge of its own powers and duties,
and designate who among its personnel can issue such
processes and administer oaths in connection therewith;”

“10) Inspect and assess the compliance of the PNP on

the established criteria for manpower allocation,
distribution, and deployment and their impact on the
community and the crime situation, and thereafter formulate
appropriate guidelines for maximization of resources and
effective utilization of the PNP personnel;”

“11) Monitor the performance of the local chief

executives as deputies of the Commission,” and

“12) Monitor and investigate police anomalies and

irregularities.”

“b) Advice the President on all matters involving

police functions and administration;”

“c) Render to the President and to the Congress an

annual report on its activities and accomplishments during
the thirty (30) days after the end of the calendar year
which shall include an appraisal of the conditions obtaining
in the organization and administration of police agencies in
the municipalities, cities and provinces throughout the
 30

country, and recommendations for appropriate remedial

legislation;”

“d) Recommend to the President, through the Secretary,

within sixty (60) days before the commencement of each
calendar year, a crime prevention program;” and

“e) Perform such other functions necessary to carry

out the provisions of this Act and as the President may
direct.”

Qualifications of the Members of the Commission

“a) He or she is a citizen of the Philippines;”

“b) A member of the Philippine Bar with at least five

(5) year experience in handling criminal or human rights
cases or a holder of a master’s degree but preferably a
doctorate degree in public administration, criminology,
criminal justice, law enforcement, and other related
discipline;” and

“c) The regular member coming from the law enforcement

sector have practical experience in law enforcement work for
at least five (5) years while the three (3) other regular
Commissioners must have done extensive research work or
projects on law enforcement, criminology or criminal justice
or members of a duly registered non-government organization
involved in the promotion of peace and order.”

Term of Office

The four (4) regular and full-time Commissioners shall

be appointed by the President for a term of six (6) years
without re-appointment or extension.

Expiration of the Term of Office of Current Commissioners

Upon the affectivity of this Act, the terms of the

current Commissioners are deemed expired which shall
 31

constitute a bar to their re-appointment or an extension of

their term in the Commission, except for current
Commissioners who have served less than two (2) years of
their terms of office, and who may be appointed by the
President for a maximum term of two (2) years.

Temporary or Permanent Incapacity

In case of absence due to the temporary incapacity of

the Chairperson, the Vice Chairperson shall serve as
Chairperson until the Chairperson is present or regains
capacity to serve. In case of death or permanent incapacity
or disqualification of the Chairperson, the acting
Chairperson shall also act as such until a new Chairperson
shall have been appointed by the President and qualified.

Organizational Structure

“a) Commissioner Proper. – This is composed of the

office of the Chairman and four (4) Commissioners.”

“b) Staff Services. – The Staff Services of the

Commission shall be as follows:”

“1) The Planning and Research Service, which shall

provide technical services to the Commission in areas of
overall policy formulation, strategic and operational
planning, management systems or procedures, evaluation and
monitoring of the Commission’s programs, projects and
internal operations, and shall conduct thorough research and
analysis on social and economic conditions affecting peace
and order in the country;”

“2) The Legal Affairs Service, which shall provide the

Commission with efficient and effective service as legal
counsel of the Commission and submit appropriate
recommendations pertaining thereto; and render legal
opinions arising from the administration and operation of
the Philippine National Police and the Commission;”

“3) The Crime Prevention and Coordination Service,

which shall undertake criminological researches and studies;
formulate a national crime prevention plan; develop a crime
 32

prevention and information program and provide editorial

direction for all criminology research and crime prevention
publications;”

“4) The Personnel and Administrative Service, which

shall perform personnel functions for the Commission,
administer the entrance and promotional examinations for
policemen, provide the necessary services relating to
records, correspondence, supplies, property and equipment,
security and general services, and the maintenance and
utilization of facilities, and provide services relating to
manpower, career planning and development, personnel
transactions and employees welfare;”

“5) The Inspection, Monitoring and Investigation

Service, which shall conduct continuous inspection and
management audit of personnel, facilities and operations at
all levels of command of the PNP, monitor the implementation
of the Commission’s programs and projects relative to law
enforcement; and monitor and investigate police anomalies
and irregularities;”

“6) The Installations and Logistics Service, which

shall review the Commission’s plans and programs and
formulate policies and procedures regarding acquisition,
inventory, control, distribution, maintenance and disposal
of supplies and shall oversee the implementation of programs
on transportation facilities and installations and the
procurement and maintenance of supplies and equipment,” and

“7) The Financial Service, which shall provide the

Commission with staff advice and assistance on budgetary and
financial matters, including the overseeing of the
processing and disbursement of funds pertaining to the
scholarship program of the surviving children of deceased
and/or permanently incapacitated PNP personnel.”

“c) Disciplinary Appellate Board. – The Commission

shall establish a formal administrative disciplinary
machinery consisting the National Appellate Board and the
Regional Appellate Boards.”

“The National Appellate Board shall decide cases on

appeal from decisions rendered by the PNP chief, while the
Regional Appellate Boards shall decide cases on appeal from
 33

decisions rendered by officers other than the PNP chief, the

mayor, and the People’s Law Enforcement Board (PLEB) created
hereunder.”

Qualifications of Regional Directors

No person shall be appointed regional directors

unless:”

“a) He or she is a citizen of the Philippines;” and

“b) A holder of master’s degree and appropriate Civil

Service Eligibility.”

Authority of the Commission to Reorganize the PNP

Notwithstanding the provisions of Republic Act No. 6975

on the organizational structure and rank classification of
the PNP, the Commission shall conduct a management audit,
and prepare and submit to Congress a proposed
reorganization plan of the PNP not later than December 31,
1998 subject to the limitations provided under this Act and
base on the following criteria: a) increased police
visibility through the dispersal of personnel from the
headquarters to the field offices and by the appointment and
assignment of non-uniformed personnel to positions which are
purely administrative, technical, clerical or menial in
nature and other positions which are not actually and
directly related to police operation, and b) efficient and
optimized delivery of police services to the communities.

General Qualifications for Appointment in the PNP

“a) A citizen of the Philippines;”

“b) A person of good moral character;”

“c) Must have passed the psychiatric/psychological,

 34

drug and physical tests to be administered by the PNP or by

any NAPOLCOM accredited government hospital for the purpose
of determining physical and mental health;”

“d) Must possess a formal baccalaureate degree from a

recognized institution of learning;”

“e) Must be eligible in accordance with the standards

set by the Commission;”

“f) Must not have been dishonorably discharged from

military employment or dismissed for cause from any
civilian position in the Government;”

“g) Must not have been convicted by final judgment of

an offense or crime involving moral turpitude;”

“h) Must be at least one meter and sixty-two

centimeters (1.62 cm) in height for male and one meter and
fifty-seven centimeters (1.57 cm.) for female;”

“i) Must weigh not more or less than five kilograms (5

kgs.) From the standard weight corresponding to his or her
height, age, and sex,”

“j) For a new applicant, must not be less than twenty-

one (21) nor more than thirty (30). Except for the last
qualification, the above-enumerated qualifications shall be
continuing in character and an absence of any one of them at
any given time shall be a ground for separation or
retirement from the service. Provided, that PNP members who
are already in the service upon the affectivity of this Act
shall be given at least two (2) more years to obtain the
minimum educational qualification and one (1) year to
satisfy the weight requirement.”

“For the purpose of determining compliance with the

requirements on physical and mental health, as well as the
non-use of prohibited drugs, the PNP by itself or through a
NAPOLCOM accredited government hospital shall conduct
regular psychiatric, psychological drug and physical tests
randomly and without notice.”
“After the lapse of the time period for the
satisfaction of a specific requirement, current members of
the PNP who will fail to satisfy the requirements
 35

enumerated under this section shall be separated from the

service if they are below fifty (50) years of age and have
served in the Government for less than twenty (20) years or
retired if they are from the age of fifty (50) and above and
have served the Government for at least twenty (20) years
without prejudice in either case to the payment of benefits
they may be entitled under existing laws.”

Waivers for Initial Appointments to the PNP

The age, height, weight, and educational requirements

for initial appointments to the PNP may be waived only when
the number of qualified applicants fall below the minimum
annual quota. Provided, that an applicant shall not below
twenty (20) or over thirty-five (35) years of age.
Provided, further, That any applicant not meeting the weight
requirement shall be given reasonable time but not exceeding
six (6) months within which to comply with the said
requirement. Provided, furthermore, that only applicants who
have finished second year college or have earned at least
seventy-two (72) collegiate units leading to a bachelor’s
degree shall be eligible for appointment. Provided,
furthermore, that anybody who will enter the service without
a baccalaureate degree shall be given a maximum of four (4)
years to obtain the required educational qualification.
Provided, finally, that a waiver for height requirement
shall be automatically granted to applicants belonging to
the cultural communities.

Selection Criteria Under the Waiver Program

The selection of applicants under the Waiver Program

shall be subject to the following minimum criteria:

Applicants who possess the least disqualifications

shall take precedence over those who possess more
disqualifications.

The requirements shall be waived in the following

order: a) age; b) height; c) weight; and d)
education.

The Commission shall promulgate rules and regulations

 36

to address other situations arising from the waiver of the

entry requirements.

Nature of Appointment Under a Waiver Program

Any PNP uniformed personnel who is admitted due to

waiver of the educational or weight requirements shall be
issued a temporary appointment pending the satisfaction of
the requirement waived. Any member who will fail to satisfy
any of the waived requirements within the specified time
period under Section 13 of this Act shall be dismissed from
the service.

Re-application of Dismissed PNP Member Under a New Waiver

Program

Any PNP member who shall be dismissed under a waiver

program shall be eligible to re-apply for appointment to the
PNP. Provided, that he or she possesses the minimum
qualifications under Section 14 of this Act and his or her
reappointment is not by virtue of another waiver program.

The Field Training Program

All uniformed members of the PNP shall undergo a Field

Training Program for twelve (12) months involving actual
experience and assignment in patrol, traffic, and
investigation as a requirement for permanency of their
appointment.

Increased Qualifications for Provincial Directors

No person may be appointed Director of a Provincial

Police office unless:

a) He or she holds a master’s degree in public

administration, sociology, criminology, criminal justice,
law enforcement, national security administration, defense
studies, or other related discipline from a recognized
institution of learning; and
 37

b) Has satisfactorily passed the required training

and career courses necessary for the position as may be
established by the Commission.

Any PNP personnel who is currently occupying the

position but lacks any of the qualifications mentioned above
shall be given three (3) years upon the affectivity of this
Act to comply with the requirements, otherwise he or she
shall be relieved from the position.

Examination of Policeman

The National Police Commission shall administer the

entrance and promotional examinations for policemen on the
basis of the standards set by the Commission.

Qualifications of Chief of City and Municipal Police

Stations

No person shall be appointed chief of a city police

station unless he/she is a graduate of Bachelor of Laws or
has finished all the required courses of a master’s degree
program in public administration, criminology, criminal
justice, law enforcement, national security administration,
defense studies, and other related disciplines from a
recognized institution of learning. No person shall be
appointed chief of a municipal station unless he or she has
finished at least second year Bachelor of Laws or has earned
at least twelve units (12) in a master’s degree program in
public administration, and other related disciplines from a
recognized institution of learning. Provided, that members
of the Bar with at least five (5) years of law practice,
licensed criminologist or graduates of the Philippine
National Police Academy and who possess the general
qualifications for initial appointment to the PNP shall be
qualified for appointment as chief of a city or municipal
police station. Provided, further, that the appointee has
successfully passed the required field training program and
has complied with other requirements as may be established
by the Commission. Provided, furthermore, that the chief of
police shall be appointed in accordance with the provisions
of Section 51, paragraph (b), subparagraph 4 (i) of this
Act.”
 38

Attrition by Attainment of Maximum Tenure in Position

The maximum tenure of PNP members holding key positions

is hereby prescribed as follows:

Position Maximum Tenure

Chief four (4) years

Deputy Chief four (4) years

Directors of the Staff Services four (4) years

Regional Directors six (6) years

Provincial/City Directors nine (9) years

Except for the Chief, PNP, no PNP member who has less
than one (1) year of service before reaching the compulsory
retirement age shall be promoted to a higher rank or
appointed to any other positions.

Attrition by Relief

A PNP uniformed personnel who has been relieved for

just cause and has not been given an assignment within two
(2) years after such relief shall be retired or separated.

Attrition by Demotion in Position or Rank

Any PNP personnel, civilian or uniformed who is

relieved and assigned to a position lower than that
established for his or her grade in the PNP staffing pattern
and who shall not be assigned to a position commensurate to
his or her grade within eighteen (18) months after such
demotion in position shall be retired or separated.

Attrition by Non-Promotion

Any PNP personnel who have not been promoted for a

 39

continuous period of ten (10) years shall be retired or

separated.

Attrition by Other Means

A PNP member or officer with at least five (5) years of

accumulated active service shall be separated based on the
following conditions.

a) inefficiency based on poor performance during the

last two (2) successive annual rating periods;

b) inefficiency based on unsatisfactory performance

for three (3) cumulative periods;

c) physical and/or mental incapacity to perform

police functions and duties, and

d) failure to pass the required entrance examinations

twice and/or finish the required career courses except for
justifiable reasons.

Rationalization of Promotion System

Within six (6) months after the effectivity of this

Act, the Commission shall establish a system of promotion
for uniformed and non-uniformed personnel of the PNP which
shall be based on merits and on the availability of vacant
positions in the PNP staffing pattern. Such system shall be
gender fair and shall ensure that women members of the PNP
shall enjoy equal opportunity for promotion as that of men.

Promotion by Virtue of Position

Any PNP personnel designated to any position whose rank

is lower than that which is required for such position
shall, after six (6) months of occupying the same, be
entitled to a rank adjustment corresponding to the position:
Provided, that the said personnel shall not be reassigned to
a position calling a higher rank until two (2) years from
the date of such rank adjustment. Provided, further, that
 40

any personnel designated to the position who does not posses

the established minimum qualifications therefore shall
occupy the same temporarily for not more than six (6) months
without reappointment or extension.

Promotions of the PNP

a) A uniformed member of the PNP shall not be

eligible for promotion to a higher position or rank unless
he or she has successfully passed the corresponding
promotional examinations given by the commission, or the
Bar, or the corresponding board examination for technical
services and other professions, has satisfactorily completed
the appropriate and accredited course in the PNPA or
equivalent training institutions, and has satisfactorily
passed the required psychiatric/psychological and drug test.
In addition, no uniformed member of the PNP shall be
eligible for promotion during the tendency of his or her
administrative and/or criminal case or unless he or she has
been cleared by the People’s Law Enforcement Board (PLEB)
and the Office of the Ombudsman or any complaints proffered
against him or her, if any.

b) Uniformed member of the PNP who has exhibited acts

of conspicuous courage and gallantry at the risk of his/her
life above and beyond the call of duty, shall be promoted to
the next higher rank. Provided, that such acts shall be
validated by the Commission based on established criteria.”

Retirement Benefits

Monthly retirement pay shall be fifty percent (50%) of

the base pay and longevity pay of the retired grade in case
of twenty (20) years of active service, increasing by two
and one-half percent (2.5%) for every year of active service
rendered beyond twenty (20) years to a maximum of ninety
percent (90%) for thirty six (36) years of active service
and over. Provided, that the uniformed personnel shall have
the option to receive in advance and in lump sum his
retirement pay for the first five (5) years. Provided
further, that payment of the retirement benefits in lump
shall be made within six (6) months from effectivity date of
retirement and/or the completion of service. Provided
 41

finally, that the retirement pay of the officers/non-

officers of the PNP shall be subject to adjustments based on
the prevailing scale base pay of police personnel in the
active service.

Permanent Physical Disability

An officer or non-officer who is permanently and

totally disabled as a result of injuries and/or suffered
sickness contracted in the performance of his duty as duty
certified by the National Police Commission, upon finding
and certification by the appropriate medical officer, that
the extent of the disability or sickness renders such member
unfit or unable to further perform the duties of his
position, shall be entitled to one year’s salary and to
lifetime pension equivalent to eighty percent (80%) of his
last salary, in addition to other benefits as provided under
existing laws.

Should such member who has been retired under permanent

total disability under this section die within five (5)
years from his retirement, his surviving legal spouse or if
there be none, the surviving dependent legitimate children
shall be entitled to the pension for the remainder of the
five (5) years guaranteed period.”

Status of Members of the Philippine National Police

The uniformed members of the PNP shall be considered

employees of the National Government and shall draw their
salaries there from. They shall have the same salary grade
level as that of the public school teachers. Provided, that
PNP members assigned in Metropolitan Manila, chartered
cities and first class municipalities may be paid financial
incentive by the local government unit concerned subject to
the availability of funds.

Early Retirement Program

Within three (3) years after the effectivity of this

Act, any PNP officer or non-commissioned officer may retire
and be paid separation benefits corresponding to a position
 42

two (2) ranks higher than his or her present rank subject to
the following conditions.

a) that at the time he or she applies for retirement,

he or she has already rendered at least ten (10) years of
continuous government service;

b) the applicant is not scheduled for separation or

retirement from the service due to the attrition system or
separation cause;

c) he or she has no pending administrative or

criminal case ; and

d) he or she have at least three (3) more years in

the service before reaching the compulsory retirement age
and at least a year before his or her maximum tenure in
position.

Rationalization of Retirement and Separation Benefits

The Commission shall formulate a rationalized

retirement and separation benefits schedule and program
within one (1) year from the effectivity of this Act for
approval by Congress. Provided, that the approved schedule
and program shall have retroactive effect in favor of PNP
members and officers retired or separated from the time
specified in the law, unless the retirement or separation
is for cause and the decision denies the grant of benefits.

Creation, Powers and Functions of the IAS

An Internal Affairs Service (IAS) of the PNP is hereby

created which shall:

a) pro-actively conduct inspections and audits on PNP

personnel units;

b) investigate complaints and gather evidence in

support of an open investigation;
 43

c) conduct summary hearings on PNP members facing

administrative charges;

d) submit a periodic report on the assessment,

analysis, and the evaluation of the character and behavior
of the PNP personnel and units to the Chief PNP and the
Commission;

e) file appropriate criminal cases against PNP

members before the court as evidence warrants and assist in
the prosecution of the cases;

d) provide assistance to the Office of the Ombudsman,

in cases involving the personnel of the PNP;

The IAS shall also conduct, motu propio, automatic

investigation of the following cases;

a) incidents where a police personnel discharges a

firearm;

b) incidents where death, serious physical injury, or

any violation of human rights occurred in the conduct of a
police operation;

c) incidents where evidence was compromised, tampered

with, obliterated, or lost while in the custody of police
personnel;

d) incidents where a suspect in the custody of the

police was seriously injured; and

e) incidents where the established rules of

engagement have been violated.

Finally, the IAS shall provide documents or

recommendations as regards to the promotion of the members
of the PNP or the assignment of PNP personnel to any key
position.

Organization of IAS

National, regional, and provincial offices of the

 44

Internal Affairs Service shall be established. Internal

Affairs Service shall be headed by an Inspector General who
shall be assisted by a Deputy Inspector General. The area
offices shall be headed by a Director while the provincial
offices shall be headed by a Superintendent. Provided, that
the head of the Internal Affairs Service shall be a civilian
who shall meet the qualification requirements provided
herein.

Appointments in IAS

The Inspector General shall be appointed by the

President upon the recommendation of the Director General
and duly endorsed by the Commission. Appointments of
personnel who shall occupy various positions shall be made
by the Inspector General and shall be based on an
established career pattern and criteria to be promulgated by
the commission.

Entry Qualifications to IAS

Entry to the Internal Affairs Service shall be

voluntary and subject to rigid screening where only PNP
personnel who have at least five (5) years experience in law
enforcement and who have no derogatory service records shall
be considered for appointment. Provided, that members of the
Bar may enter service laterally.

Inclusion of Supervisors and Superiors in IAS Investigation

The immediate superior or supervisor of the personnel

or units being investigated under the preceding section
shall be automatically included in the investigation of the
IAS to exclusively determine lapses in administration or
supervision.

Disciplinary Recommendations of the IAS

a) Any uniformed PNP personnel found guilty of any

cases mentioned in Section 39 of this Act and any immediate
superior or supervisor found negligent under Section 48
 45

shall be recommended automatically for dismissal or

demotion, as the case may be.

b) Recommendations by the IAS for the imposition of

disciplinary measures against erring PNP personnel, once
final, cannot be revised, set aside, or unduly delayed by
any disciplinary authority without just cause. Any
disciplining authority who fails to act or who acts with
abuse of discretion on the recommendation of the IAS shall
be made liable for gross neglect of duty. The case of erring
disciplinary authority shall be submitted to the Director
General for proper disposition.

Appeals on the Decisions Made by IAS

Decisions rendered by the provincial inspectors shall

be forwarded to the area internal affairs for review within
ten (10) working days upon the receipt thereof. Decisions of
the area offices may be appealed to the national office
through the Office of Inspector General. Decisions rendered
by the Inspector General may be appealed at the National
Appellate Board or to the court as may be appropriate.
Provided, that the summary dismissal powers of the Director
General and Regional Directors as provided in Section 42 of
Republic Act No. 6975 shall remain valid: Provided, further
That the existing jurisdiction over offenses as provided
under Republic Act No. 6975 shall not be affected.

Complaints Against the IAS

A complaint against any personnel or office of IAS

shall be brought to the Inspector General’s Office or to the
Commission as may be appropriate.
Citizen’s Complaints

Any complaint by a natural or juridical person against

any member of the PNP shall be brought before the
following:”

“1) Chiefs of Police, where the offense is punishable

by withholding of privileges, restriction to specified
limits, suspension or forfeiture of salary or any
combination thereof, for a period not exceeding fifteen (15)
 46

days;”

“2) Mayors of cities and municipalities, where the

offense is punishable by withholding of privileges,
restriction to specified limits, suspension or forfeiture of
salary, or any combination thereof, for a period of not less
than sixteen (16) days but not exceeding thirty (30) days;”

“3) People’s Law Enforcement Board, as created under

Section 43 hereof, where the offense is punishable by
withholding of privileges, restriction to specified limits,
suspension or forfeiture of salary, or any combination
thereof, for a period exceeding thirty (30) days or by
dismissal;”

“The commission shall provide in its implementing rules

and regulations a scale of penalties to be imposed upon any
member of the PNP under this section.”

Internal Discipline

On dealing with minor offenses involving internal

discipline found to have been committed by any regular
member of their respective commands, the duly designated
supervisors and equivalent officers of the PNP shall, after
due notice and summary hearing, exercise disciplinary powers
as follows:”

“1) Chief of Police or equivalent supervisors may

summarily impose the administrative punishment of admonition
or reprimand; restriction to specified limits, withholding
of privileges; forfeiture of salary or suspension; or any of
the combination of the foregoing. Provided, that, in all
cases, the total period shall not exceed fifteen (15) days;”

“2) Provincial directors or equivalent supervisors may

summarily impose administrative punishment of admonition or
reprimand; restriction to specified limits: withholding of
privileges, forfeiture of salary or suspension; or any of
the combination of the foregoing. Provided, that, in all
cases, the total period shall not exceed thirty (30) days;”

“3) Police regional directors or equivalent

supervisors shall have the power to impose upon any member
 47

the disciplinary punishment of dismissal from the service.

He may also impose the administrative punishment of
admonition of reprimand; restrictive custody; withholding of
privileges; suspension or forfeiture of salary; demotion; or
any combination of the foregoing. Provided, that, in all
cases, the total period shall not exceed sixty (60) days;”

“4) The Chief of the PNP shall have the power to

impose upon any member the disciplinary punishment of
dismissal from the service; suspension or forfeiture of
salary; or any combination thereof for a period not
exceeding one hundred eighty (180) days. Provided, further,
that the chief of the PNP shall have the authority to place
police personnel under restrictive custody during the
pendency of a grave administrative case filed against him or
even after the filing of a criminal complaint, grave in
nature, against such police personnel.”

Exclusive Jurisdiction

A complaint or a charge filed against a PNP member

shall be heard and decided exclusively by the disciplining
authority who has acquired original jurisdiction over the
case and notwithstanding the existence of concurrent
jurisdiction as regards the offense. Provided, that offenses
which carry higher penalties shall be referred to the
appropriate authority which has jurisdiction over the
offense.

“For purpose of this Act, a ‘minor offense’ shall refer

to any act or commission not involving moral turpitude, but
affecting the internal discipline of the PNP, and shall
include, but not limited to:”

“1) Simple misconduct or negligence;”

“2) Insubordination;”

“3) Frequent absences and tardiness;”

“4) Habitual drunkenness;” and

“5) Gambling prohibited by law.”

 48

Forum shopping or multiple filing of complaints. – When

an administrative complaint is filed with a police
disciplinary authority, such as the People’s Law Enforcement
Board (PLEB), no other case involving the same cause of
action shall be filed with any other disciplinary authority.

Summary Dismissal Powers of the National Police Commission,

PNP Chief and PNP Regional Directors

The National Police Commission, the Chief of the PNP

and PNP regional directors, after due notice and summary
hearings, may immediately remove or dismiss any respondent
PNP member in any of the following cases:

“a) When the charge is serious and the evidence of

guilt is strong;”

“b) When the respondent is a recidivist or has been

repeatedly charged and there are reasonable grounds to
believe that he is guilty of the charges;” and

“c) When the respondent is guilty of a serious offense

involving conduct unbecoming of a police officer.”

“Any member or official of the PNP who shall go on

absence without official leave (AWOL) for a continuous
period of thirty (30) days or more shall be dismissed
immediately from the service. His activities and whereabouts
during the period shall be investigated and if found to have
committed a crime, he shall be prosecuted accordingly.

Disciplinary Appellate Boards

The formal administrative disciplinary machinery of the

PNP shall be the National Appellate Board and the regional
appellate boards.”

“The National Appellate Board shall be composed of the

four (4) regular commissioners and shall be chaired by the
executive officer. The board shall consider appeals from
decisions of the Chief of the PNP.”
 49

“The National Appellate Board may conduct its hearing

or sessions in Metropolitan Manila or any part of the
country as it may deem necessary.”

There shall be at least one (1) regional appellate

board per administrative region in the country to be
composed of a senior officer of the regional Commission as
Chairman and one (1) representative each from the PNP, and
the regional peace and order council as members. It shall
consider appeals from decisions of the regional directors,
other officials, mayors, and the PLEBs. Provided, that the
Commission may create additional regional appellate boards
as the need arises.

Preventive Suspension Pending Criminal Case

Upon filing of a complaint or information sufficient in

form and substance against a member of the PNP for grave
felonies where the penalty imposed by law is six (6) years
and one (1) day or more, the court shall immediately suspend
the accused from office for a period not exceeding ninety
(90) days from arraignment. Provided, however, that if it
can be shown by evidence that the accused is harassing the
complainant and/or witnesses, the court may order the
preventive suspension of the accused PNP member even if the
charge is punishable by a penalty lower than six (6) years
and one (1) day. Provided, further, that such preventive
suspension shall not be more than ninety (90) days except if
the delay in the disposition of the case is due to the
fault, negligence or petitions of the respondent. Provided,
finally, that such preventive suspension may be sooner
lifted by the court in the exigency of the service upon
recommendation of the Chief, PNP. Such case shall be subject
to continuous trial and shall be terminated within ninety
(90) days from arraignment of the accused.

Creation and Functions of the Women’s Desks

The PNP shall established women’s desk in all police

stations throughout the country to administer and attend to
cases involving crimes against chastity, sexual harassment,
abuses committed against women and children and other
similar offenses. Provided, that the municipalities and
 50

cities presently without policewomen will have two (2) years

upon the effectivity of this Act within which to comply with
the requirement of this provision.

Prioritization of Women for Recruitment

Within the next five (5) years, the PNP shall

prioritize the recruitment and training of women who shall
serve in the women’s desk. Pursuant to this requirement, the
PNP shall reserve ten percent (10%) of its annual
recruitment, training, and education quota for women.

Non-Prohibition for Promotion

Notwithstanding in this title shall be construed as a

restriction on the assignment of the policewomen to other
positions in the PNP or shall any provisions of this title
be used for the non-promotion of a PNP female personnel to
higher position.

Operational Supervision and Control

The term ‘operational supervision and control’ shall

mean the power to direct, superintend, and oversee the day-
to-day functions of police investigation of crime, crime
prevention activities, and traffic control in accordance
with the rules and regulations promulgated by the
Commission.

It shall also include the power to direct the

employment and deployment of units or elements of the PNP,
through the station commander, to ensure public safety and
effective maintenance of peace and order, prevention of
crimes, arrest of criminal offenders and bringing the
offenders to justice, and ensuring public safety,
particularly in the suppression of disorders, riots,
lawlessness, violence, rebellious and seditious conspiracy,
insurgency, subversion or other related activities.

Employment refer to the utilization of units or

elements of the PNP for purposes of protection of lives and
properties, enforcement of laws, maintenance of peace and
 51

order and prevention of crime, arrest of criminal offenders

and bringing the offenders to justice, and ensuring public
safety, particularly in the suppression of disorders, riots,
lawlessness, violence, rebellious and seditious conspiracy,
insurgency, subversion, or related activities.

On the other hand “deployment’ shall mean the orderly

and organized physical movement of elements or units of the
PNP within the province, city or municipality for purposes
of employment as herein defined.

Other Powers of the Municipal and City Mayor

In addition to the aforementioned power, city and

municipal mayors shall have the following authority over the
PNP units in their respective jurisdictions:”

“i) Authority to choose the chief of police from a

list of five (5) eligibles recommended by the provincial
police director, preferably from the same province, city or
municipality. Provided, however, that in no case shall an
officer in-charge be designated for more than thirty (30)
days. Provided, further, that the local peace and order
council may, through the city or municipal mayor, recommend
the recall or reassignment of the chief of police when, in
its perception, the latter has been ineffective in combating
crime or maintaining peace and order in the city or
municipality. Provided, finally, that such relief shall be
based on guidelines established by the NAPOLCOM.

“ii) Authority to recommend to the provincial director

the transfer, reassignment or detail of PNP members outside
of their respective city or town residences,” and

“iii)Authority to recommend from a list of eligibles

previously screened by the peace and order council the
appointment of new members of the PNP to be assigned to
their respective cities or municipalities without which no
such appointments shall be attested. Provided, that whenever
practical and consistent with the requirements of the
service, PNP members shall be assigned to the city or
municipality of their residence.”

The control and supervision of anti-gambling operations

 52

shall be within the jurisdiction of local government

executives.

Local Government Executives as Commission’s Representatives

Governors and mayors, upon having been elected and

having qualified as such, are automatically deputized as
representatives of the National Police Commission in their
respective jurisdiction. As deputized agents of the
Commission, local government executives can inspect police
forces and units, conduct audit, and exercise other
functions as may be duly authorized by the Commission.

Suspension or Withdrawal of Deputation

Unless reversed by the President, the Commission may,

after consultation with the provincial governor and
congressman concerned, suspend or withdraw the deputation of
any local executive for any of the following grounds:”

“a) Frequent unauthorized absences;”

“b) Abuse of authority;”

“c) Providing material support to criminal elements;”

“d) Engaging in acts inimical to national security or

which negate the effectiveness of the peace and order
campaign.”

“Upon good cause shown, the President may directly or

through the Commission, motu propio restore such deputation
withdrawn from any local executive.”

The People’s Law Enforcement Board (PLEB)

Creation and Functions. The sangguniang

panlungsod/bayan in every city and municipality shall create
such number of People’s Law Enforcement Boards (PLEBs) as
may be necessary. Provided, that there shall be at least one
(1) PLEB for every five hundred (500) city or municipal
police personnel and for each of the legislative districts
 53

in a city.”

“The PLEB shall be the central receiving entity for any

citizen’s complaint against the officers and members of the
PNP. Subject to the provisions of Section 41 of Republic Act
No. 6975, the PLEB shall take cognizance of or refer the
complaint to the proper disciplinary or adjudicatory
authority within three (3) days upon the filing of the
complaint.”

“3) Three (3) other members who are removable only for
cause to be chosen by the local peace and order council from
among the respected members of the community known for their
probity and integrity, one (1) of whom must be a woman and
another a member of the Bar, or, in the absence thereof, a
college graduate, or the principal of the central elementary
school in the locality.”

The Chairman of the PLEB shall be elected from among

its members. The term of office of the members of the PLEB
shall be for a period of three (3) years from assumption of
office. Such member shall hold office until his predecessor
shall have been chosen and qualified.

Request for Preventive Suspension

The PLEB may ask any authorized superior to impose

preventive suspension against a subordinate police officer
who is the subject of a complaint lasting up to a period as
may be allowed under the law. A request for preventive
suspension shall not be denied by the superior officer in
the following cases:

a) when the respondent refuses to heed the PLEB’s

summons or subpoena;

b) when the PNP personnel has been charged with the

offenses involving bodily harm or grave threats;

c) when the respondent is in a position to tamper the

evidence.
 54

d) when the respondents is in a position to unduly

influence the witnesses.

Any superior who fails to act on any request for

suspension without valid grounds shall be held liable for
serious neglect of duty.
 55

REVIEW QUESTIONS

POLICE ORGANIZATION & ADMINISTRATION

==================================================================

INSTRUCTIONS: Select the correct answer for each of the following

questions

1. It is known as the Philippine National Police Reform and

Reorganization Act of 1988.

A. RA 8515 B RA 8551
C. RA 8155 D. RA 8115

2. One of the roles of PNP shall through __________ and

performance of its ordinary functions support the AFP on matters
involving suppression of insurgency.

A. information gathering B. intelligence gathering

C. internal security D. counter-insurgency

3. The NAPOLCOM is composed of a Chairperson, four (4) regular

Commissioners, and the Chief, PNP is __________.

A. Executive Officer B. Ex-Officio Chairperson

C. Regular Commissioner D. Ex-Officio Member

4. The NAPOLCOM shall exercise administrative control and

__________ over the PNP.

A. operational control B. administrative supervision

C. employ and deploy D. operational supervision

5. No person shall be appointed regular Commissioners of the

NAPOLCOM, EXCEPT.

A. citizens of the Phil. B. member of the Phil. Bar

C. member of the Press D. member of the NGO

6. The term of office of the four (4) regular Commissioners

upon appointment by the President is for a term of __________
years without reappointment or extension.

A. two (2) years B. four (4) years

C. six (6) years D. three (3) years
 56

7. In case of absence due to temporary incapacity of the

Chairperson, NAPOLCOM, who will serve as the Chairperson?

A. DILG Secretary B. Executive Officer

C. Regular Commissioner D. Ex-Officio Member

8. Any superior officer who fails to act on the request made by

the PLEB for the suspension of subordinate police personnel can
be held liable for what particular administrative cases.

A. neglect of duty B. conduct unbecoming

C. in-action D. serious neglect of duty

9. RA 8551 was approved by former Pres. Ramos on what date.

A. February 15, 1998 B. February 25, 1998

C. February 5, 1998 D. February 25, 1989

10. The three (3) other members of the PLEB shall be chosen by
the local __________ from among the respected members of the
community known for their probity and integrity.

A. Sanguniang Panglunsod B. Sanguniang Pambayan

C. Peace & Order Council D. Local Executives

11. The preference in choosing the members of the PLEB shall be

as follows, member of the Bar, college graduate or the principal
of the central elementary school, and one must be __________.

A. ABC Captain B. Councilor

C. man D. woman

12. The term of office of the PLEB shall be for a period of how
many years.

A. two (2) years B. three (3) years

C. four (4) years D. five (5) years

13. Is the central receiving entity for any citizens’ complaint

against any officers and members of the PNP.

A. Chief of Police B. Provincial Director

C. IAS D. PLEB

14. It is the orderly and organized physical movement of

elements or units of the PNP through the Chief of Police.

A. employment B. deploy
 57

C. employ D. deployment
15. It shall mean the power to direct, superintend and oversee
the day-to-day functions of police investigation of crime, crime
prevention, and traffic control.

A. operational control b. operational supervision

C. all of the above d. non of the above

16. It shall be established by the PNP in all police stations

throughout the country to administer and attend cases involving
women and children.

A. Women’s Desk B. Children’s Desk

C. Complain Desk D. Desk Officer

17. In the prioritization of women for recruitment, the PNP

shall reserve how many percent to its annual quota for
recruitment and education.

A. 15% B. 20%
C. 10% D. 5%

18. Upon filing of the complaint or information the court can

immediately suspend the respondent PNP members after arraignment
for a period of __________ days, if the impossible penalty is six
(6) years and one (1) day or more.

A. 30 days B. 60 days
C. 90 days D. 120 days

19. It shall consider appeals from the decisions made by the

Chief, PNP.

A. NAB B. RAB
C. NAPOLCOM D. DILG

20. It shall consider appeal from the decisions made by police

authorities other than the Chief, PNP, Mayors and the PLEB.

A. NAB B. RAB
C. NAPOLCOM D. DILG

21. The members of the RAB shall be as follows, EXCEPT.

A. member of the RPOC B. member of the commission

C. politicians D. representative from PNP
 58

22. For how many days can a member of the PNP who will undergo
on absence without official leave be dismissed immediately in the
police service.

A. 15 days B. 30 days
C. 30 days or more D. 16 days of more

23. Summary dismissal powers are provided to the following

authorities over officers and members of the PNP, EXCEPT.

A. NAPOLCOM B. Chief, PNP

C. PLEB D. Regional Director

24. It shall refer to any act or omission, but not involving

moral turpitude but affecting the internal discipline of the PNP.

A. major offenses B. minor offenses

C. neglect of duty D. serious offenses

25. It is any complaint filed by natural or juridical persons

against any officers of members of the PNP.

A. complaint B. information
C. citizen’s complaint D. minor offenses

26. The complaint against any members of the IAS can be brought
to the NAPOLCOM and to the __________.

A. Inspector General B. Chief, PNP

C. Ombudsman D. Sandiganbayan

27. How many days can a decisions rendered by the Provincial IAS
be forwarded to the Regional IAS for review.

A. 10 days B. 20 days
C. 15 days D. 30 days

28. Decisions rendered by the Regional IAS can be appealed

through what particular office.

A. Inspector General B. Chief, PNP

B. NAPOLCOM D. Internal Affairs Office

29. The Inspector General shall be appointed by the __________

upon recommendation of the Chief, PNP and duly endorsed by the
NAPOLCOM.

A. President B. Secretary, SILG

 59

C. Chairperson, NAPOLCOM D. Commission on Appointment

30. Entry to the IAS shall be voluntary and subject to rigid
screening where only PNP personnel who have at least __________
experience shall be considered for appointments.

A. 10 years B. 5 years
C. 15 years D. 20 years

31. No person shall be appointed PNP Provincial Director unless

he has satisfactorily met the following conditions and
qualifications, EXCEPT.

A. recommended by RD B. master’s degree

C. graduate of law D. political interference

32. No person shall be appointed Chief of Police of city police

stations, unless he has the following qualifications, EXCEPT.

A. graduate of law B. master’s degree

C. recommended by PD D. political interference

33. No person shall be appointed Chief of Police of municipal

police stations, unless he has the following qualifications,
EXCEPT.

A. 2nd year LLB C. recommended by PD

B. 12 master’s units D. political interference

34. The following can also be designated Chief of Police of city

or municipal police stations, provided they posses the initial
qualifications for appointment in the PNP, EXCEPT.

A. member of the Bar B. Licensed Criminologists

C. Graduate of the PNPA D. lateral entrants

35. Any PNP uniformed personnel who has been relieved for just
cause and has not been given assignment within two (2) years
after such relief shall be retired or separated, and that is.

A. attrition by relief B. attrition by other means

C. attrition by demotion D. attrition by non-promotion

36. Any PNP personnel with at least five (5) years of active
service shall be separated based on inefficiency, incapacity or
failure to pass the required entrance examination, and that is.

A. attrition by relief B. attrition by other means

C. attrition by demotion D. attrition by non-promotion
 60

37. Any PNP personnel who has not been promoted for a continuous
period of ten (10) years shall be retired or separated in the
police service, and that is.

A. attrition by relief B. attrition by other means

C. attrition by demotion D. attrition by non-promotion

38. Any PNP personnel who is relieved and assigned to a position

lower than what established for their rank in the staffing
pattern, and who has not assign to the position commensurate to
the rank is considered retired or separated, and that is.

A. attrition by relief B. attrition by other means

C. attrition by demotion D. attrition by non-promotion

39. The NAPOLCOM shall be the one to administer what kind of

examinations to the officers and members of PNP.

A. entrance B. promotional
C. all of the above D. non of the above

40. The maximum tenure of officer of the Regional Director, PROs

is how many years.

A. nine (9) years B. six (6) years

C. four (4) years D. non of the above

41. The maximum tenure of officer of the Provincial Director,

PPOs is how many years.

A. nine (9) years B. six (6) years

C. four (4) years D. non of the above

42. The maximum tenure of officer of the Chief, PNP, DCA, DCO,
CDS and Directorial Staffs is how many years.

A. nine (9) years B. six (6) years

C. four (4) years D. non of the above

43. Other positions higher than the Provincial Director, PPOs

shall have the maximum tenure of officer of how many years.

A. nine (9) years B. six (6) years

C. four (4) years D. non of the above
 61

44. Any personnel of the PNP who is permanently and totally

disable as a result in the performance of duty shall be entitled
to one year’s salary and to lifetime pension equivalent of how
many percent of their salary.

A. 50% B. 80%
C. 75% D. 90%

45. The monthly retirement pay shall be equivalent to how many

percent of the base pay and longevity pay of the retired grade in
case of twenty (20) years of active service.

A. 50% B. 80%
C. 75% D. 90%

46. PNP personnel are entitled for ______ to any position whose
rank is lower that which is required for such position, after six
(6) months of occupying such position.

A. rank adjustment B. rank re-classification

C. promotion D. demotion

47. Uniformed members of the PNP who has exhibited __________

and gallantry at the risk of life beyond the call of duty shall
be promoted to the next higher rank.

A. conspicuous courage B. heroism

C. bravery D. commendable deeds

48. The following are the qualifications for the regular

promotion, EXCEPT.

A. promotional exam. B. career schooling

C. pending cases D. time-in-grade

49. Personnel of the IAS, in addition to other allowances

authorized under existing law be granted occupational specialty
pay of how many percent in their base pay.

A. 50% B 25%
C. 75% D. 100%

50. The members of the PNP is considered as employees of the

__________ and shall draw their salaries there from, and they
shall have the same salary grade level as that of public school
teachers.

A. local government B. provincial government

 62

C. municipal government D. national government

51. It is defines as the process of directing and controlling
people and things so that organizational objective can be
accomplished.

A. police management B. police supervision

C. management function D. police leadership

52. It is refers to the act of overseeing subordinates and line

officers.

A. police management B. police supervision

C. management function D. police leadership

53. This is working in broad outline the things that need to

accomplish the purpose set for the enterprise.

A. directing B. staffing
C. organizing D. planning

54. This is the establishment of the formal structure of

authority through which work sub-divisions are arranged, defined,
and coordinated for the defined objectives.

A. directing B. staffing
C. organizing D. planning

55. This is the whole personnel functions of bringing in and

training the staff, and maintaining favorable conditions of work.

A. directing B. staffing
C. organizing D. planning

56. This is the continuous task of making decisions, embodying

them in specific general orders and instructions, and serving as
the leader of the enterprise.

A. directing B. staffing
C. organizing D. planning

57. This is the important duty of inter-relating the various

parts of the work.

A. reporting B. budgeting
C. coordinating D. management function
 63

58. That is keeping those to whom the police executive is

responsibly informed as what is going on which thus included
keeping himself and his subordinates informed through records and
inspection.

A. reporting B. budgeting
C. coordinating D. management function

59. This is the accounting and control of funds and resources in

the form of fiscal and budget plans.

A. reporting B. budgeting
C. coordinating D. management function

60. It is a mechanical means depicting by arrangement of symbols

the relationship which exists between individuals, groups and
functions.

A. organization B. organizational structure

C. structure D. staffing pattern

61. It is often called as the individual, military or

departmental type of organization, and it is the simplest, and
perhaps the oldest type of organizational structure.

A. line and staff type B. functional type

C. line type D. staffing pattern

62. It is rarely found in present day organization except at or

near the top of a very largest establishment.

A. line and staff type B. functional type

C. line type D. staffing pattern

63. It is a combination of the line and functional type, and it

is found in almost all but the very smallest police organization.

A. line and staff type B. functional type

C. line type D. staffing pattern

64. Organizational structure is established to designate how

work is to be divided among the various components of the
establishment.

A. delegation of work B. span of control

C. unity of command D. division of work
 64

65. In addition of providing a logical arrangement of work,

organizational structure should provide clear-cut channels of
authority.

A. delegation of work B. span of control

C. unity of command D. division of work

66. It is initially adopted from psychologists, which refers to

the number of person an individual can supervise effectively.

A. delegation of work B. span of control

C. unity of command D. division of work

67. It is refers to the process of committing an activity to

another’s care.

A. delegation of work B span of control

C. unity of command D. division of work

68. This principle involves the practice of delegation

contribute to the development of subordinates to perform the
supervisor’s job in the boss absence or when the boss is unable
to act.

A completed staff work B. exception principle

C. personnel development D. leadership ability

69. This principle involves the training of subordinates to take

over in the boss’ absence.

A. completed staff work B. exception principle

C. personnel development D. leadership ability

70. This principle requires that the person to whom work has
been assigned through the delegation process is to complete it.

A. completed staff work B. exception principle

C. personnel development D. leadership ability

71. It is the art of influencing, directing, guiding and

controlling others in such a way as to obtain their cooperation
in the accomplishment of an objective.

A. management B. leadership
C. supervision D. control & direction
 65

72. To some denotes a military bearing, to other it means a

distinctive type of appearance and conduct.

A. command presence B. leadership

C. management D. supervision

73. This is an act establishing the PNP under the reorganized

DILG and for other purposes.

A. RA 6975 B. RA 9675
C. RA 6957 D. RA 9675

74. This is the particular section of the Constitution that

mandated the establishment of PNP.

A. Sec. 6, Art. XVI B. Sec. 16, Art. VI

C. Sec. 9, Art, VI D. Sec. 61, Art. XVI

75. As provided by the Constitution, this expressly provide the

establishment of a national police which shall be national in
scope and __________.

A. civilian in character B. administered by NAPOLCOM

C. govern by the mayor D. decentralized policing

76. The regional offices of the DILG shall be headed by Regional

Director, and shall be assisted by two (2) Assistant Regional
Directors, one for jail management and penology and one for
__________.

A. local government B. fire protection

C. public safety D. peace and order

77. The PNP shall be headed by a Chief, and who shall be

assisted by two Deputy Chiefs, from among the two deputies who is
the second in command.

A. Dep. for Admin. B. Dep. for Opns.

C. Dep. for Intel. D Dep. for Pers.

78. The ideal manning levels of the PNP shall be approximately

in accordance with the __________ police-to-population ratio.

A. 1:1,000 B. 1:500
C. 1:2,000 D. 1:1,500
 66

79. These are vested in the Chief, PNP who shall have the power
to direct and control tactical as well as strategic movements,
deployment, placement, utilization of the PNP units.

A. command & direction B. leadership & authority

C. mgmnt. & supervision D. employment & deployment

80. The city and municipal mayors has the power to choose from a
list of how many eligibles recommended by the provincial
director, prior designation as chief of police.

A. 5 B. 3
C. 4 D. 6

81. The third in command in the PNP is the __________.

A. Dep. for Opns. B. Dep. for Admin.

C. Dep. for Intel. D. Dep. for Pers.

82. The head of the PNP shall have the position title of the
Chief, PNP, and who shall have the rank of _________.

A. Chief Superintendent B. Director

C. Dep. Director General D. Director General

83. The head of the provincial offices shall be known as the

__________.

A. Provincial Director B. Provincial Superintendent

C. Provincial Head D. Provincial Chief of Police

84. The head of the regional offices shall be known as the

__________.

A. Regional Director B. Regional Superintendent

C. Regional Head D. Regional Chief of Police

85. The head of the city or municipal police stations shall be

known as the __________.

a. Station Commander b. Chief of Police

c. Police Supervisor d. Municipal Police Head

86. PO1 to SPO4 are being appointed by the __________, confirmed

 67

by the NAPOLCOM, except to those assigned at the NHQ.

A. President B. Chief, PNP

C. Regional Director D. DILG

87. Police Inspector to Police Superintendent are being

appointed by the __________, and attested by the NAPOLCOM.

A. President B. Chief, PNP

B. Regional Director D. DILG

88. The appointment of Doctors of Medicine, members of the Bar,

and Chaplains shall commence with the rank of _________.

A. Inspector B. Chief Inspector

C. Senior Inspector D. Senior Police Officer IV

89. Police Senior Superintendent to Deputy Director General are

being appointed by the __________, upon recommendation made by
the NAPOLCOM, endorsed by the CSC and confirmed by the CA.

A. President B. Chief, PNP

C. Regional Director D. DILG

90. Police Director General are being appointed by the President

from among the senior officer down to the rank of __________.

A. Police Director B. Police Chief Superintendent

C. Police Superintendent D. Deputy Director General

91. The compulsory retirement age for the officers and members of
the PNP shall be upon the attainment of what age.

A. 50 years B. 46 years
C. 65 years D. 56 years

92. The optional retirement for the officers and members of the
PNP is upon accumulation of how many years of satisfactory
service.

A. 30 years B. 10 years
C. 15 years D. 20 years

93. The city/municipal mayors were given disciplinary power to

impose suspension, restriction, or forfeiture of salary for how
many days.

A. 16 - 30 days B. 1- 15 days
C. 31 – 60 days D. 61 – 180 days
 68

94. The provincial directors were given disciplinary power to

impose suspension, restriction, or forfeiture of salary for how
many days.

A. 16 - 30 days B. 1- 15 days
C. 31 – 60 days D. 61 – 180 days

95. The regional directors were given disciplinary power to impose

suspension, restriction, or forfeiture of salary for how many
days.

A. 16 - 30 days B. 1- 15 days
C. 31 – 60 days D. 61 – 180 days

96. The chiefs of police were given disciplinary power to impose

suspension, restriction, or forfeiture of salary for how many
days.

A. 16 - 30 days B. 1- 15 days
C. 31 – 60 days D. 61 – 180 days

97. The city/municipal mayor has the power to choose from a list
of how many eligibles recommended by the provincial director prior
designation as provincial director.

A. 5 B. 3
C. 4 D. 6

98. The Chief, PNP was given disciplinary power to impose

suspension, restriction, or forfeiture of salary for how many
days.

A. 16 - 30 days B 1 - 15 days
C. 31 – 60 days D. 61 – 180 days

99. The PLEB was given disciplinary power to impose the following
administrative penalties, EXECPT.

A. dismissal B. suspension
C. demotion D. restriction

100. The provincial governor has the power to choose from a list
of how many eligibles recommended by the regional director, prior
designation as provincial director.
 69

A. 5 B. 3
C. 4 D. 6
 70

P A R T II
POLICE INTELLIGENCE & SECRET SERVICE
 71

CHAPTER

HISTORY OF INTELLIGENCE
===========================================================

Introduction

The history of the military and police intelligence

provides some interesting insights, for it appears that only
rarely does an untried intelligence concept come. The artful
employers of intelligence agents have been a legion. We
could never possibly count them all, and probably, the
greatest of them are unknown to history. Historians, in
their “greatman” treatment of history have somewhat
neglected the commanders of the secret, invisible army of
intelligence agents which have had a profound effect on the
course of events.

Early Intelligence Personalities

The following are some of the early personalities, who

immensely contributed in the field of police operational
intelligence.

1. Moses

One of the first recorded formalized intelligence

efforts with format can be found in the Holy Bible (Numbers
13:17):

The scriptures named the twelve intelligence agents

whom the Lord directed Moses to send into the land of Canaan
(Numbers 13:3-15) and records that “all those men were heads
of the Children of Israel.” When Moses sent them North to
spy out the land, he did not propose a mere topographical
expedition or cursory exploration.

Had Moses distributed his twelve intelligence agents as

cross-country chain, with each other dependent upon the
 72

cooperation of his eleven associates, we would be able to

trace the origin of organized and systematic intelligence
from its earliest environment. The biblical record, however,
is clear; the instructions to the intelligence agents of
Israel show that they formed an espionage duplicated a dozen
times to allow for the probabilities of discovery and death.

2. Alexander the Great

The necessities of compression and the complexities of

more modern intelligence services draw us rapidly down the
earlier centuries. When Alexander the Great was marching
into Asia, it is recorded there came to his hints, and
rumors of disaffection growing among his allies and
mercenaries.

The young conqueror thereupon sought the truth and got

it by the simplest expedient. He announced that he was
writing home and recommended to his officers that they do
likewise. Then, when the couriers were ladened and had set
out for Greece, he ordered them quietly recalled and
proceeded to investigate all the letters that they carried.
Malcontents were detected, legitimate causes of grievances
exposed.

3. Akbar

By means of remarkably devised operations of

intelligence, the Mongul emperor of India regulated a vast
and populous realm having the utmost social and religious
complexity. Akbar as the “Great Mongul,” with no pressing
anxiety about his neighbors or interest in espionage beyond
his own frontiers. This sagacious master of Hindustan
employed more than four thousands agents for the sole
purpose of bringing him the truth that his throne might rest
upon it.

4. Genghis Khan

The Golden Emperor of Cathay unwisely asked Genghis

Khan of Mongol aid in his continual war upon the ancient
house of Sung in South China. Chepe Noyon, “. . . with his
weakness for wearing sable boots” was sent a force of
cavalry to fight beside the Cathayans while closely
observing the riches of their land.
 73

Soon after the return of this intelligence expedition

Genghis Khan began preparing to invade Cathay. This was his
first attempt upon a civilized power of superior defensive
strength, and even now he launched his campaign by
dispatching beyond the great wall of contingent of spies and
scouts, who were “to capture and bring back informers.”
Espionage and artifice had a vital part in the Mongol
conquest of China.

5. Frederick the Great

Frederick the Great, father of organized military

espionage, has been quoted as saying that he had, when in
the field, one cook and hundred agents. It was his habit to
divide his agents into four classes. The energetic Prussian
did more than classify, he established rules for obtaining
and using every grade of spy of intelligence agent.

1) Common Spies

Recruited among poor folk, glad to earn small sum

or to accommodate a military officer.

2) Double Spies

The low informers and unreliable renegades of

value chiefly in spreading false information to the
enemy.

3) Spies of Consequences

Courtiers and noblemen, staff officers and kindred

conspirators, invariably requiring a substantial bribe
or bait.

4) Intimidated Spies

Persons who are forced to undertake espionage

against their will.

6. Many Others
 74

World War I and the related period contributed many

names of the roll call of intelligence agents. Those who
made major contributions are only few in number compared to
those who were caught and executed or imprisoned. However,
whether they died or not, a certain few had a considerable
impact on the history of their countries and some cases,
upon the future of mankind. Wassmuss of Persia, Captain Von
Rintelen, Mata Hari, Edith Canell, Alice Dubois, Captain M.
Cumming, Colonel Lawrence, and Elizabeth Schragmiller, were
by no means the only great agents. Space does not permit
recapitulation of their exploits, but one fact emerges, the
military leaders of the various nations were beginning to
formalize the intelligence activity and give it a much more
important role in the military and police affairs.

Intelligence in the Local Setting

During the Spanish era, the “Cabeza de Barangay” was

the head and leader of a group of settlers. The discipline
and punishment, as well as the conduct of government are
made by the barangay head. As the group increased in number,
the “cabeza” had to appoint certain trustworthy people to
keep watch. These “eyes and ears” made reports to the head,
not only for his protection but for suspicious outsiders
infiltrating within the settlement.

For money, favors, positions, or other motivations,

many did work for the Spaniards as agents, informants, or
undercover. The clergy had been mentioned by Rizal’s works
as part of the intelligence network. The discovery of the
secret of “Katipunan” was through some Filipino informers of
the Filipino armed movements that had spies in each others
camps.

When the Philippines’ was granted its Commonwealth

government by the U.S. in November 15, 1935, the first act
of the legislative body was the National Defense Act. This
act among other provisions, organized the citizens army
whereby with a small professional core, twenty-year old male
citizens would undergo compulsory military training, under
the Staff of the Army Headquarters, which was then the G-2,
or the Staff Officer for Intelligence.
Again, intelligence as a part of the military
establishment has staff units in all the major services, as
 75

well as in the Headquarters. Known as the “two’s,” each

service has its staff and field components involved in
military intelligence. Worthy of mentioning is the
Intelligence Service at Headquarters’ level, and the
intelligence unit in the major services, the task forces,
independent military groups, and the area commands.

Police Intelligence in the Present Era

By virtue of R.A. 6975, the Philippine National Police

(PNP) which is civilian in character and national in scope
was established under the reorganized Department of the
Interior and Local Government (DILG). One of the
directorates among others in the organizational structure of
the PNP is the Directorate for Intelligence. This
directorate is composed of four divisions, as follows:
Intelligence Operations Division; Counter-Intelligence &
Security Division; Foreign Liaison Division; and
Intelligence Research Division.

The mission of the Directorate for Intelligence is to

assist the Chief, PNP in attaining intelligence objectives
through staff direction, planning, coordination, control and
supervision of all intelligence and counter-intelligence
activities of the PNP. In addition, the Police Intelligence
Group (PIG) was also activated as one of the operational
support units of the PNP. The PIG is under the auspices of
the Directorate for Intelligence. Its function is to serve
as the intelligence and counter-intelligence operating unit
of the PNP.
 76

CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION TO POLICE INTELLIGENCE

===========================================================

Definition of Police Intelligence

It is the product resulting from the collection,

evaluation, analysis, integration, and interpretation of all
available information which concerns on or more aspects of
criminal activity, and which is immediately and potentially
significant to police planning.

Definition of Information

It is an evaluated material of every description

including those derived from observation, reports, rumors,
imagery, and other sources from which intelligence is
derived.

Major Categories of Intelligence

1. Strategic Intelligence

All intelligence data that are not of an immediate

value. The bulk of strategic intelligence is usually
descriptive in nature. The accumulation of physical
descriptions of personalities, their telephone numbers, and
known associates are virtually classic examples of strategic
intelligence.

2. Counter-Intelligence

Intelligence activity which is concerned principally

with the defending of the police organization against
penetration by individual and various groups who are
inimical to the best interest and general harmony. It is
concerned principally with the neutralizing and destroying
 77

attempts of individuals or groups that seek to discredit law

enforcement.

3. Line Intelligence

It involves both a process and an immediate product. It

can be said that line intelligence is the end product of
gathering and processing of information. That part of the
product which is of an immediate nature, and essential to
more effective police planning and operations.

Purpose of Intelligence Activity

Too often, police executives are required to make major

decisions based upon inadequate information. Intelligence
must fill the void often existing in police decision making.
Fundamentally stated, the purpose of the intelligence unit
is to increase the probability of accuracy, and reduced the
probability of error in operational staff decisions by
gathering the appropriate information. In other words, it
can be said that intelligence is the investigative arm of
the police planners.

Definition of Intelligence Cycle

It is a repetitive process used to produce intelligence

from information.

Phases of Intelligence Cycle

1. Collection of Intelligence Information

It is the systematic exploitation of sources of

information by collection agencies, and the delivery of
information obtained to the proper intelligence agency.

The collection phase is costly, time-consuming and many

times its rewards or fruits will be strategic in nature—the
long range. The great bulk of the data collected in most
cases will fall within the long range category, and will
thus create an unconcerned attitude on the part of some
 78

individuals. This is one of the dangers to the intelligence—

for it is the beginning of its direction.

It must not be forgotten that information is like any

other commodity in the world. It has a value sometimes more
important than gold itself. In the collection effort, a
general axiom that will develop is, “there is a direct
relationship between the quality of information and cost of
obtaining it.” On the occasion, this will not hold true,
however, its generic application is fundamental.

The collection effort must include the development of

sources of information in all levels of society within the
community of police jurisdiction. It is imperative that the
collection effort incorporate sources within area of all
organized crimes and subversive activities.

The collection of information also carries with it

responsibility for its evaluation concerning reliability of
the source and credibility of information, though usually
considered in conjunction with sources, parallel information
that is already known.
It might be well to state a highly reliable source on
some occasions will provide information that is not totally
true. Intelligence agencies require an evaluation of the
source of information to be contained within each agent
report. Below is a typical evaluation using letters and
numbers.

Information Evaluation Rating

Reliability of Source Accuracy of Information

A Highly Reliable 1 Confirmed Information
B Usually Reliable 2 Probably True
C Fairly Reliable 3 Possibly True
D Unreliable 4 Doubtfully True
E Cannot Be Judge 5 Cannot Be Judge

Within the collection phase of intelligence activity,

there arises that vital item, the “pertinence factor.”
Police intelligence collection effort must contain a
pertinence consideration. In other words, there must be some
method to keep intelligence personnel from dashing into
 79

remote tangent areas which paralyze their total productivity

with respect to overall existing police problems. In another
sense of the words, the pertinence rating is determined by
the existing problems at hand.

The examination of information for pertinence,

specifically determine whether or not the information is:
pertinent with regard to the criminals and subversives or
the characteristics of the area of operation; needed
immediately; and of possible present or future value, and if
so, to whom.

Sources of Information

Are persons, things, or actions from which

information about criminals and/or subversives, weather, and
terrain is derived. Examples: maps, air photos, enemy
documents, enemy materials, prisoners of war, and weather
forecast.

Sources of Information

Letters Meaning
T Direct Observation by the Police Executive
U Penetration and/or Resident Agent
V AFP Troops and PNP Personnel
W Tactical Interrogation of Captured Enemy
X Government Civilian Employee
Y Members of the Populace
Z Documentary Analysis

Most valuable information comes from overt sources.

Open sources probably contribute more than 80 percent of the
input to most police intelligence systems. Foreign and mass
media, including press, radio and television are a standard
source, and they require a massive effort in recording,
translating, and storing information.

Covert sources of intelligence are dramatic, falling

into the three major classifications as follows: aerial and
space reconnaissance, electronic eavesdropping and code
breaking, and intelligence operatives working at the classic
 80

spy trade. Broadly speaking, the value of each as a source

of crucial information is probably in descending order as
listed. This is because a photograph constitutes hard, i.e.,
reliable intelligence, whereas the report of an intelligence
operatives may be speculative and difficult to prove, and
therefore soft.

Definition of Collection Agency

Is any person, unit, or activity that collects

and/or processed information by research, surveillance, or
the exploitation of the source of information.

Criteria in the Selection of Collection Agencies

1) Suitability

The collection task assigned to a unit must be

compatible with its primary mission. Only the agencies best
suited to furnish the information are used.

2) Multiplicity

Evaluation of information requires that it must be

compared with the information received from other sources
and agencies. Subject to the consideration of suitability
and capability more than one agency is used to obtain each
item of required information.

3) Balance

Within the time limits imposed by other

considerations, the collection workload must be balanced
from among the collection agencies. Balance is a minor
consideration when compared with the importance of other
factors.

4) Capability

An agency must be physically capable of providing

the desired information in a timely manner.
 81

2. Processing of Intelligence Information

It is in this phase in the intelligence cycle in which

information becomes intelligence.

The optical scanners and other refinements the fourth

generation computers will undoubtedly perform intelligence
functions beyond our widest imagination. The utilization of
“single print” fingerprint system, plus other factors, keyed
to these data processing giants will rapidly identify and
isolate, at a phenomenal speed, members of organized crimes
and subversive agents. However, it is doubtful that they
will ever be substitute for the values of personal contacts
by members of the intelligence community.

Though record complexes involving education, health,

welfare, vehicles, drivers’ license, military service, and
thousands other unrelated specifics will be very valuable.
Such things as liaison programs, informant networks,
clipping services, and de-briefing programs will still be
required, perhaps even more than ever.

Today, as well as in the future, “the processing phase

of intelligence activity is the most expensive and time
consuming activity.” The conversion of data into a useable
product, acceptable to the vast majority, will still require
the greatest expenditure of money. Data processing involves
the following:

1) Integration or Recording

It is the reduction of information to writing or

some other form of graphical representation and the
arranging of information into groups related items.

2) Evaluation

It is the determination of the pertinence or

significance of the information relative to police
operations, reliability of the sources or agency, and the
accuracy of the information.

3) Analysis and Interpretation

 82

It is the determination of the significance of the

information relative to the information and the intelligence
already known and drawing deductions about the probable
meaning of the evaluated information.

3. Dissemination and Use of Information

It is the timely conveyance of information and or

intelligence in an appropriate form, and by any suitable
means to those who need it. The primary purpose of timely
dissemination is to enable the police executive to make
decisions with confidence; a secondary purpose is to provide
knowledge in the light of which new information may be
processed.

Access to the intelligence products is one of the most

important issues facing any police executives. Few questions
take precedence over, “who should have this information?”
Lack of careful consideration of this question can have a
disastrous effect.

Two principles preclude the release of intelligence

information. First, there must be the “need to know” on the
part of the recipient. “Need to know” is not necessarily
determined by a person’s position in the organizational
hierarchy. “Need to know” is usually akin to the task
performed. Secondly, a potential recipient should be
“cleared” by responsible authority as being eligible to
receive the intelligence data. Line officers, particularly
those in patrol and intelligence functions, after proper
security orientation, should be designated by the police
executives. Those designated should know each other.

Confidential sources are the lifeline of the

intelligence effort. They must be protected at almost any
price. Therefore, it is apparent that the “need to know” and
proper clearance of the receiver are surpassed by the
consideration, “will the use of data destroy or endanger the
source of information?”

One informant in the right place is worth many

divisions of uniformed or plainclothes police officers.
Generally stated, police intelligence data having a medium-
to-high probability of compromising the source should not be
 83

released until it has been “sanitized”—source identifying

features be removed.

Means of Disseminating Information

1) Messages

This can be made by use of radio, utilization of

messengers or couriers, or by rapid means of signal
communication.

2) Personal Contact

It can be done by the use of telephone, personal

visits, and de-briefings.

3) Intelligence Documents

This is being accomplished through the transmittal

of documents in the form of periodic intelligence reports,
intelligence summaries, watch list, wanted list, operational
orders and intelligence annexes, terrain and weather
studies, and other special intelligence reports.

4. Direction of the Information Collection Effort

The collection effort should include a systematic

exploitation of all sources of information. This
exploitation must be continuous, methodical, and carefully
controlled. The collection must also include a complete
delivery of all the information obtained to the processing
component.

The police executive must make certain that he has what

he needs and when he needs it. He must continually wonder
what criminals and/or subversives are doing, thinking, or
planning for the future operations, and about the nature of
the terrain and/or environment not under his control.

Steps in Directing the Information Collection Effort

1) Determination of intelligence requirements.

 84

2) Determination of intelligence priorities.

3) Determination of those enemy activities or

characteristics of the area of operations which could
indicate the answers to the intelligence requirements, and
to determine the specific items of information.

4) Selection of collection agencies to be employed

and issuance of necessary order and request for the
collection of information.

5) Supervising the execution of orders and requests.

Importance of Intelligence and Information

1. To arrive at sound and timely decisions in

preparing plans and estimates for future operations, and in
conducting current operations.

2. To protect the police organization by avoiding

surprise, and denying the enemy information concerning it.

3. To assist in the processing of other information.

Definition of Priority Intelligence Requirements (PIRs)

PIRs are those intelligence requirements for which the

police executive has an anticipated and stated priority in
his task of planning and decision making. They are the
highest intelligence requirements, and are the basis for
intelligence operations, and are personally approved by the
police executive.

Definition of Other Information Requirements (OIRs)

Are those items of information regarding the criminals

and/or subversives, and his environment which needs to be
collected and/or processed in order to meet the intelligence
requirements of the police executives.
 85

Definition of Specific Orders/Request (SORs)

The product of the requirement analysis that are

required by the collection units or agencies in the form of
orders or request.

Definition of Intelligence Indicator

Are generalized theoretical actions that criminals

and/or subversives might be expected to take preparation for
aggressive actions, and that are things and/or events that
transpired in the past or things and/or events that are
presently occurring.

Aspects of Intelligence Cycle

1. Assessment

It is the shifting and evaluation of sorted information

to isolate insignificant elements with respect to the
mission and operation of the police organization.

2. Integration

Is the breakdown assessed intelligence and/or

information and integrate it into its corresponding group.

3. Deduction

Deduce conclusions from integrated intelligence and/or

information.

Tools in Recording Information

1. Intelligence Journal

It is the permanent official chronological record of

the operations of the intelligence section, unit or agency.
It includes all incoming and outgoing messages, and
significant incidents concerning the operation of the
intelligence section, unit or agency. Journal of entries
should reflect the following:
 86

1) An accurate and concise statement of message,

report or event.

2) A notation of the sender or individual making the

report, to include unit duty position.

3) The time of receipt or dispatch, and method of

transmission.

4) Action actually taken as a result, to include

dissemination given to reports or information received and
other internal recording means.

2. Intelligence Workbook

It is a device which provides a means of systematic

arrangement of information by type or subject, so that items
concerning a particular topic maybe grouped together for
ready reference and comparison.

3. Situation Map

It is graphic representation of the current enemy

situation. The situation is posted on the map by means of
appropriately colored signs and symbols.

The following types of entries pertaining to the enemy

should be posted on the situation map:

1) unit identification;

2) unit dispositions;

3) boundaries,

4) location of weapons;

5) obstacles or defensive installations;

6) strong points activities; 7) terrain data; and

7) roads and trails for movement of personnel.

 87

The purpose of the situation map is to contribute to

sound decisions. The primary uses of the situation map are:

1) To display enemy situation and disposition.

2) To provide a basis for comparison in order to

determine the significance of newly received data pertaining
to the enemy forces.

3) To provide a background for and basis for

briefings, and other required intelligence reports.

4) To provide the basis for overlays which

graphically portray the enemy situation.

5) To assist in the determination of patterns of

movement of insurgent forces.

6) To focus attention on possible intelligence gaps

which require re-direction of the collection effort.

The secondary intelligence use of the situation map is

to post—directly on it in its margins—the following
information:

1) computations of enemy personnel and weapons

strength;

2) organization charts of specified enemy units;

3) summarization of weather and terrain data;

4) listing of priority intelligence requirements;

5) notations pertaining to current patrol plans;

6) listing of friendly attachments; and

7) listing of enemy locations believed to be in area

of responsibility.

4. Intelligence Files
 88

These are files which are necessary to permit ready

access to all available information.

Most Commonly Maintained Intelligence Files

1. Journal File

The journal file contains a record copy of each message

or document noted in the journal. It supports the journal
and also a permanent and official record.

2. Information or Reference File

All information of possible future value is cross

indexed in this file. Much information is collected which
has no immediate interest but which may be of future value.

3. Order of Battle and Wanted List Files

Order of Battle is the identification, strength,

command structure, and disposition of personnel, units, and
equipment of subversive elements. While the wanted list
files is the consolidated list of persons with warrant of
arrest.

What is Interpretation of Information

It is consist of determining the significance of the

information with respect to other information or
intelligence ready on hand. It is accomplished by analysis
of the information, integration of significant items of
information with previously collected and processed
intelligence, and finally drawing conclusions as to the
probable meaning of information.

What is Police Intelligence Estimates

A police intelligence estimate is a study which

describes, discusses, and interprets the current crimes
and/or subversives situation in order to determine organized
crimes and/or insurgents capabilities, vulnerabilities, and
probable courses of actions. It also describes the effects
 89

of the area of operations upon both police and criminal

elements and/or subversive groups’ courses of actions.

Parts of Police Intelligence Estimates

1. Mission

It is a general statement describing the current police

internal defense, internal development, and psychological
operation’s responsibilities of the organization.

2. Area of Operation

It discusses the characteristics of the area of the

operating syndicate and/or subversive, and the probable
effect upon the police units and on itself.

3. Crime Situation or Subversive Condition

It describes the syndicate organization and/or

subversive structure, and its recent criminal activities
within that area or underlying areas.

4. Capabilities of Criminal or Subversive Groups

It enumerates the current criminal syndicate and/or

subversive groups’ capabilities and discusses the
probability of adoption of each capability.

5. Conclusions

It states the conclusions concerning the area upon

which police courses of action will effect the probable
action of the criminal elements and/or subversive groups,
and the exploiting of enemy vulnerabilities and weaknesses.

Liaison Activities

1. In General
 90

Probably the main reasons more people do not actively

assist the police lies in the simple fact that the police
fail to personally solicit their help. Liaison is little
more than making friends to those who have access to an
intelligence item, particularly people within organizations
and records systems. A liaison program is one of the
principal activities of police intelligence operations. A
limited liaison program will usually produce a limited
intelligence product.

2. Specific Assignments

One of the essential ingredients of a successful

liaison program is the specific assignment of personnel to
specific targets. With the full realization that staff
requests are usually in a constant state of change,
consistent with the situations, liaison assignments will
also be subject to some change.

3. Press Liaison

Any police organization that fails to remember that the

press always has the last word is slated for trouble. An
alert news media can be one of the most powerful forces in a
community in fighting the activities of organized crime.
Liaison with the press is therefore essential.

News Clipping and De-Briefing Activities

1. News Clipping

Clipping articles from newspapers in accordance with an

existing format is an important method of gathering
intelligence data. The communications networks of modern
newspapers make this an excellent source of highly valuable
material.

2. De-Briefing Activities

A de-briefing program can be established by simply

setting-up a tape recorder with speaker where officers going
 91

off duty can have access to it. The ground rules for its use
may vary. On, an intelligence analyst with a format in mind
may conduct one or two minute interviews with personnel
going off duty at a centralized location. Multiply this
activity by each precincts and the usable product may be
surprising, particularly after an orientation period has
past.

Use of Intelligence

A weekly intelligence summary is probably the most

common intelligence product available for use. The format
for this summary will vary widely, however this could
include the following:

1) in general terms a summary of organized crimes

activities;

2) subversive activities that will affect general

police operations;

3) minority activity, gang activities, particularly

juveniles;

4) a concise summary of crime and traffic trends;

5) information regarding nomadic hoodlums; and

6) a concise statement of vice activities.

 92

CHAPTER

SURVEILLANCE AND CASING

===========================================================

Conducting surveillance and casing is generally

expensive. Indeed to be successful, considerable resources
in the form of work-hours, equipment, and time must be
invested. Given certain conditions, however, it may be the
only means by which particular information can be obtained.

The lore of surveillance is based for the most part on

three perspectives. One view is the result of the “private
eye’s experience in divorce case, in which a relatively
simple, one-on-one observation is feasible. Another is that
of the “street smart” intelligence operative who learns from
tailing professional criminals of the elaborate precautions
they take to shake off the police. The third and most
sophisticated derives from the experience of intelligence
operatives surveilling espionage agents who have been
trained to detect and then loose anyone thought to be
following them.

The following treatment will reflect all three

perspectives in varying degrees. Regardless of the types of
surveillance, whether it pertains to individual or location,
certain concepts are fundamental to all. Yet in the same
breath, it must be remembered that surveillance can produce
rapidly changing situations which require the application of
the best of imaginations. Few mistakes can be permitted as
the stakes are many times quite high.

Definitions of Terms

To understand the literature or participate in a

surveillance, the intelligence operatives should be
conversant with the terms and jargons of the field.
 93

Surveillance. The observation of a person, place or

thing, generally—but not necessarily—in an unobtrusive
manner.

Subject. The party under surveillance.

Surveillant. The person conducting the surveillance.

Tail. To follow and keep under surveillance; a

surveillance.

Stakeout. Also called a plant or fixed surveillance;

here the surveillant remains essentially in one position or
locale.

Undercover. An undercover agent who often gets to know

or work along-side the subject. The term roping describes
this situation, and the undercover agent is said to be
planted.

Convoy. A countermeasure to detect a surveillance; a

convoy, usually a person, is employed to determine whether
or not a subject is under surveillance.

Shadow. To follow secretly; to place a person under

surveillance.

Be Made. To be detected or suspected of being a

surveillant by the subject.

Burn the Surveillance. When a surveillant’s behavior

cause the subject to surmise or know that he or she is under
surveillance.

Close Surveillance. The subject is kept under constant

surveillance. Also termed tight surveillance, the aim is
not to lose the subject even at the risk of being “made.”

Fixed Surveillance. Similar with stakeout.

Moving Surveillance. The surveillant moved about in

order to follow the subject.
 94

Loose Surveillance. A cautious surveillance; also

termed discreet surveillance because the loss of the subject
is preferred to possible exposure.

Open Surveillance. A surveillance with little or no

attempt at concealment; also termed rough surveillance. The
subject is most likely aware of the surveillance, but must
not be lost.

Mustard Plaster. A form of open surveillance; here, the

subject is followed so closely that surveillant and subject
are almost in lock step. It is tantamount to protective
custody.

Plant. Similar with stakeout and undercover.

Tailgaiting. A form of open surveillance in which the

subject’s vehicle is closely followed.

Technical Surveillance. Surveillance involving the use

of scientific device to enhance hearing or seeing the
subject’s activities.

Bugging. Eavesdropping by electronic means, such as

hidden microphone or radio transmitter; bug—a device used
for such eavesdropping.

Pen Register. A device that records all numbers dialed

on a telephone company’s central office.

Beeper. A battery operated device that emits radio

signals which permit it to be tracked by a directional
finder-receiver. Also called beacon, transponder, and
electronic tracking device.

Practical Considerations in the Conduct of Surveillance

1. Tactics

Strategic considerations govern the use of surveillance

in particular case. Tactical concerns determine its
execution. A major problem that soon intrudes is how to
weigh the possible loss of contact with a subject against
the risk of being detected or exposed.
 95

A quick, believable response is called for when a

subject take some action to determine whether there is
indeed surveillance. It is easier to drop surveillance
before being confronted than to respond to a confrontation
by convincing the subjects that he or she is mistaken.

1) Loose Surveillance

Loose surveillance is used when the objective is

to locate a suspect by tailing his or her relatives and
friends. The surveillant exercises great caution while
observing the subject, preferring to drop the tail rather
than risk detection or exposure. Whether espionage,
burglary, or terrorism, this tactic applies when a group’s
activities are under scrutiny to determine their contacts
and intentions.

2) Close Surveillance

The aim of close surveillance is to avoid losing

the subject—even at the risk of detection or exposure. When
the goal is to prevent a crime or learn more about the
subject’s contacts, it is acceptable procedure. A subject
who is naïve or lacks of experience in crime may panic and
reveal valuable clues when the fact of the surveillance is
realized.

2. Planning

Never to lose a subject or to arouse suspicion is

impossible, of course. When confronted with either decision,
any vacillation is an additional hazard. Investigative
momentum will be squandered if plans are not made in
anticipation of such contingencies.

Should a subject be lost, a viable method of locating

him or her is often by educated guess—people being creatures
of habit, doing the same things at about the same time each
day. Prior surveillance reports on the case can also furnish
insight.
 96

3. Preparation

The success of surveillance depends on the degree of

forethought and thoroughness given to the preliminary
preparations. It is important to develop a plan of action
for handling contingencies and to understand its objectives.
Without such a plan, obvious, everyday matters—such as
having a supply of coins and tokens available for
transportation and telephone calls—can be overlooked.

1) Familiarization

It is crucial that the surveillant be certain of

the identity of the subject, who should, if possible, be
pointed out by one who knows him or her by sight. Though
less satisfactory than direct “fingering,” recent
photographs are also acceptable. The surveillant must be
familiar with details of the case, trough discussion with
others working on it and reading the previous surveillance
reports.

It is helpful to be familiar with the probable

area of operations; for those working in unknown territory,
preliminary inspections are worthwhile. Since many
surveillances are conducted in cities it is important to
know about the type of people, the transportation
facilities, street layout, public buildings, and other
physical features. The intelligence operatives should be
able to operate any technical equipment used. When teams of
operatives are expected to work together a briefing session
is appropriate.

2) Equipment

It is hardly need to be said that all technical

equipment be serviced, checked, and ready to operate. This
applies to vehicles in which unmistakable police
paraphernalia must be disguised or concealed. Some thought
should be given to converting and enclosed, moderate-sized
truck or van to suit the needs of lengthy fixed
surveillance. Disguises for an automobile requires an extra
sets of license plate numbers, window and bumper stickers, a
set of props in the car’s trunks, such as shopping bag
filled with groceries, a briefcase, and few changes of outer
 97

clothing and headgear. The area of operation will suggest

the props.

3) Blending-In

A surveillant must blend with the neighborhood of

the operation. The aim is to play the role locals will
accept without question or suspicion. Practical matters must
be planned, providing relief for the surveillant’s personal
necessities and time-off, and securing a supply of public
transit tokens.

5. Discontinuing the Surveillance

Usually, a surveillance can be discontinued without

repercussions, but should the subject directly or indirectly
indicated that its existence is suspected, breaking off
contact requires caution. It must be made certain that the
intelligence operative has not been placed under counter-
surveillance by the subject or an associate. Accordingly,
the intelligence operatives should not return directly to
the safe house until sure that no convoy was used.

In the event of a direct challenge, it is important to

be prepared with a response that has been thought through.
Rehearsed, and is almost instinctive for the surveillant. An
improvised response would not ring true; it would only
confirm the subject’s suspicions. Neither, should
intelligence operatives immediately deny being a police
officer. It might be feasible not to react with some
irritation, impatient comments such as “you’re bothering me”
or “this is new approach” might work. These suggestions are
offered as practical responses in a given situation.

Tailing Methods

1. One-Man Method

A “one-man” tail is a difficult one, in all cases it

must be a close one or the person being followed will be
lost. It is readily noted by anyone just by turning a
corner, stopping, then watching for the investigator to come
around the corner. Unless a loose tail is sufficient in the
coverage, a one-man tail is almost useless. However, when
 98

observation has disclosed a regular routine on the part of

the subject, then it is sufficient. The intelligence
operatives can then readily relocate the subject in the
event he does lose contact.

A variation of one-man tail is to have several

intelligence operatives rotate on the assignment, either by
days or by the time of the day. Perhaps one-man would work
on Monday, another on the following days, etc., or one would
take the mornings, and the others the evenings and the night
time. This is the “relay” technique and prevents the subject
from readily identifying the intelligence operatives or his
assistant, and not thereby becoming aware of the tail.

2. Leaf-Frog Method

Only one member of the team maintains contact with the

subject. It is a close tail, with the other members of the
squad keeping contact with those immediately ahead of them.
At stated intervals of five to six minutes or upon signal,
the man immediately behind the one keeping contact will
move-up and take his place, the one that had been in contact
will stop, look in a show window or wait at a traffic light,
then take his place behind the last man of the group. This
procedure is continued in rotation as long as the tail is
maintained.

Such method is particularly desirable when it is

believed that subject may use a motor vehicle. The last man
of the team drives an automobile, and at pre-arranged signal
the car moves-up and passed through the group. The members
of the group jump in the car if time permits; otherwise the
driver continues the tail.

3. Group Method

When several men are assigned to a “group” tail, each

man maintains contact with the subject. One may be abreast
of the subject at the opposite side of the street, another
behind the subject, and others in similar position. In order
to prevent discovery, such positions can be exchanged
between members of the group, but they do not leap-frog—each
tries to maintain contact. This is close tail and is
necessary only when discovery is preferable to losing the
subject.
 99

No matter how many men are assigned to a tail job, the

problem of not losing contact with the subject is always
present. It is for this reason that many intelligence
operatives never work with less than one co-workers’, and
they operate an automobile. If the subject boards a public
transportation, it is much safer to maintain contact by
following such public transportation by automobile. Unless a
close contact is imperative—perhaps the subject may make
contact with someone on the bus or trolley—this is a better
procedure than having intelligence operatives board the same
conveyance.

Casing

It is the visual inspection of an area, installation or

building to determine its suitability for operational
activities, e.g., safe-house, meeting place for agents and
their contacts, establishment of communications net,
training ground for agents, intended raids and/or seizures
of vital evidence, or simply keeping track with the
activities of certain area.

Types of Casing

1. Exterior Casing

It is the observation of the whole picture of the area,

building and/or installation giving close observation as to
its location, possible exits and approaches, types of
physical vicinity that may possibly of help to any
intelligence or counter-intelligence operation that may be
launched.

2. Interior Casing

It is the close observation of the lay-out of the

building. Include herein all items that can be observed in
building which are of intelligence and counter-intelligence
value.
 100

CHAPTER

COVER AND UNDERCOVER OPERATIONS

===========================================================

Cover and undercover operations represents another

means by which intelligence and information is collected;
these techniques should be viewed in most cases as a
feasible way to reach as high into the criminal enterprise
as possible. Cover and undercover operations involve a
degree of specialization and training. However, it is
important to recognize that these intelligence operations
are perhaps the most dangerous in police work today.

Definition of Cover

It is a means by which individual, group or

organization conceals the true nature of its activities, and
existence from the observer. It is also a device or
stratagem by which the intelligence agents conceal his
identity, and his relationship with the intelligence
collection agencies. It is used so that intelligence
agencies may operate with minimal interference from the
outside elements. By “outside elements,” it is means those
not having the “Need-to-Know.” Undercover is a person with
cover.

Functions of Cover

1. Offensive

Gives access to the target and facilitates the

achievement of the clandestine objectives.

2. Defensive

Serve to prevent detection.

 101

Broad Concepts of Cover

1. Cover for Status

A cover that is general in nature and relatively

permanently adopted to explain the work presence in any
given area and general status in society.

2. Cover for Action

A cover designed to explain away or allow to perform

given clandestine activity. It may be an extension of cover
for status.

3. Natural Cover

A cover which completely fits the true background and

capabilities of the agent, it affords to provide maximum
security protection to any clandestine activity and allows
greater operational flexibility.

4. Living One’s Cover

Agent must make sure that every public action he takes

fits his assumed cover, and that a total picture presented
to others accurately reflects his cover.

5. Official Cover

A cover sponsored by an overt agency of a government.

6. Non-Official Cover

Cover adopted by a person free of any official

connection.

7. Artificial Cover

Cover using biographical data adopted for the purpose

that is fictitious.
 102

Types of Cover

1. Natural Cover

Using true or actual personal background to fit for the

purpose.

2. Artificial Cover

A cover using biographical data adopted for the purpose

that is fictitious.

3. Cover within a Cover

Use of secondary cover in case of compromise which

necessitates the admission of lesser crime.

4. Multiple Cover

Any cover identity wished.

Definition of Organizational Cover

An account consisting of biographical data which when

adopted by individual will assume the personality he want to
adopt.

Objectives of Organizational Cover

1. To camouflage and protect operational personnel and

their activities.

2. Protect installation in which clandestine activities

are based.

Guidelines to Organizational Cover

1. Organizational cover must appear to produce

something.

2. Should device that not all personnel will work

together at the same time.
 103

3. Cover should be devoted to mission.

4. Start with small organizational cover and provide

room for expansion as it continue to grow.

Guidelines When Cover and Organizational Cover is

Compromised

In case cover is compromised, the following must be

observed:

1) move-out immediately;

2) start new facility for operations and develop it;

3) build entirely new cover;

4) use circuitous route and provide careful counter-

surveillance; and

5) be patient, build slowly and carefully.

And if organizational cover is compromised, hereunder

are the things to be considered, i.e.:

1) make a physical move or re-location;

2) start new facility for old operation and let it

grow;

3) use new personnel;

4) let old personnel remain in place; and

5) build entirely new cover identity.

Undercover Operations

Undercover operations have become a standard feature of

the contemporary police activities. This can take in many
forms, from an inconspicuous stranger who turns up to help a
demonstration, to a trained “deep cover” agent who may spend
many years working inside a target organizations. These
 104

operations can be launched locally by the police, or law

enforcement agencies, or by any intelligence collection unit
and/or offices.

Another major source of inside information for

intelligence is the “CI” or “confidential informant.” These
can be a private citizens recruited to infiltrate group, or
fearful members who turn on their friends. Without the
existence of the CI, or “snitch,” there would in fact be
very few arrests made for major crimes.

However, CIs do have major shortcomings from a police

perspective, including their general unreliability,
questionable status in testifying as witnesses, and frequent
refusal to testify in open court.

Definition of Undercover Assignment

It is an investigative technique in which agent conceal

his official identity in order to obtain information from
the target organization.

Broad Categories of Undercover Agents

1. Deep Cover

It may be someone with extensive experience in

undercover work, or a young person selected from an academy
training class. Novices are actually preferred sometimes
because they have not acquired the typical authoritarian
habits that might give them away as police officer, and also
because they are less likely to be recognized by regular
police officer in the field who might unknowingly reveal
their identity in a chance encounter.

2. Light Cover

An undercover police officer working under “light” may

have a spurious document to establish fictitious
identification, i.e., ID, driver’s license, etc., but will
most likely go home to his family and “real” life. Sometimes
drug enforcement officers’ and other specially trained
agents will be called for these assignments.
 105

Factors to be Considered in Planning for Undercover

Assignment

1. Determine the level of which investigation is

intended.

2. Developing appropriate cover story and cover, and

selection of qualified personnel.

3. Considerations of all undercover operations

details to include documentation, briefing, coaching, and
rehearsing.

Types of Undercover Assignment

1. Dwelling

Is one where the undercover agent established residence

in or near the dwelling which houses the subject.

2. Work Assignment

Places the undercover agent in a type of employment

where he can observe the activities of the subject at his
place of work.

3. Social Assignment

It requires the undercover agent to frequent places of

social entertainment and amusement known to be habitually
visited by target personalities and their associates.

4. Multiple Assignments

An undercover agent is given the task of covering two

or more of the above specific assignments simultaneously.

5. Personal Contact Assignment or “Rope Job”

The undercover agent is required to develop friendship

and trust with the target personality for the purposes of
obtaining information or evidence.
 106

Cover Story

It is a biographical account, true or fictitious, or a

combination of truth or fiction which portrays the
undercover agent’s past history, and current status. This
may be a natural cover story, artificial cover story, and
combination of true or false personal data.

Factors to be Considered in Choosing a Cover Story

1. Justification for Presence and Activities

The story must include a logical explanation for the

undercover agent’s presence, and consistent with the
activities in which he must engage during the conduct of
investigation and/or collection of information.

2. Mutual Point of Interest

The story must provide point of mutual interests

between the target personalities, undercover agents,
undercover operations, and cover story.

3. Complete Background

The cover story must include the material on all

aspects of the undercover agent’s previous background,
regardless of whether or not it is anticipated that this
information will be required.

4. Continuous Contact

It includes provisions for sufficient contact between

the undercover agent, and the target of interest to produce
worthwhile results.

5. Safe Departure

It must consider the removal of the undercover agent

from the target area in the event of compromise, or the
conclusion of the investigation and/or collection of
information.
 107

Modes of Employment of Undercover Assignment

1. Long Range

Provides reliable, accurate, and continuing access to

information that would not be attainable, and which requires
considerable time and effort, painstaking analysis of the
mission, and thorough study of all the details relating to
the selection, training, and actual performance of
undercover personnel.

2. Short Range

It provides for the immediate objective solution to the

following: 1) background investigation; 2) preparation for
raid operation; and 3) installation or servicing of
technical equipment.
 108

CHAPTER

INFORMANTS CULTIVATION AND MOTIVATION

===========================================================

Definition of Informant

It is an individual who openly or secretly obtain or

assists in obtaining information for intelligence and
counter-intelligence purposes in exchange for some
recompense, monetary or otherwise.

Purposes of Informants in Intelligence Operations

1. Gain access to areas and targets inaccessible to

intelligence.

2. Provide anonymity to investigation and operation.

3. Increase the scope of area and target coverage.

Usefulness of Informants

The reasons individuals furnish information to

intelligence operatives can be laudable as well as
nefarious. Whatever the reason, an informant is one who
furnishes intelligence that may:

1. Prevent a crime which is planned but not yet

committed.

2. Uncover a crime which has been committed, but has

not been discovered.

3. Identify the perpetrator of a crime.

4. Locate the perpetrator of a crime or help to

locate stolen property.
 109

5. Exonerate a suspect.

6. Lower morale among criminals through apprehension.

Categories of Informants

1. Incidental Informants

Individuals who furnish information with no intention

of repeating his services of furnishing information on a
continuing basis.

Types of Incidental Informants

1) Interviewees

Individuals contacted by investigation or summoned

by an intelligence unit for questioning, and who are aware
that they are in contact with an official police/military
agency.

2) Walk-ins or Volunteers

Individuals who of their own accord contact an

intelligence operatives in order to divulge information that
believes to be of intelligence interest, e.g., well-meaning,
patriotic citizens, and with range of persons motivated by
malice, avarice, revenge or jealousy who may volunteer
biased, distorted or completely false information for
personal reasons.

3) Unwitting Informants

Those who provide information of intelligence

interests, and who are aware that they are imparting such
information that may be obtained from such person by subtle
elicitation techniques or through technical surveillance.

2. Casual Informant
 110

Individuals who by social or professional position,

posses or has access to information of continuing interest
and who willingly provides information on the intelligence
unit, either in response to a specific request or on his own
initiatives.

3. Automatic Informants

Those by virtue of their official positions are

expected or obligated to furnish information openly to
intelligence unit in normal course of their duties, e.g.,
government officials, AFP and PNP members, and technical
experts.

4. Recruited Informants

Individuals that are selected, trained and utilized as

continuous overt and covert sources of information
concerning specific intelligence targets.

Types of Recruited Informants

1) Ordinary Informants

Individuals who obtained the desired information

during their normal daily routine, but whose affiliation
with the counter-intelligence unit is covert and under the
control of that unit. It is use primarily to achieve
counter-intelligence area coverage.

The factors of control and covert affiliation

distinguished ordinary informants from casual informants,
e.g., the manager or headwaiter in a hotel habitually
frequented by members of criminal syndicates and/or
suspected subversives would be an ordinary informant if
recruited, trained and put into the operational control of
counter-intelligence unit.

2) Penetration Informants
 111

Those assigned with the mission of obtaining

information within a specific target. They may be recruited
outside the target and placed therein or more usually
selected and recruited from among the personnel within the
target itself.

3) Full-time Informants

Those that is available for counter-intelligence

missions at all times, and who may derive the major part of
their income from their work as informants. They must have
cover employment which will permit irregular hours, frequent
absences, extensive travel, and will provide an explanation
for income and contacts with persons of many social levels.
They are normally trained in investigative procedures.

5. Others

1) Double Agents

Individuals who are simultaneously employed by two

opposing intelligence agencies with one of the agencies are
aware of his dual role. Double agents controlled
intelligence unit may produce very valuable information,
particularly in long-range counter-espionage operations, but
their control and exploitation complex difficult, and
requires extremely stringent security operations and control
measures.

2) Dual Agents

Individuals who are simultaneously and

independently employed by two or more friendly intelligence
units, and who do not show preference for either, and
normally motivated by material gain. When an informant is
determined to be dual agent, his services will normally be
terminated.

Motives for Informing

1. Self-Serving Reasons
 112

Three kinds of self-serving motives are: cutting a

deal, elimination of competition, and building a line of
credit.

1) Cutting a Deal

A deal is cut when a defendant agrees to impart

what he or she knows about criminal activities in exchange
for a promise that a recommendation for consideration will
be made to a judge in pending prosecution. By this means,
informants may reduce or avoid altogether the punishment
that would otherwise be expected in conviction. As a quid
pro quo arrangement, cutting a deal is in one sense a form
of plea bargaining.

2) Elimination of Competition

In specialized crimes, particularly dangerous

drugs and illegal gambling, one law breaker may, most often
anonymously, betray a rival to eliminate competition. This
can occur when a new robber invades the area and the rash of
break-ins increases community pressure and police activity.
By taking competitor out of circulation, community anxiety
will be kept at a level that does not provoke undue police
response.

3) Building a Line of Credit

Uneasy pawnbrokers and secondhand dealers worry

that police may one day discover stolen goods in their shops
and accuse them of being a fence. Some will attempt to
establish that they are not fence by identifying those in
the community who are fencing stolen goods, using this as a
way to ingratiate themselves with authorities. For others on
the fringe of the underworld, the ploy is to earn favors
which could stay an arrest should they be apprehended for
some law violation.

2. Mercenary Reasons
 113

The old saying among intelligence operatives, “when the

money ceases to clatter, the tongue stops the chatter,”
confirms that they well know; namely, that offering a reward
for information is of fundamental importance. Merchants and
farmers have long resorted to a bounty system; they will pay
to find those responsible for stealing their merchandize or
rustling their cattle. Police organizations budget ready
monies to buy information. The national government is more
lavish in this regard.

3. Self-Aggrandizement

Ordinary citizens as well as reformed criminals are

motivated by vanity to provide information, believing it
will win favorable attention from authorities. Employers,
friends, and even the media in important cases may put them
in the spotlight, making them instant celebrities. Since
anonymity offers the best protection against retaliation, it
is prudent that police safeguard such informants until
public attention is directed elsewhere.

4. Emotions

Fear, revenge, jealousy, and repentance are among the

emotions that often induce people to divulge what otherwise
would remain unrevealed. When the information concerns
criminal activity, it usually constitutes a major break
through in an investigation.

1) Fear

Fear is a powerful inducement to becoming an

informer; however, protection must be negotiated with
authorities. It may be for one’s self of fear for one’s
family being killed, tortured, or harmed in some fashion.
Fear of imprisonment will cause some people to seek a trade-
off: information for nol-prossing an indictment. When a gang
member takes to heavy drinking, becomes sexually involved,
and rashly starts to tell a new partner everything—or
displays conduct that otherwise seems to threaten the
security of the group—he or she will be told in no certain
terms to change, “or else.” For more than few, the reaction
would be to inform on the gang’s activities.

2) Revenge and Jealousy

 114

A grudge based on a perception of unfair treatment

can provoke a desire for revenge. However hackneyed the
expression, “hell hath no fury like a woman scorned,” is
still seems to speak for the pain of rejection. Indeed, any
pain of distress induced by another can result in jealousy
and the need for revenge, and turn a person to informing.
The need to get even is deep in the human psyche.

3) Repentance

Just as those who have “got religion” will be led

by a need for forgiveness and re-establishment in the
community to furnish what they would not have discovered
before, so will the outcast make amends by informing on
confederates in past crimes. The approbation of newly-
acquired peers is an especially strong stimulus.

5. Gratitude

Gratitude is not usually a major factor in prompting an

individual to furnish information, but it can be potent at
times.

6. Civic Duty

A significant motivating factor for informing is a

sense of good citizenship. When an eyewitness tells the
police of observations made while a crime was being
committed, or of suspicious behavior noted, the persons
carries out a civic duty.
 115

CHAPTER

10

COUNTER-INTELLIGENCE OPERATIONS,
PERSONNEL AND DOCUMENTS SECURITY

===========================================================

Definition of Counter-Intelligence

That aspect of police intelligence activities relating

to all security measures, both offensive-active and
defensive-passive, designed to insure the safeguarding of
information, personnel, material, and installation against
espionage, sabotage, and subversive activities of foreign
power, and disaffected or dissident groups or individuals
that constitute threats to national security, and other
inimical foreign intelligence activities.

1) Detection

Knowing the clandestine operation of the enemy.

2) Prevention

Application of counter-intelligence operations to

avoid enemy activities.

3) Neutralization

Containment of enemy activities.

Measures for Effective Counter-Intelligence Operations

1. Passive-Defensive

Counter-intelligence measures that seek to conceal

information from the enemy. Examples: secrecy discipline,
communication security, concealment and camouflage. Passive
counter-intelligence measures can be readily put into SOPs
 116

for implementation regardless of the specific nature of the

offices or units’ mission.

2. Active-Offensive

Counter-intelligence measures that seek to actively

block the enemy’s attempt to gain information, or to
actively block the enemy’s effort to engage in espionage,
sabotage, or subversion. This includes measures such as
detection, prevention, and neutralization.

Broad Categories of Counter-Intelligence Operations

1. Police Security

Encompasses measures taken by an office or group to

protect itself against espionage, enemy observation,
sabotage, subversion, or surprise. The measures includes
secrecy discipline, special safeguarding of classified
information and equipment; security to troop movement;
special handling of evaders and escapees; counter-subversion
within the police service; and tactical measures in combat
areas.

2. Civil Security

Encompasses active and passive counter-intelligence

measures affecting civilians permanently or temporarily
residing in an area under police or military jurisdictions.
It includes systematic registration of civilians, neutral
and enemy allies; control of circulation; curfew;
surveillance of suspected political organizations; security
screening of labor; issuance of passes and permits; and
control of commercial commerce.

3. Special Operation

Employment of active counter-intelligence techniques

and procedures in the conduct of clandestine or covert
operations against hostile and enemy intelligence
organizations and agencies. It covers counter terrorism;
counter sabotage; counter espionage; and counter subversion.

4. Port, Frontier and Travel Security

 117

The application of both police and civil security

measures for counter-intelligence control at points of only
one departure, international borders or boundaries. It
includes responsibility for security control of seaports and
frontiers.

5. Censorship

Control and examination of communications to prevent

the transmission of information that may fall to the hands
of the enemy, and to collect and disseminate information of
intelligence value.

Definition of Personnel Security

Personnel security includes all the security measures

designed to prevent unsuitable individuals or persons of
doubtful loyalty to the Philippine Government, from gaining
access to classified matter or to any security facility, and
to prevent the appointment, employment, or retention as
employees of such individuals.

Definition of Personnel Security Investigation

It is an inquiry into the character, reputation,

discretion and loyalty of an individual in order to
determine a person’s suitability or access to classified
matter prior to the granting of security clearance. Put it
in another way, it is the process of inquiring into person’s
suitability to be given security clearance.

Definition of Sensitive Position

A sensitive position is any position within the

government, police, and military, the occupant of which
could bring about by virtue of the position a material
adverse effect to national security.

Authority to Issue Security Clearance

 118

Adhering to the principle of command responsibility,

the basic authority to grant or deny security clearance
rests exclusively with the highest official of the office or
unit.

Types of Personnel Security Investigation

1. National Agency Check (NAC)

This is an investigation of an individual made upon the

basis of written information supplied by him in response to
official inquiry, and can be used as a reference to
appropriate national agencies. It is simply a check on the
files and records of national agencies. The national
agencies checked under this type of investigation are the
following:

1) National Intelligence Coordinating Agency (NICA);

2) National Bureau of Investigation (NBI);

3) Intelligence Service, Armed Forces of the

Philippines (ISAFP) or J2 Division, General Headquarters,
Armed Forces of the Philippines (J2, GHQ, AFP);

4) Directorate for Intelligence, National

Headquarters, Philippine National Police (DI, NHQ, PNP);

5) Criminal Investigation and Detection Group,

National Headquarters, Philippine National Police (CIDG,
NHQ, PNP); and

6) G2 Division, Philippine Army (G2, PA).

2. Local Agency Check (LAC)

This type of investigation consists of written

inquiries sent to appropriate local government agencies,
former employer, character references, and schools listed by
the person under investigation. The local agencies normally
check besides the past employment, schools, and character
references are the following:
 119

1) Place of the locality where the individual is a

resident;

2) Mayor of the locality where the individual is a

resident;

3) City and/or municipal police station;

4) Provincial and/or city prosecutor’s office; and

5) City and/or municipal judge.

3. Background Investigation (BI)

This is a much more comprehensive investigation than

the National Agency Check or the Local Agency Check. A
thorough and complete investigation of all or some of the
circumstances or aspects of a person’s life is conducted.
This type of Personnel Security Investigation may either of
the following:

1) Complete Background Investigation (CBI)

Consist of the investigation of the background of

individual, particularly all the circumstances of his
personal life.

2) Partial Background Investigation (PBI)

Consist of the investigation of the background of

an individual but limited only to some of the circumstances
of his personal life which are deemed pertinent to the
investigation.

Definition of Security Clearance Certificate

The certification by a responsible authority that the

person described is cleared for access to classified matter
at the appropriate level.
 120

Definition of Adjudication Process

It is the process of evaluating a person’s suitability

for a security clearance.

Types of Security Clearance

1. Final

It is valid for five years unless sooner revoked by the

issuing authority.

2. Interim

It is valid for two years unless sooner revoked by the

issuing authority.

Definition of Personal History Statement (PHS)

This is a form required to an individual who is being

processed for a security clearance. The form calls for
pertinent data and information on the various aspects of a
subject’s personal life.

Security Education

This is another security measure involved in Personnel

Security. It is primarily designed to enable the office or
unit to achieve and maintain a sound and effective security.
To this end, it provides the means or ways by which all
personnel and employees are trained to acquire the necessary
knowledge and principles as will develop in them such
desirable security habits and attitudes and make them ever
security conscious and disciplined.

1. Security Orientation

This consists of initial briefings made upon the

new personnel and employees on security and its various
aspects, and its importance. They are familiarized and made
to acquaint themselves with the security rules and
regulations of the office or unit and the importance of
 121

observing them. They are also made aware of the security

practices and procedures in the office or unit.

2. Security Indoctrination

This is a continuous and systematic program

designed to meet the security needs of the office or unit.
It aims to train all personnel so that each shall possess
the skills and vigilance in the performance of their
security responsibilities. This security indoctrination
program may take the form of lectures on appropriate
subjects on security, showing of films bearing on security
and other instructional devices.

3. Security Reminders

This is a phase of security education program

which makes use of security poster, slogans, signs and
stickers. This is an indirect approach to inculcating
security on the personnel and employees, but it does serve
its purpose.

4. Security Promotion

This is another phase of security education

program which is a positive effort to sell security. This
may take various forms such as a personal recognition on a
personnel who has done an effective security job. This
personal recognition will go far in selling security to
others. Contest on security posters, slogans or stickers may
arouse interest on security and also provides materials for
security reminders.

5. Security Seminars

Attending lectures on instructions and discussions

on security will widen the personnel’s horizon, security
wise, and probably make him more security conscious and
disciplined.

Definition of Document

Any recorded information regardless of its physical

form or characteristics, including but not limited to the
 122

following: 1) written matters whether handwritten, printed

or typed; 2) all painted, drawn or engraved matters; 3) all
sound and voice recordings; 4) all printed photographs and
exposed or printed films, still or moving; and 5) all
productions of the foregoing for whatever purpose.

Definition of Classified Matter

Information or material in any form or of any nature,

the safeguarding of which is necessary in the interest of
national security. The term “classified military
information” or “classified police information” includes all
information concerning documents, cryptographic devices,
developments, projects, and materials.

Four Categories of Classified Matter

1. Top Secret

Information and materials the unauthorized disclosure

of which would cause exceptionally grave damage to the
nation, politically, economically, or from a security
aspect. This category is reserved for the nation’s closest
secrets and is to be used with great reserve. It is covered
with legal size bond paper lined with ½ inch green border.

2. Secret

Information and material the unauthorized disclosure of

which would endanger national security, cause serious injury
to the interest or prestige of the nation or of any
governmental activity or would be of great advantage to a
foreign land. It is covered with legal size bond paper lined
with ½ inch red border.

3. Confidential

Information and material the unauthorized disclosure of

which, while not endangering the national security would be
prejudicial to the interest or prestige of the nation or any
government activity, or would cause administrative
embarrassment or unwarranted injury to an individual or
 123

would be of advantage to a foreign nation. It is covered

with legal size bond paper lined with ½ inch blue border.

4. Restricted

Information and material which requires special

protection other than that determined to be TOP SECRET,
SECRET, or CONFIDENTIAL. Cover sheet is not necessary, what
is important is a bold “RESTRICTED” word at the top and at
the bottom of the bond paper.

Definition of Need-to-Know and Compartmentation

Need-to-know is the term given to the requirement that

dissemination of classified document and information be
limited strictly to those persons whose official duty
requires knowledge or possession thereof, while
compartmentation is the granting of access to classified
document or information only to properly cleared persons
when such classified document or information is required in
the performance of their official duties, and restricting it
to specified physical confines when feasible.

Definition of Security Officer

A properly trained and cleared individual who assists

the head of the department in discharging the
responsibilities of safeguarding classified documents and
materials.

Definition of Regrading or Declassify

The act of changing the assigned classification of a

document or material, and as part of the process, it
involves notification of cognizant authority.

Definition of Upgrading or Classify

Classify is the assigning of an information or material

to one of the four security classifications after
determining that such information or material requires
 124

security protection, while upgrading is the changing of the

classification of classified matter to a category higher
than that previously assigned to it.
 125

REVIEW QUESTIONS

POLICE INTELLIGENCE & SECRET SERVICE

==================================================================

INSTRUCTIONS: Select the correct answer for each of the following

questions.

1. It is the product resulting from the collection, evaluation,

analysis, integration, and interpretation of all available
information which is significant to police planning.

A. intelligence B. police intelligence

C. information D. military intelligence

2. It is an evaluated material of every description including

those derived from observation, reports, rumors, imagery, and
other sources from which intelligence are derived.

A. classified matters B. classified documents

C. information D. reports and records

3. These are intelligence data that are not of an immediate

value.

A. line intelligence B. strategic intelligence

C. false intelligence D. counter intelligence

4. It is the exploration of sources of information by the

collection agencies, and the delivery of the information obtained
to proper intelligence unit.

A. collection B. processing
C. dissemination D. direction

5. It is a repetitive process used to produce intelligence from

information.

A. intelligence effort B. intelligence activity

C. intelligence work D. intelligence cycle

6. The reliability of the source is “highly reliable” and the

accuracy of information is “confirmed information’ what will be
the evaluation rating of the information.
 126

A. A-1 B. B-2
C. C-3 D. D-4

7. He is the father of organized military espionage.

A. Akbar B. Frederick the Great

C. Genghis Khan D. Alexander the Great

8. It is in this phase of intelligence cycle in which

information becomes intelligence.

A. collection B. processing
C. dissemination D. direction

9. It includes the systematic exploitation of all sources of

information.

A. collection B. dissemination
C. processing D. direction

10. Are those items of information regarding criminals or

subversives, and that needs to be collected and/or processed in
order to meet the intelligence requirements of police executives.

A. other information B. priority intelligence

requirements requirements
C. orders and request D. intelligence indicator

11. It is the timely conveyance of information and or

intelligence in any appropriate form and by any suitable means.

A. collection B. processing
C. dissemination D. direction

12. It is the observation of a person, place or thing, generally

—but not necessarily—in unobtrusive manner.

A. informant operation B. undercover operation

C. surveillance D. intelligence activities

13. Also called as a plant or fixed surveillance, here the

surveillant remains essentially in one position or locale.

A. tail gating B. stakeout

C. convoy D. undercover
14. The term roping described this situation, and it is said to
be planted.

A. undercover B. shadow
 127

C. stakeout D. convoy

15. The subject is kept under constant surveillance, and the aim
is not to loose him even at the risk of being made.

A. close surveillance B. loose surveillance

C. open surveillance D. mustard plaster

16. It is a surveillance involving the use of scientific devices

to enhance hearing or seeing the subject’s activities.

A. tailgaiting B. stakeout
C. mustard plaster D. technical surveillance

17. To be detected or suspected of being surveillant by the

subject.

A. be made B. burn out

C. shadow D. convoy

18. It is a devise which provides a means of systematic

arrangement of information by type of subject.

A. intelligence journal B. enemy situation map

C. intelligence workbook D. order of battle

19. It is not usually a major factor in prompting an individual

to furnish information, but is can be potent at times.

A. gratitude B. civic duty

C. emotions D. mercenary

20. It is an individual who openly or secretly obtained or who

assist in obtaining information for intelligence and counter-
intelligence purposes.

A. informant B. source
C. eye witness D. intelligence asset

21. Individuals who are selected, trained and utilized as

continuous covert sources of information concerning specific
intelligence aspects.

A. casual informant B. recruited informant

C. automatic informant D. incidental informant
22. Individuals who are simultaneously employed by two opposing
intelligence agencies with one of the agencies aware of his dual
role.
 128

A. dual agents B. double agents

C. informers D. informants

23. It is a means by which individual, groups or organization

conceals the true nature of its activities and existence from
observer.

A. surveillance B. cover assignment

A. intelligence D. undercover assignment

24. It is an individual who provides information because of

monetary consideration.

A. informer B. source
C. eye witness D. informant

25. It is an inquiry into the specific phases of an individual

life history, including to a minimum, national agency check,
character reference, and former employers.

A. local agency check B. national agency check

C. partial background D. complete background
investigation investigation

26. It is an inquiry into the loyalty, integrity, character,

morale, and discretion of an individual because of the sensitive
position he holds, or is about to assume.

A. personnel security B. complete background

investigation investigation
C. partial background D. national and local
investigation aqency check

27. This is an information or materials whose unauthorized

disclosures would cause grave damage to the security.

A. restricted B. confidential
C. secret D. top secret

28. When a surveillant’s behavior causes the subject to surmise

or know that he or she is under surveillance.

A. be made B. burn the surveillance

C. burn out D. all of the above

29. This letter represent that the source of intelligence

information is from tactical interrogation of captured enemy.

A. U B. V
 129

C. W D. X

30. Information or material in any form, or of any nature, the

safeguarding of which is necessary in the interest of national
security.

A. documents B. classified matters

C. security clearance D. vital information

31. It is the act of changing the assigned classification of a

document or material.

A. classify B. declassify
C. classification D. compartmentation

32. It is the assigning of an information or material to one of

the four security classification.

A. classify B. declassify
C. classification D. compartmentation

33. A properly trained and cleared individual who assist the

head of the department in discharging the responsibilities of
safeguarding classified documents and materials.

A. intel. operatives B. undercover agent

C. security officer C. confidential agents

34. It is the term given to the requirement to those persons

whose official duty requires knowledge of possession thereof.

A. compartmentation B. need-to-know
C. cleared individuals D. security officer

35. It is the granting of access to classified document or

information.

A. compartmentation B. need-to-know
C. cleared individual D. security officer

36. Information and material which requires special protection,

and this not anymore required cover sheet.

A. restricted B. confidential
C. secret D. top secret
37. Information or material the unauthorized disclosure of which
would cause administrative embarrassment of unwarranted injury.

A. restricted B. confidential
 130

C. secret D. top secret

38. Information or material the unauthorized disclosure of which

would endanger national security and will cause serious injury.

A. restricted B. confidential
C. secret C. top secret

39. Information or material the unauthorized disclosure of which

would cause exceptionally grave damage to the nation.

A. restricted B. confidential
C. secret D. top secret

40. It is any recorded information regardless of its physical

form or characteristics.

A. classified document B. document

C. information D. material

41. Information or material in any form, the safeguarding of

which is necessary in the interest of national security.

A. classified document B. document

C. information D. material

42. That aspect of police intelligence activities relating to

all security measures, both offensive and defensive.

A. counter-intelligence B. line intelligence

C. strategic intel. D. intelligence

43. Counter intelligence measures that seek to conceal

information from enemy.

A. active-offensive B. passive-defensive
C. counter-intelligence D. intelligence

44. Counter intelligence measures that seek to block the enemy’s

effort to engage in espionage, sabotage or subversion.

A. active-offensive B. passive-defensive
C. counter-intelligence D. intelligence
45. It encompasses measures taken by an office or group to
protect itself against espionage, enemy observation, sabotage, or
subversion.

A. police security B. civil security

C. special operation D. censorship
 131

46. It encompasses active and passive counter-intelligence

measures affecting civilians permanently or temporarily residing
in an area under police or military jurisdictions.

A. police security B. civil security

C. special operation D. censorship

47. It is the employment of active-counter intelligence

techniques and procedures in the conduct of clandestine or covert
operations.

A. police security B. civil security

C. special operation D. censorship

48. It is the control and examination of communications to

prevent the transmission of information that may fall to the hand
of the enemy.

A. police security B. civil security

C. special operation D. censorship

49. It includes all the security measures designed to prevent

unsuitable individuals or persons of doubtful loyalty.

A. background invest. B. personnel security

C. counter-intelligence D. neighborhood check

50. It is an inquiry into the character, reputation, discretion

and loyalty of an individual.

A. Personnel Security B. Complete Background

Investigation Investigation
C. Partial Background D. all the above given
Investigation answers

51. It is any position within the government, police, military,

the occupant of which could bring about by virtue of the position
a material adverse effect to national security.

A. sensitive position B. confidential agent

C. security officer D. intelligence authority

52. This is an investigation of an individual made upon the

basis of written information supplied by him in an official
inquiry.

A. local agency check B. national agency check

C. partial background D. complete background
 132

investigation investigation

53. This is a type of investigation which consists of written

inquiries sent to appropriate local government agencies.

A. local agency check B. national agency check

C. partial background D. complete background
investigation investigation

54. This is much more comprehensive investigation.

A. local agency check B. background investigation

C. partial background D. complete background
investigation investigation

55. Consist of the investigation on the background of

individual, particularly all the circumstances of his personal
life.

A. local agency check B. national agency check

C. partial background D. complete background
investigation investigation

56. Consist of the investigation of the background of an

individual, but limited only to some of the circumstances of his
personal life.

A. local agency check B. national agency check

C. partial background D. complete background
investigation investigation

57. It is valid for five years unless sooner revoked by the

issuing authority.

A. interim B. final
C. security clearance D. not of the above

58. These are the purpose of police intelligence activity,

EXCEPT:

A. to reduce error B. to conceal identify

C. to increase accuracy D. to help in decision making
59. It is primarily designed to enable the officer of unit to
achieve and maintain a sound and effective security system.

A. security educ. B. security orientation

C. scty. indoctrination D. security reminders
 133

60. This consists of initial briefing on security, its various

aspects, and its importance and it is made to the new personnel
and employees.

A. security education B. security orientation

C. scty. indoctrination D. security reminders

61. It is the determination of the pertinence or significance of the

information relative to police operations.

A. evaluation B. analysis
C. interpretation D. integration

62. The process of making conclusions from integrated intelligence

and/or information.

A. integration B. assessment
C. evaluation D. deduction

63. It is the graphic representation of the current enemy situation.

A. intelligence journal B. intelligence files

C. situation map D. intelligence workbook

64. A cautious surveillance, because the loss of the subject is

preferred to possible exposure.

A. close surveillance B. open surveillance

C. loose surveillance D. mustard plaster

65. A surveillance with little or not attempt at concealment,

the subject is most likely aware of the surveillance, but must
not be lost.

A. close surveillance B. open surveillance

C. loose surveillance D. mustard plaster

66. The subject is followed so closely that surveillant and

subject are almost in lock step.

A. close surveillance B. open surveillance

C. loose surveillance D. mustard plaster
67. A form of open surveillance in which the subject’s vehicle
is closely followed.

A. tech. surveillance C. tailgaiting

C. directional finder D. protective custody
 134

68. Its functions is to serve as the intelligence and counter-

intelligence operating unit of the Philippine National Police.

A. Intel. Service, AFP B. Police Intelligence Group

C. NICA D. Directorate for Intel.

69. It is a difficult one, in all cases it must be a close one

or the person being followed will be lost.

A. leaf frog method B. one-man method

C. group method D. mixed method

70. It is a close tail, with other members of the squad keeping

contact with those immediately ahead of them.

A. leaf frog method B. one-man method

C. group method D. mixed method

71. This is close tail, and is necessary only when discovery is

preferable to losing the subject.

A. leaf frog method B. one-man method

C. group method D. mixed method

72. It is the visual inspection of an area, installation or

building to determine its suitability for operational activities.

A. surveillance B. casing
C. stake out D. mustard plaster

73. It is one of the principal activities of police intelligence

operations, and limited activities on this will usually produce a
limited intelligence product.

A. news clipping B. liaison activities

C. de-briefing C. counter-intelligence

74. The intelligence operatives are being asked about his

personal experiences and observations while conducting
intelligence operations.

A. news clipping B. liaison activities

C. de-briefing C. counter-intelligence
75. It is an important method of gathering intelligence data,
and this is an excellent source of highly valuable material.

A. news clipping B. liaison activities

C. de-briefing C. counter-intelligence
 135

76. Those assigned with the mission of obtaining information

within a specific target.

A. penet. informants B. full time informants

C. ordinary informants D. incidental informants

77. Those that is available for counter-intelligence mission at

all times, and who may derive the major part of their income from
their work as informants.

A. penet. informants B. full time informants

C. ordinary informants D. incidental informants

78. Individuals who furnish information with no intention of

repeating his services or furnishing information on a continuing
basis.

A. penet. informants B. full time informants

C. ordinary informants D. incidental informants

79. A cover that is general in nature and relatively permanently

adopted to explain the work presence in any given area.

A. natural cover B. cover for status

C. living one’s over D. cover for action

80. A cover designed to explain away or allow to perform a given

clandestine activity, it may be an extension of cover for status.

A. natural cover B. cover for status

C. living one’s over D. cover for action

81. Agent’s must make sure that every public action he takes
fits his assumed cover, and that a total picture presented to
others accurately reflects his cover.

A. natural cover B. cover for status

C. living one’s over D. cover for action

82. A cover which completely fits the true background and

capabilities of the agent.

A. natural cover B. cover for status

C. living one’s over D. cover for action

83. Using true or actual personal background to fit for the

purpose.
 136

A. multiple cover B. cover within a cover

C. artificial cover D. natural cover

84. A cover using biographical data adopted for the purpose that
is fictitious.

A. multiple cover B. cover within a cover

C. artificial cover D. natural cover

85. It includes provisions for sufficient contact between the

undercover agent, and the target of interest to produce
worthwhile results.

A. continuous contact B. complete background

C. safe departure D. mutual interest

86. The cover story must include the material on all aspects of
the undercover agent’s previous background, regardless of whether
or not it is anticipated that this information will be required.

A. continuous contact B. complete background

C. safe departure D. mutual interest

87. Two kinds of opportunity must prevail if an individual is to

function as an informant, most often and the rest of the time, it
is provided by, EXCEPT:

A. motives B. chance
C. propinquity D. proximity

88. The undercover agent is required to develop friendship and

trust with the target personality for the purposes of obtaining
information or evidence.

A. dwelling D. social assignment

C. personal contact D. work assignment

89. It places the undercover agent in a type of employment where

he can observe the activities of the subject at his place of
work.

A. dwelling B. social assignment

C. personal contact D. work assignment

90. It is the process of evaluating the person’s suitability for

a security clearance.
 137

A. security clearance B. background investigation

C. compartmentation D. adjudication process

91. This is a form required to an individual who is being

processed for a security clearance.

A. personal data sheet B. bio-data

C. curriculum vitae D. personal hist. statement

92. Those by virtue of their official positions are expected or

obligated to furnish information openly.

A. automatic informants B. casual informants

C. incidental informants D. recruited informants

93. Individuals who by social or professional position, posses or has

access to information of continuing interest.

A. automatic informants B. casual informants

C. incidental informants D. recruited informants

94. This is a continuous and systematic program designed to meet

the security needs of the office or unit.

A. security education B. security orientation

C. scty. indoctrination D. security reminders

95. This is a phase of security education program which makes

use of security posters, slogans, signs and stickers.

A. security education B. security orientation

C. scty. indoctrination D. security reminders

96. This is a motive wherein persons hold belief inimical to

their country, and they are of course vulnerable to the approach
of the subversive groups or enemies.

A. revenge B. material gain

C. personal prestige D. ideological beliefs
97. On of the most powerful of motivations that make people
susceptible to pressure.

A. jealousy B. gullibility
C. weakness of character D. serious indebtedness

98. It is an individual who accept every story at face value and

can see no wrong in anyone, and they fall into this category.
 138

A. jealousy B. gullibility
C. weakness of character D. serious indebtedness

99. Because of this, such a person, approached with the lure of

a large sum of money is very vulnerable and a definite security
risk.

A. jealousy B. gullibility
C. weakness of character D. serious indebtedness

100. It is someone from the enemy side held as prisoner while the
war is going on.

A. prisoners of war B. enemy intelligence

C. internee D. captives
 139

P A R T III
PATROL ORGANIZATION & OPERATIONS
 140

CHAPTER

11

INTRODUCTION TO POLICE PATROL

Crime results from the existence of the elements of

crime, i.e., desire to commit the act, the capability of the
offenders, and the belief that the opportunity to do so
exist.

When the either factor is absent, criminal acts will

not be committed. The presence of the other two factors,
regardless of how strong it may be will not result in crime.

The elimination or reduction of these elements of

crime, therefore is a basic police duty. One task is to
prevent or eradicate criminality in the individual mind, and
the other is to embrace all security measures designed to
hamper or prevent criminal operation.

Brief History of Police Patrol

The history of police patrol is as old as organized

society. Man has always needed protection, first from
animals, and then from his own kind. His first attempt to
protect himself and his family involved barricading the
entrance to his cave.

Then as mankind multiplied, they grouped together in

small communities and protection developed into a community
affair. As the communities enlarged, so there’s a need for
developing a specialized group or agency to handle
protection. Warfare has always been a part of man’s social
history, and since each community has had to have warriors
to carry out the task of war, the duties of police
protection usually involved night patrols of soldiers on the
town or city, and group of soldiers stationed at various
posts around the perimeter, and at major points within the
same town or city.
 141

The key to the development of police patrol is closely

associated with the congestion of population, where the
population is spare or spread out, the justification of a
police patrol becomes less warranted. But as the towns
become cities and the cities grow in population, both the
justification and the need for a police patrol become
greater.

The word “police” originated from the Greek word

“Politeia” meaning government of a city. It applied to civil
officers and not necessarily policeman. The Romans changed
the word to “Police” and applied it to those persons who
actually enforced the law. Thereafter, the English and the
Americans borrowed the word intact from the French and used
it to describe a law enforcement terms which assimilated to
the English and American language were of the French origin.
The words, “constable” and “patrol” are likewise French.
Patrol is from the French “Patroullier” which means to go
through puddles. Even today with our modern patrol system.
The definition still attached well.

Nature of Police Patrol

As it used in most agencies today, police patrol

function embraces many other activities beyond the physical
act of patrolling the street.

Police patrol work involves the following:

1) Extensive crime prevention;

2) Public contact and social services duties;

3) Criminal investigation;

4) Traffic enforcement, and

5) Any element of line activity carried out by beat

patrol or field personnel.

Primary Purpose of Patrol

 142

1. The elimination of the actual opportunity or the

belief in the opportunity for successful misconduct is the
basic purpose of police patrol.

2. A thief’s desire and capability to steal is not

diminished by the presence of a patrol officer, but the
opportunity for successful thief is negated.

3. The apparent likelihood of arrest influences the

desire to which the potential offender is convinced that the
opportunity for successful misconduct is absent.

4. Police patrol provides favorable influence more

completely than any other methods of police service.

5. An impression of omni-presence is frequently

created by conspicuous patrol activities at every hour and
in all sections of the community.

6. Suitable patrol activities succeeds in effecting

immediate apprehensions, and since nothing succeeds like
success, reputation for quick and certain apprehensions is
spread by the press, radio and the word of mouth.

7. The potential offender is then persuaded without

the necessity of personal experience that the police patrol
activities is invulnerable.

Effective Patrol Operations

To be effective, modern patrol officers must perform

three (3) major sphere of activity-often simultaneously.
There is no inherent priority among these functions:

1. They must handle calls for service. When the

service involves genuine emergency, the call must be handled
when demand is received.

2. Patrol officer must participate in tactical

responses to apprehend perpetrators, to displace or disrupt
problem patterns. These tactics must be undertaken when the
chance of success are greatest.
3. Patrol officer must engage in strategic-problem
solving efforts with the community. These must occur when
 143

neighborhood residents, workers, community agencies, and

other players are available to meet and work with the police
officers which are not swamped by calls requiring immediate
response.

How effective an organization adjusts and re-adjusts

its emphasis and activities in light of this ever-shifting
array of demands and opportunities largely determines the
potential effectiveness of its overall patrol operations.

Indispensability of Patrol

Patrol tagged as the “backbone” of the police

organization. This often said statement is very true since
the patrol division is the only division in the police
organization that cannot be possibly eliminated. This is
for the reason that the traditional police organization are
usually small that they could not have or can not justify,
separate division such as traffic, investigation, juvenile
and other specialized areas.

Their size and caseload requires that all duties and

functions shall be handled only by the Patrol Division. But
even in those departments which have specialized divisions,
the Patrol Division is often the only one that performs
twenty four (24) hours duty.

As the department grows to keep up with the increasing

population, expanding geographical boundaries, and diversity
of the jurisdiction, the authorities will be in to hire
office personnel to take over the secretarial and record-
keeping functions in order to free policeman for their field
of responsibilities.

As the department continues to grow, officers are taken

out of the field to specialize in traffic investigation and
control, juvenile victim and perpetrators, plainclothes
detective activities, and all other specialized functions,
all the while adding to the patrol force, replacements for
the specialists. In the meantime, the patrol force
continues to exist as the principal functional unit or
“backbone” of the department. It is also an indispensable
service that plays a leading role in the accomplishment of
the police purpose, because of the following reasons:
 144

1. It is the only form of police service that

directly attempts to eliminate opportunity for misconduct.

2. It is also checks the development of desire for

misconduct by destroying unwholesome stimuli, and creating
wholesome one.

3. It favorably influenced individual and group

attitudes in its routine daily association with the public.

In so far as the patrol activities fails to eliminate

desire, capability and opportunity, and misconduct results,
the patrol officer is immediately available with the
hereunder reactive police activities:

1) To investigate offenses;

2) To apprehend suspects; and

3) To recover stolen properties.

Constant availability is important because time is of

the essence in most police work.

In addition to performing duties relating to incidents

of misconducts, the complete coverage provided by patrol
activities, makes it available for other activities, such
as:

1) Patrol officer searches for and return lost

persons and properties, and informs and assist citizens;

2) Patrol officer serves as the eyes and the ears of

the police organization by gathering information useful to
the police executives, to other branches of the unit, and to
other government agencies.

What is Police Patrol

 145

To the layman, the word “patrol” suggest little more

than inspectional activity, whether carried out on foot,
mobile or some other way.

Importance of Police Patrol

1. Patrol officer should be practical social workers

and encourage persons to come to them for assistance and
advice them in time of trouble.

2. Distress situation are frequently a symptoms of

deep rooted social ills. That, if not corrected, may result
in criminal or other anti-social conduct and thus adversely
affect the remainder of the life of the individual. By
giving assistance, advice and sympathy to those distress,
patrol officer help prevent wasted lives and also win
friendship and cooperation for the organization.

Classifications of Police Patrol

1. Reactive Patrol

This is a patrol activity which consists of driving

around the district, waiting for something to happen. It is
not very different from the stereo-type old-time policemen
who just sit around in the station while waiting for calls.
The sensibility and affordability of this scheme is now
being questioned because of budgetary constraints and
skyrocketing prices.

2. Proactive Patrol

An alternative patrol system which means the fielding

of the field units in their respective area of
responsibility with prescribed objectives and verifiable
tasks schedule of the day to augment the calls and other on
sight activities that makes up the patrol officers day.

Patrol Officer “A Roving Representative”

 146

The patrol officer is the ultimate in the

decentralization of police service. He is the roving
government information and counter for the distress citizen
disgruntled by the inconvenience or trips to the government
offices, unsatisfactory telephone calls, and sometimes
apparent lack of attention to this complaint.

The constant availability and mobility of the patrol

officer make his services useful to other government
agencies, and he improves both public and interdependent
relationships by attending more immediately to citizens
needs.

The extent to which patrol officers will provide extra

police is determined by the local executives of the locality
and other of different government agencies.

When the essential character of patrol services is

understood, it is apparent that the patrol force is the
“backbone” of any police organization because of these
reasons:

1. It is the only branch of police service that is

practically without limit in responsibility;

2. Patrol service is able to perform other police

task if there is a need for special units;

3. Patrol branch is indispensable and the unit which

carries this activity will continue to be the most important
single division of the police organization.

Police manpower is limited and increased specialization

usually results in a diminished patrol activities. Not only
are men drawn from patrol activities, but generally the most
competent are taken in the creation of specialized units.
In some instances, such action may be desirable, but the
indiscriminate transfer of the most capable patrol officer
from patrol to special units jeopardizes effective service.

Showing off competent patrol personnel by assigning

them to undercover and specialized positions will defect
both, while attempts to improve the image of the patrol
force.
 147

What are Attractive Nuisances and Patrol Hazards

1. Attractive Nuisances

It is known doctrine of law wherein an individual is

said to be maintaining on his premises, business or
residential a condition, instrumentality, machine, or other
agency that is dangerous to young children because of their
inability to appreciate peril, which may reasonably be
expected to attract children to such premises, and that one
therefore has a duty to the children, and the society in
general, to exercise reasonable care to protect against the
dangers of such attraction.

2. Patrol Hazard

This term is frequently used to describe a specific

condition or place that requires the patrol officer’s
special attention. The hazard may be a bar where fights
frequently occur. It may be an abandoned digging filled
with stagnant water and used as a swimming hole by children
or an abandoned building or a haunted house used for illegal
activities.

Preparations During Patrol Operations

1. General Preparation

The patrol officer’s value system must be in harmony

with the objectives of law enforcement and sense of fair
play. The first and foremost in his preparation for patrol
duty is attitude preparation. As much as possible, his
attitude must be positive since many things around him and
so many people are so negative, that he will most likely end
up negative and depress.

2. Pre-Patrol Preparation

Prior to going out on patrol, the patrol officer should

have knowledge about their tasks each day, there is usually
a “fall-in” formation at the police station or the police
block as the case may be, which is devoted to the giving of
specific assignments, vehicle to be used and partner, if
 148

any, break and mealtime and patrol assignment. Other

matters include new laws or court decisions affecting field
activities, changes in jurisdictional boundaries, general
and special orders from higher offices or the administration
and new techniques for the improvement of field personnel.

3. In-Field Preparation

Whenever possible, the police officer who is to go out

on patrol should have a “debriefing” conference with the
officer who is being relieved and who had just spent the
previous tour of duty in the patrol district.

4. Orientation Tour

Once in the field, the patrol officer should take a

general familiarization and inspection tour of his assigned
district in order to orient himself of its patterns and
characteristics.

Objectives of Patrol Operations

1. Serve & Protect

Include the objectives of protecting lives and

properties, and providing all the other services which are
required or expected from police officers. This objective
may be effectively established by maintaining open line of
communication between the people and the officers who serve
them. Included in this category are the functions of
“police community relations.”

2. Participative Law Enforcement

Locally referred to as Community Oriented Policing

System (COPS), it is now being widely applied by the law
enforcement agency particularly in Metro Manila area.
Actually, the teamwork concept between the police and the
citizenry is not something new although it seems to be
something new although those are not aware of or have
forgotten the “basic.” Teamwork between the police and the
citizens will always be necessary in order that the law
enforcement functions may be performed effectively.
 149

3. Prevention of Criminal & Delinquency Behavior

This field objective is particularly aimed at ways and

means of reducing the desire to commit crimes. It is a
police responsibility to be able to identify the would-be
offenders, delinquents and near-delinquents before an arrest
becomes necessary. This is more regularly carried out by
the field officer in contacts with juveniles whose behavior
patterns are not so indelibly impressed and who might be
amenable to change. The police officer should take steps to
help the child to redirect energies into lawful and socially
accepted channels.

4. Repression of Criminal & Delinquent Behavior

Repressions of crimes are generally accomplished

whether having officers present at specific locations
maintaining a highly visible profile or by publicizing a
highly active undercover operation. In both cases, the
objectives are to cause people to decide not to commit
crimes for fear of being caught in the act. The theory is
based upon the assumption that people will not commit crimes
if they believe they are certain to be arrested. This
repressive police activity is accomplished by making their
presence know in such a way that even when they are not in a
specific location a would-be felon will refrain from
misbehavior because of the likelihood that they will
suddenly appear from nowhere. This is actually refers to
this phenomenon as police “omni-presence.”

5. Identification & Apprehension of Offenders

Patrol officers are usually in a position to readily

identify obvious or suspected violation of the laws and to
take enforcement action immediately when possible. When a
policeman is assigned to investigate a complaint of a crime,
it is his responsibility to know what crime is or what is
not. He must initiate the investigation immediately, locate
and question victims and witnesses, protect the crime scene
and make every effort to locate and apprehend the suspect.
6. Traffic Flow & Collision Reduction

Pedestrian and vehicle traffic must be free-flowing and

collision free so that people may move safely from one place
or another. The police objective is to determine the causes
 150

of congestion and to relieve it, which involves

investigation, and the five (5) E’s of traffic management.

Factors that Determine Patrol Deployment

1. Resident and transient populations, particularly

in the business sector, the university and tourist belt
areas. Some areas may double its population in the daytime
because of the transients while some may be virtually empty
during working hours on weekdays.

2. Numbers of types of crimes and arrest.

3. Locations of crimes and arrest.

4. Traffic collision statistics and patterns.

5. Locations of “frequent incidents” or hazards

requiring concentrated police coverage such as, sports
arenas, stadium, popular nightspots, bars, theaters,
transportation terminals, or other places were people
usually gather.

6. Disappropriate concentration of population, such

as widely separated single family residence versus the
heavily concentrated dwellings in the depressed areas.

7. Socio-economic factors, people from the high

income groups tend to stay away from home more often than
the low income groups which has preference or without any
choice but to stay at home.

8. Zoning plan of the city, relative locations of

business, industrial, residential and other types of zoning.
By their nature, certain types of businesses and industries
call for higher volumes of police service.

Factors to be Considered in Designating Patrol Districts

1. Divide patrol districts that can be suitably

handled by the assigned patrol officers.
 151

2. Separate the jurisdiction into very small segments

known as “reporting districts” to maintain complete records
on each districts.

3. Group the reporting districts into contiguous

“patrol districts.”

4. Assign the patrol officers to the indicated

proportionate needs of the districts.

Reasons Why Frequent Change of Beat Undesirable

1. The higher quality of patrol service results from

the permanent assignment of patrol officer to a particular
beat.

2. Police hazard vary from one place to another, and

the resulting police duties consequently vary in nature from
beat to beat.

3. Advantages may be taken of difference in abilities

and preferences of patrol officers by assigning them to
beats having duties for which they are best suited.

4. Frequent beat changes prevent patrol officer from

becoming well acquainted with persons, hazards and
facilities on his beat.

5. It is also interfere the continuity of service

because the investigation and disposition of cases sometimes
extend over several days and when the change is made, there
is a delay and sometimes, neglect in disposing this cases.

6. Frequent changes of beat assignments make it

difficult to pinpoint responsibility for unsatisfactory
condition.

Principal Duties of Patrol Force

The principal duties of patrol force are:

1. To prevent violations of statues and ordinances

and suppresses disturbances.
 152

2. To give relief information as the circumstances

requires.

3. These are accomplished by active patrol on the

street in all areas and particularly those areas where crime
frequently occur. An active patrol force in the locality
open guarantees an orderly government, carried out, if
possible by persuasion, if necessary by force.

Objectives of Patrol Force

The function of the police organization and its basic

purpose may be classified under six (6) headings:

1. Prevention of crime.

2. Suppression of criminal activity.

3. Apprehension of criminal.

4. Preservation of the peace.

5. Regulation of non-criminal conduct.

6. Protection of life and property.

These objectives cover a wide scope, and the operative

methods or procedure applied by patrol officer in their
achievement and are marked by even greater variety of range.

Activities of Patrol Forces

1. Patrol and Observation

Patrol diminished the potential offender’s belief in

the existence of an opportunity to successfully violate the
law. The patrol officer must be constantly alert, while
moving about his beat, for conditions and things which may
facilitate or promote the commission of crimes and other
incidents that require police service.
 153

Observation is the function that most completely

describes the patrol officer’s jobs. Most of his duties
depend on what he has observed.

2. Control of Public Gatherings

The patrol officer is frequently assigned to public

meeting and assemblies, he may be sent to a regularly
scheduled meeting to maintain order at the entrances and
exits of the building, and to quell disturbances which may
occur, or he may be called upon to handle a spontaneous
gathering of citizens which was assembled on the street or
another public places for some particular purpose.

3. Miscellaneous Field Service

The patrol officer performs a wide variety of public

services while on duty. Some services are provided to
citizen who called to the station or approach the officer on
the street for assistance.

However, many are initiated by the officer himself by

observing a situation that requires his attention. Since
the patrol officer’s primary duty is to prevent crime, his
first attention should be given to the security of persons
and property on his beat.

4. Answering Calls

The patrol officer is dispatched to every conceivable

type of emergency such as: accidents of every kind,
suicides, illness, including childbirth, fires, explosions,
and other assistance, and to know what is required in
particular situation.

When sent to the scene of the crime, he should arrest

the perpetrator or pursue him if apprehension seems likely,
take care of injured persons, safeguard physical evidences,
and recover stolen properties. He is also called upon to
render wide services. By these he should perform
cheerfully-as a good neighbor.

5. Disposing of Minor Complaints

 154

The patrol officer is called upon to serve a variety of

complaints that are non-criminal in character or that
involves minor violation, the more friendly the patrol
officer is with the people on his beat the more people
likely to go with him for advice and help when they are in
trouble.

6. Investigation on Patrol

The patrol officer makes any investigation. Some

relates to the complaints mentioned above; others grow out
of observation by the patrol officer’s on conditions or
situations on his beat that requires his attention.

7. Preservation of Physical Evidence

Evidence which may be tampered with curious onlookers

or removed and destroyed by the companions or friend of the
violators must be preserved as nearly as possible on the
condition in which found.

The volume of evidence destroyed by carelessness of

policeman in many police organizations is falling. To allow
essential evidence to be altered or carried away by an
unauthorized person might cause the failure of a case
against the person charged.

8. Arrest of Offenders

If the patrol officer observes the commission of a

crime, he may be able to arrest the offender at once. In
fact, this is his primary duty when he is called to scene of
a crime. Where he is the first officer to arrive, there may
be indication that the trail of the criminal is hot and
immediate pursuit is maybe a logical move.

In any event he is instantly on the alert for wanted

characters in order to take them into custody. In order to
carry out this function, he must be aware of the strategy of
arrest where resistance or escape is likely, and he must be
able to repel physical assault with a deadly weapon.

9. Preparation of Reports
 155

In order that the patrol officer’s observation and

investigation activities are to be the most productive it
must be documented and supported by complete and carefully
prepared reports. Through out this volume, the value of
accurate and up-to-date records and statistical information
of police activities has been stressed.

Since the patrol officer is the primary contact man of

the police organization, it is up to him to provide the bulk
of the raw data from which adequate records can be prepared.
He will prepare a report, by typewrite or dictating
equipment, on the results of his investigations and the
action that he has taken. Frequently he will make follow-up
investigations and submit additional report on them.

10. Testifying in Court

Patrol officer are often called upon to witness in

criminal case. Sometimes, the patrol officer is only
witness to the commission of a crime, or he may have secured
important evidence.

Policy Concerning Distribution of Patrol Force

1. Which calls for service will be handled completely

by telephone, and which one requires an officer to be sent
to the caller’s address?

2. Which calls will be “counseled out” by advising

the calling party that the matter can better be handled by
another agency?

3. To what extent will the officers become involved

in neighborhood quarrels and family disputes; advise
children regarding their school attendance and other
behavior patterns; give advice on interpersonal
relationships; and undertake peacekeeping functions?

4. What portion of the crime investigation will be

handled by patrol officers, and at what point will cases be
turned over to the specialist?

5. What is the patrol officer’s role in traffic

accident investigation and traffic law enforcement?
 156

6. To what extent will the officers be responsible

for building security in their districts that necessitate
their being away from their patrol units for extended
periods of time?

7. How much of the public relations function of the

department will directly involved the patrol officers?

8. What will be the reporting responsibilities of the

patrol officers?

9. How will priorities be established to give

precedence to certain types of calls over others?

10. How are the supervisors and administrators used

for management of the patrol officers?

11. What types of forms and other documents must be

maintained as supervisory control devices over patrol
officers—daily logs, tally sheets, etc.?

Other Factors that Determine Deployment of Patrol Force

1. Size of the jurisdiction and shape.

2. Park and recreational facilities.

3. Streets and highways.

4. Locations and number of attractive nuisances,

including abandoned wells and mines, deserted buildings,
swimming pools, open holes, woods and sandpits.

5. Age ratios of population.

6. Male female ratios and married couples versus

unmarried population.

7. Homogeneity and/or mixture of cultural

populations.

8. Modes of transportation and location of

transportation terminals.
 157

9. Restaurants and theaters; volume and types of

clientele, and hours.

10. Known locations where criminal offenders live and

go for recreation.

11. Number and qualifications of officers available

for field duties.

12. Amount of trust and confidence of the people in

the police organization, which may influence the frequency
and type of calls for police service.

Types of Police Patrol

The most important function of police patrol is to

serve the organization’s actual field contact with the
people, whether law abiding or criminal. The types of
patrol refer to the various means of getting from one place
to another in the district. None of them are intended to
isolate the patrol officers from the people they serve.

1. Foot Patrol

Its methods consist of the fixed post, line beat, and

random patrol. Foot patrol is restricted to small areas and
is used to deal with special problems of prevention and
repression that cannot adequately handled by the officers in
patrol cars. Fixed foot patrol is usually used for traffic,
surveillance, parades and special events. Moving foot
patrol is used where there is a considerable foot traffic,
as in business and shopping centers, bars, taverns, high
crime areas and special hazard areas and in place where
there are many multiple family dwellings.

Foot patrol is the most expensive type of patrol, and

most police organizations have reduced their foot patrols to
a minimum because of the expenses. However, it does have
certain advantages that warrants its continued use if even
on a limited basis.

2. Horse Patrol
 158

Horse may be used for certain patrol problems in

jurisdiction that contain large park areas or similar places
where automobiles either cannot go or may be forbidden.
Mobile patrol cars cannot be expected to race scoured fields
or wooded areas, but horse provides the best mobility in
those situations.

3. Bicycle Patrol

The bicycle patrol has been used in many countries as a

simple and inexpensive means of silent transportation to
carry police officers throughout their patrol districts.
Bicycle may be used for routine patrol to replace or augment
foot or mobile patrol under conditions that is more
practical than conventional modes of travel. The versatility
of bicycle made them indispensable for covering crowded
areas and places unreasonable for mobile patrol.

4. Motorcycle Patrol

Primary used for traffic control and enforcement, their

speed and maneuverability make them indispensable police
vehicle.

5. Bay & River Patrol

In some areas surrounded with water, including inland

waterways, various types of sea or water crafts may be
commissioned for police service especially where smuggling
of undocumented people becomes common.

6. Air Patrol

Except for patrolling long sketches of highway or

expenses of inaccessible land, air patrol has very little
flexibility in congested metropolitan areas. They are
however excellent for traffic control in long stretches of
highways, and for search and surveillance, and other special
missions. The air patrol on the other hand, has the
advantage of being able to travel at low speeds, to cover if
necessary, and to land even in inaccessible areas because of
its special take-off and landing capabilities. It is useful
for rescue, medical evacuation, general patrol, criminal
apprehension, crime prevention and repression, emergency
transportation, surveillance and other activities.
 159

7. Mobile Patrol

The mobile patrol is the most extensively used and the

most effective means of transportation for police patrol.
Equipped with the latest kind of police gear, it provides a
rapid, safe, efficient means of transportation under average
operating conditions.

8. Fixed Surveillance

Although not a means of transportation, it must not be

overlooked as a type of patrol. Usually accomplished either
in persons with the used of televisions cameras or monitors,
or stop-frame photography which makes it possible for the
police to watch several locations at the same time for
immediate response when necessary. Various types of
listening and viewing devices are being used to supplement
routine patrol in line with the concept of pro-active
patrol.
 160

CHAPTER

12

PATROL STRATEGIES AND TACTICS

===========================================================

Patrol Strategies in Crime Prevention

If the police are to continue to fulfill their basic

responsibilities to prevent crime and apprehend criminals,
which are the primary goals of patrol activities, then they
must continue to search for new and more effective
strategies.

Police department whether large or small, perform

patrol functions in many different ways and through the use
of a variety of methods. No single patrol strategy will
work well in all cases or in every police jurisdiction
because their choice of particular patrol strategy, or
combination of strategies, to be applied will depend upon,
the following:

1. The resources of the department involving men,

money and property.

2. The particular crime problems, according to time

and place.

3. The characteristics of the community.

4. The imagination and determination of the police

executive and patrol officers on developing patrol programs
to meet the needs of his department and the community.

While it is true that the patrol officer cannot detect

the thinking desire of the criminal, yet, he can destroy the
opportunity to commit a crime by his ever presence patrol
strategy – the psychological atmosphere of omni-presence.

The Strategic Objectives of Omni-Presence

 161

The patrol officer to be seen alert and on constant

patrolling so as to establish a highly visible police
presence, hence, to make his presence psychologically be
felt in spite of his physical absence, hereby creating:

1. A feeling of security on the part of the law

abiding citizen.

2. A feeling of fear on the part of the would-be

violator.

3. A feeling of confidence that the police are

constantly available to respond to any situation at a
moment’s notice.

Establishing the Police Presence

An effective strategy in crime prevention work is

constant and alert patrolling. The patrol function, if
effectively implemented, is the most recognizable form of
police activity, furthering the community as well as being
in perception.

Traditional Patrol Pattern

In spite of a variety of other useful patrol methods

introduced by progressive police organizations abroad, some
of which are applicable to suit local condition, still the
traditional walking beat method is used in the country’s
policing system, because:

1. Financial constraint.

2. Lack of interest on the part of police executives,

administrators, commanders to initiate programs to improve
crime prevention techniques.

3. The thinking of contemporary police officials are

more concerned on the glamorous crime fighting rather than
crime preventing.

Types of Patrol Pattern

 162

The police manual and the list of patrol beats were the
bible. It must be memorized if one has to stay in the
police service. Each beats has its corresponding numbers.

1. The Clockwise Pattern

The objective of the clockwise patrol pattern at the

start of the eight (8) hours tour of duty is for the patrol
officer to survey the situation and condition of the
boundaries of his area of responsibility, for the next
forthcoming hours, his technique will be zigzag, counter
clockwise or the straight way and criss-cross pattern.

2. Zigzag or Free Wheeling Pattern

This is done by patrolling the streets within the

perimeter of the beats, not at random, but with a definite
target location where he knows his presence is necessary,
this action is of course based on his study of the
situations and conditions of his beats.

3. Straightway and Criss-cross Pattern

The straightway pattern is patrolling the length of a

street, and therefore, the easiest to observe the moment of
the patrol officer. Whereas, the criss-cross is more or
less similar to zig-zagging.

What is important is that the moment techniques of a

patrol officer must have a purpose and objective, it is not
aimless nor at random. The observation of the patrol officer
must keenly be aimed at person and things, the sources of
hazards. It is the hazard which must immediately be remedied
and remove within the beat through appropriate police
action.

4. Counter Clockwise Pattern

This technique is simply the reverse of clockwise

pattern. It is done at the last eight (8) hour tour of duty
in order to ensure that nothing unusual happened in his area
of responsibility. An outgoing patrol officer must not
leave his beat unless properly relieved.
Considerations When Designing Patrol Beats
 163

1. The size of the area to be covered.

2. Natural or man-made barriers, rivers, railroad,

tracks, major thoroughfares, bridges, buildings, etc. to
serve as boundaries.

3. The average work load.

4. The number of patrol officers to be assigned at

any one time.

5. Different characteristics within the area such as

residential, commercial, financial, crime density, etc.

Considerations in Determining the Size of the Beat

1. The type of area to be patrolled.

2. The type of criminal activity that occurs in the

area.

3. The frequency of crime in the area.

Advantages of Foot Patrol

1. The foot patrol officers can provide immediate

traffic control when he is needed.

2. More person-to-person contact can be made with the

public.

3. The patrol officer can actually get to know the

physical layout of his beat later.

4. He can get to know the people on his beat better,

and can develop criminal informants easier.

5. A foot patrol officer can sneak up on a situation

where a patrol car is easily noticed when it approaches.
 164

6. By use of two-way radios, the foot patrol officer

can maintain communications with the station and mobile
patrol units.

Foot Patrol Procedures and Techniques

1. Don’t establish a set of patterns of patrol.

2. When checking doors for forced entry, use

flashlights on the area around the lock to see if there are
fresh or noticeable latent prints.

3. When an open door is found, never enter alone.

4. At least once a night use the fire escape to check

the roofs in the commercial districts for possible “cut-
through” or “roof-jobs” as they sometimes happen.

5. Since criminals need some device to assist them in

gaining entry, the foot patrol officers should be very alert
for boxes, ropes and ladders that might have been used to
gain access to a roof.

6. At night, foot patrol officer should occasionally

step into an alley or store entrance, and get out of the
light as much as possible.

7. Foot-care is a prime consideration.

8. During bad weather condition, foot patrol officer

must also walk his beat, taking into considerations his
state of health by having with him the necessary clothing
and individual equipment.

9. A foot patrol officer should make a conscious

effort to make friends on the beat, not only for good
police-community relations but to develop informants.

10. The foot patrol officer should never smoke while

in uniform on the street, nor should he chew gum.

11. Use of all five (5) senses while walking the beat.
 165

12. Foot patrol officer should plan strategies before

the problems takes place.

13. Improve face-to-face interactions with the members

of the community to improve rapport and encourage
cooperation among the public.

Foot Patrol Tactics and Strategies

1. Patrol officer should develop a friendly attitude

while on foot patrol because they perform community relation
tasks of the organization in addition to their usual patrol
duties.

2. Maintaining a free flow of pedestrian traffic is

just as important as keeping vehicular traffic moving.

3. When walking in the beat, patrol officer should

not develop a routine but should see to it that their area
is given sufficient coverage during their tour of duty.

4. The entire of duty time of the patrol officer

belongs to the organization and to the people in general, it
should therefore spend accordingly.

5. The patrol officer on beat should walk his beat

from one place to another so that it will appear to the
observer that he is patrolling and not loitering.

6. Know the personalities in the area, particularly

the wanted persons, known felonies, drug users and pushers,
and the business establishments which usually fall prey to
armed robbery or burglary.

7. When patrolling at nighttime, patrol officer

should always approach building with caution, always
assuming the possibility that a felon may be lurking inside.

8. In patrolling, walk close to the curb during day

time and close to the building during night time. The
reason offered for this is that the objective of daytime
patrol is to contact and to be seen by many people as
possible and the objective of nighttime foot patrol is to be
 166

seen by few people as possible, and to catch criminals in

the act before they are aware of police presence.

9. Patrol officer should keep in mind that police

patrol means service as well as protection, they should
never hesitate therefore, whenever practicable, to offer
their services in whatever way consistent with the purpose
of law enforcement.

10. When things are slow, the patrol officer should

plan strategies.

The Plainclothes Patrol

1. This type of assignment is particularly effective

for “saturation coverage” of high crime area. It provides
extra coverage without alarming the occupants with an
unusual number of policeman.

2. For this kind of patrol, policemen should dress to

fit the occasion and wear whatever clothing is the mode of
the day and fits the type of activity to be covered.

3. The purpose of this patrol is two fold, first is

the gathering of information and police intelligence, and
second is to let businessmen in these areas know that the
police organization is present and aware of their problems.

4. Another purpose of this group is to patrol the

downtown and “skid row” areas in plain clothes to develop
informants.

Advantages of Mobile Patrol

1. Where speed and mobility are needed such as in

large area that must be covered by few foot patrol officers,
the speed of a mobile car allows them to service the whole
area and do so efficiently.

2. It is one of the best means of preventive patrol.

3. If offers protection to the police officer.

 167

4. It permits the patrol officer to carry necessary

equipment and clothing.

5. The mobile car allows patrol officer to have a

partner when needed.

6. In case of large patrol vehicle, it can be used as

emergency ambulance when disaster occurs, it can carry
larger pieces of evidences.

7. Mobile patrol can be used as barricades in road

blocks.

Techniques and Procedure for Mobile Patrol Operation

1. Check the mobile patrol thoroughly before leaving

the garage.

2. As with the foot patrol officer, the beat should

not be traveled the same way each night.

3. Don’t spend too much time in drive-inns or coffee

shops.

4. Do not drive too past on general patrol.

5. During the normal patrol, observe the rules of the

road.

6. The license plate numbers of all strange or

suspicious vehicles should be noted down.

7. Make it a habit not to leave the keys in the

mobile car.

8. When working at nights, it is good idea to have

small snacks.

9. Since we are creatures of habit, a patrol officer

must make it a habit to use seat belts at all times.

10. The patrol officer should learn the whereabouts of

all safes, safelights and outside lock of his beat.
 168

11. A notebook or thickler should be carried at all

times in the mobile car.

12. If the beat contains factories and warehouses, the

mobile patrol officer should know what products they produce
or contain.

13. The mobile patrol officer must like the foot

patrol officer, always be on alert for possible informants.

Other Mobile Patrol Techniques and Strategies

1. When on vehicle patrol, patrol officer should get

away of their car frequently in order to be visible and
accessible to the public. They should never use the car in
isolating themselves from the pubic they serve.

2. When conducting solo patrol, frequent contact

should be made with communication personnel and other field
units. When working in pairs or more, patrol officers
should work as a team for purposes of field contacts,
issuance of citations, checking open doors and responding to
calls for assistance.

3. Operate the vehicle at normal speeds, consistent

with traffic conditions. A patrol officer is not of value
when driving a high speed.

4. Patrol the district so that vehicle will be seen

by the greatest number of people, frequently turning corners
and covering the side streets as well as the main
thoroughfares.

5. Whatever patrol pattern is being used, patrollers

should do it in irregular and unpredicted manner.

6. The entire district should be given ample

attention with emphasis on those places that require special
attention because of high crime frequency.

7. Always assume the possibility that a crime will be

committed in the most illogical places and at the most
unusual times of a day.
 169

Tips in Driving a Patrol Car

1. The use of seat belts/shoulder harness and the

safety devices installed in the patrol car should be
habitual among patrol officers. Not only they are installed
for personal safety, but of the people who have been cited
for failure to wear safety belts and children see that
policeman themselves are not using it, their credibility
would suffer.

2. Keep awake. Driving at nighttime and during the

early morning hours often becomes monotonous. To drive away
sleepiness, the patrol officer may open the car windows for
fresh air, talk out loud occasionally, move eyes frequently
while along a straight stretch of road. Stop the car once
in a while, step out and flex muscles to stay awake.

3. Set an example to other motorists by obeying all

traffic laws particularly the traffic lights/signals, speed
limits and the general rules of the road.

4. Patrol vehicles should always be parked in a legal

manner unless an emergency condition exists. Car keys
should not be left in their ignition, since criminals are
capable of resorting to anything even at the least expected.

Things to be Considered Before Driving a Patrol Car

At any time the patrol officer assumes control of the

assigned vehicle for his tour of duty, he must inspect and
make sure of the following:

1. Clean windows and windshield.

2. Adequate gasoline and correct oil level.

3. Tire pressure and breaks.

4. Possible engine malfunctions.

5. Special weapons and equipment kept in car trunk.

6. Rescue and first aid equipment, including fire

extinguisher.
 170

7. Emergency lamps, sound equipment, including siren.

Advantages of the Two-Man Patrol Cars

1. A two man patrol car provides the officer with a

greater safety factor by doubling the firepower and the
physical protection, it prevents trouble in many case.

2. The mistake that one man makes may be caught by

his partner, and vice versa.

3. One officer does not have to drive a full eight

hours, and he is therefore more rested and can do a better
job.

4. Two pair of eyes are better than one.

5. One man can operate the radio while the other

drives.

6. On quiet nights the driver can have someone to

talk to and help keep him awake.

Advantages of One Man Patrol Cars

1. The preventive enforcement is doubled by having

twice as many police cars on the street.

2. When the officer is alone, he devotes his full

attention to his driving and the beat rather than to the
conversation with his partner.

3. In a two man car, the officers begin to rely on

each other, and a result of human error, an officer expects
support when it isn’t there.

4. In the two man car, an officer will take more

chances than if they are alone.

5. Personality classes are reduced.

 171

Common Purpose of Horse Patrol

1. Park Patrol

In most parks of any size, there are trails that are

too narrow, steep and winding for automobile patrol, or even
jeep patrol. In parks of this sort, there is a great need
for a horse patrol because of the great number of deviates
who congregates in order to pick each other up, or to molest
the children who play in the park.

2. Beach Patrol

In many areas containing large beaches, it has been

found that the horse patrol is quite suitable. The sand and
water make vehicle patrol difficult.

3. Posse and Search Duty

Any community that is close to, or part of a

mountainous area has the problem of chasing down escaped
persons who have fled to these areas, the mounted posses is
undoubtedly the best means of locating these persons when
used in conjunction with air patrol.

4. Parade and Crowd Control

Horses have been used for parade and crowd control for
centuries. The height and size of horses has a strong
psychological advantage in dealing with unruly mobs.

Advantages of Air Patrol

1. Improved response time to emergency calls for

service.

2. Increased apprehension of offenders.

Disadvantages of Air Patrol

1. Bad weather will ground the helicopter.

 172

2. Fogs and night or intermittent clouds might affect

the vision.

3. This type of patrol requires special skills and

training.

4. There is danger from high tension wires, trees and

similar objects.

5. There can be difficulty in landing urban areas.

6. Pilots are suffering from fatigue, and must work

shorter periods of time than regular shifts.

7. Refueling problems.

8. Special facilities are required for housing and

repair.

9. There are many tactical problems to overcome such

as location of police units on ground and the exact
locations or address of the police stations from the air.

10. Adverse public reaction due to fear of “spying

from the sky” or just simple objection of the noise
involved.

11. Criminals can see the helicopter coming and

surprise is lost.

The Bicycle Patrol

1. It can cover areas that are not accessible by

patrol cars, or are too widespread to be patrolled on foot.

2. It has the combined advantage of mobility and

stealth because the bicycle can be operated very quietly and
without attracting attention.

3. It is found to be highly effective in combating

theft, robbery, vandalism on residential areas, parks,
shopping malls.
 173

4. It is also being effectively used by plain clothes

patrol officers for surveillance in high crime areas wherein
the officers wear non-descript clothes to blend with the
apparel commonly worn by criminals and hoodlums.

Bay and River Patrol

1. Marine or water patrol units, aside from being

highly specialized form of police patrol, it is likewise
expensive to maintain,

2. The objective was to use the watercraft in the

anti-smuggling operation along rivers and bays, as well as
against robberies committed on bonded warehouse located
along the river bank.

3. However, because the expenses occurred in its

operation and maintenance it did not compensate the
advantages, police-wise it becomes inoperative.

Necessity of Foot Patrol Even in the Presence of Mobile

Patrol

1. Inspection may necessitate foot patrol.

2. Frequency of patrol may necessitate foot patrol.

3. Offender made submissive.

4. Supervision is simplified.

Factors to be Considered in Shifting Patrol Officer

1. Promotional device.

2. Physical and domestic welfare of patrol personnel

requires that they works regular hours.

3. Permanent shifts greatly facilitate having

different numbers of men in its shift in proportion to work
load.
 174

4. Most efficient patrol service is attained by the

patrol officers until such time as the quality and the need
for his service justify his transfer.

Duties and Responsibilities of Beat Patrol Officers

1. He shall be ready at all times to perform his

duties and obey the lawful orders of his superior officers
or higher authority.

2. He shall be responsible for the efficient

performance of his duties and adequate coverage of his beat
or post.

3. He shall cooperate and coordinate with other

members of his relief, district or other division segments
so that their teamwork may insure continuity of purpose and
maximum achievement of the objectives of the department.

4. He shall be available for duty at all times in

case of special needs and emergencies.

5. He shall respond readily and report punctually to

all his assignments.

6. He shall familiarize himself with all

administrative and operational policies of the police
station.

7. He shall execute the service program within his

area of responsibility providing crime prevention,
protection of life and property, apprehension and
prosecution of offenders, preservation of peace and
enforcement of regulatory measures.

8. He shall be in prescribed uniform and have the

required equipment whenever he reports for duty.

9. He shall be attentive to instructions and record

information given during the briefing or roll call training
and shall likewise record his activities during his tour of
duty in the prescribed manner.
 175

10. He shall, unless otherwise ordered, report to his

superior for inspection and instruction at the conclusion of
his tour of duty.

11. When on patrol, he shall be constantly alert,

observing everything that takes place within his sight or
hearing. He shall not hold conversations with anyone except
in the discharge of his duty.

12. At night time, he shall exercise close vigilance

by watching and frequently examining and trying accessible
doors or entrances and windows of commercial or public
buildings, including vacant or unoccupied houses on his
beat. He shall promptly investigate all suspicious
circumstances he may encounter. In like manner, he shall
check all uninhabited buildings or dwelling places in the
day time.

13. As far as practicable, he shall exert efforts to

know the identities and other circumstances of permanent
residents of the area assigned to him and shall keep track
of movements of the newcomers or strangers transferring to
or merely loitering in the place. He shall report his
findings without delay.

14. He shall take note of vehicles parked by day or

staying overnight in the different streets of his beat,
recording their plate numbers, and whenever possible, the
owners thereof and/or drivers or operators.

15. He shall undertake close surveillance over the

movements of suspicious persons and vehicles and keep record
of his observations for ready use when the need arises.

16. He shall take note and report all known suspected

places of vice, such as gambling dens, houses of ill-repute,
opium dives, hide-outs of persons of doubtful conduct and
places frequented by vagrants.

17. He shall keep himself informed of the places in

his area where violations are known or reputed to exist, and
he shall plan and take necessary action, duly advising his
superior officer as to the steps being taken.
 176

18. He shall at all times, whenever in uniform, keep

his official badge properly displayed and courteously give
his name and badge number when duly requested to identify
himself.

19. He shall, in the event of any disturbances of the

peace within his beat or in its immediate vicinity, proceed
to the particular spot and exert efforts to restore order.
If a crime has been committed and offender can placed under
custody, he shall take immediate steps to bring him to the
police station. He shall endeavor to save life and protect
or preserve the crime scene until the arrival of the
investigator.

20. He shall not leave his beat until properly

relieved, except when required by the exigencies of the
service and for unavoidable reasons. He shall keep record
of the same in his memorandum book indicating the time he
left his beat, the reason for leaving and the time he
returned and resumed control of duty.

21. He shall take care of lost children by taking them

to the residence of their parents, if located within or near
the vicinity of his beat and shall promptly notify his
station of such action. If the residence is not known or at
some distant location, he shall take such necessary action
as may be required by the circumstances. He shall be
observant of school children who are not in classes during
the proper hours, and after making inquiries, as to the
reasons therefore shall take appropriate action on any case
of truancy which may come to his notice.

22. He shall take note of all the obstructions in the

streets or sidewalks from which accidents may occur,
removing them when practicable. He shall also take
appropriate action on all nuisances and other matters
affecting the safety and convenience of the public or the
interest of the city and/or municipality.

23. He shall exercise vigilance in order to prevent

fire or avoid waste of water; take note of all garbage, dead
animals or other offensive matters thrown into the streets
and shall take appropriate action thereon.
 177

24. He shall in order to summon aid, give three (3)

blasts with the whistle and in extreme emergency, he may
discharge his firearm in the air.

25. He shall familiarize himself with the location of

the street traffic signs, and if he sees them misplaced or
tampered with in any manner, he shall rectify the same. If
such signs are missing from their proper location, he shall
make proper report of such fact to his superior.

26. While on patrol duty, he shall not enter any bar,

nightclub, thereafter or any other place of amusement or
business except in the strict discharge of his duty.

27. He shall have an official note book in which he

shall enter the names of persons taken into custody by him
and such important particulars in each case as may be
necessary as well as other pertinent information and matters
relative to the discharge of his official duties. Such
memorandum book shall be subject to inspection by his
superior officers at any time.

28. He shall endeavor to be familiar with the bus

lines, the location of streets, public buildings and
offices, hospitals, courts, transportation offices and
depots, industrial plants, highways and boundaries thereof
and of the national provincial and municipal officials and
such other matters pertaining to the government of the city
or municipality, as this will enable him render intelligent
and helpful information and assistance when requested.

29. He shall perform such other duties and

responsibilities that may be assigned to him by his superior
officers or higher authority.

Duties of Police Officers Assigned to Patrol Cars

1. He shall operate the patrol car at moderate rate

of speed and in such manner that will enable him to observe
any condition or occurrence in his patrol beat which may
require police attention. He shall adhere to the method
prescribed for foot patrolmen, except as may be otherwise
directed.
 178

2. Unless otherwise directed, he shall report for

roll call at his station at the prescribed time. He shall
report hourly to the base control operator of such time as
may be assigned by his superior officer.

3. He shall patrol his assigned beat regularly,

paying particular attention to critical areas.

4. He shall exercise judgment and care with due

regard to the safety of life and property when responding to
an emergency call.

5. He shall be in proper uniform when on duty, unless

otherwise directed by his commander.

6. He shall perform such other duties as may be

assigned to him by his superior officers or higher
authority.
 179

CHAPTER

13

TECHNIQUES IN PURSUIT OPERATIONS

===========================================================

Introduction

Protection of life and property, which applies to

pursuit operations, included the lives of and property of
the individual being pursued, the officer, and any innocent
people who might become involved in a traffic accident a
direct result of the hot-pursuit operations. At sometime
during the pursuit operations, it may be necessary to
abandon the pursuit operations to uphold this police
responsibility. Consider also the likelihood that the driver
of the pursued vehicle will slow down to a normal speed once
he makes good his escape. Or will continue to jeopardize the
life of everyone who gets his way. There are many times when
circumstances may dictate the abandonment of the pursuit-
operations.

Advantages of Patrol Officer in Pursuit Operations

1. Police communications for tactical operations such

as interceptions and roadblocks can be made available.

2. Numerical superiority.

3. The officer has a better knowledge of the streets

and the general area.

4. The officer has more experience and skill at high

speed driving.

Disadvantages of Criminals Being Pursued

 180

1. The pursued is under more pressure to escape and

make decisions.

2. Unless the person is drunk or under the influence

of drugs, they are usually emotional and scared, and will
take more chances.

3. If the pursued driver is under the influence of

drug or alcohol, his senses and reactions will be affected.

4. Because of watching movies and television, the

suspect has the added fear that he will be shot.

5. The siren and red lights tend to make the suspect

think that the police car is closer than it really is, and
that it is going much faster than it really.

Pointers During Pursuit Operations

1. Notify headquarters immediately when the chase

begins.

2. Weigh the seriousness of the violations against

the possibility of wrecking the police car and causing self
injury.

3. Do not actually begin the chase until the safety

belt is on the secure.

4. Don’t pursue a vehicle if you are carrying

passengers or prisoners unless it is in dire emergency.

5. Don’t make quick starts or “dig-out” when first

starting a chase.

6. When not actually accelerating, keep your foot on

top of the brake without depressing it.

7. Take into consideration the condition of the road,

the degree of traffic and the weather when chasing a
suspected vehicle.
 181

8. Plan when a car is entering each blind

intersection that is approached.

9. Keep radio control informed of each change in

direction so that other police cars may be directed to a
proper interception.

10. Don’t use the siren unless you are the immediate
chasing car.

11. Don’t accelerate on oil slicks, ice or slippery

parts of the road.

12. If you have partner, let him do the radio

broadcasting, have him sweep the approaching intersections
with the spot light if it is at night.

13. When approaching another vehicle from behind, slow

down gradually before actually arriving just behind him.

14. Give all cars ahead plenty of forewarning when you

are about to pass them.

15. If at all possible, avoid passing other vehicles

at intersections.

16. Don’t brake on turns.

17. When going into a turn at high speeds, accelerate

slightly.

18. If there is a strong wind blowing, plan on the

police vehicle swerving sharply when passing a large trucks
or when going into an underpass, because these act as wind
blocks, and have the same effect as if a person leaning
against you with his arm, and then suddenly pulled his arm
away.

19. If the suspect begins firing at your vehicle, be

very cautious on returning the fire.

20. In a long chase, the accelerator should not be

given full throttle for a long period of time.
 182

21. In a long highway chase, the siren, if is not the

electronic type, should be used sparingly or it can burn
out.

22. If the officer sees that he is about to collide

with an oncoming vehicle, it would be better, if possible,
to run off the road, since it would result in less impact
than colliding with an oncoming vehicle.

23. An officer often forget to use turning signals

during a chase because his whole attention is centered on
the chase, it must not be forgotten at all times

Prime Considerations in Stopping the Vehicle

1. As few escapes routes as possible.

2. As little traffic hazard as possible.

3. As little populated as possible.

Tips Before Getting Out of the Police Car

1. Always call in the license plate number of all

vehicles stopped, and be sure to include a description of
the vehicle.

2. As a routine matter, check all vehicles stopped

against the hot sheet, and give the radio operator a chance
to check the license number through their master files
before getting out of the car.

3. Keep an eye on the driver of the stopped vehicle.

4. If it is at night, turn-on spotlight on the

subject rear view mirror only when the vehicle was stopped.

Procedures in Approaching the Stopped Vehicle

1. Check the trunk during the approach.

 183

2. Check the back seat and the floorboard during the

approach.

3. If it is at night, the flashlight should be held

in the club position than the carrying position.

4. Stop just before the doorpost and check for the

ignition key.

5. Do not go further than the doorpost.

Methods of Stopping a Suspected Vehicle

1. First Method

When the traffic is heavy, or the officer is alone in

the car, it is sometimes best not to park the vehicle out in
the traffic lane or too close to the suspect vehicle. In
case of this sort, the police vehicle should park directly
behind the suspected vehicle, with the left rear slightly
jutting out toward the traffic.

This will offer a little protection for the officer

from passing traffic. In the case of one man car, it
prevents the suspect from seeing how many officers are
actually in the vehicle. At night this method has the
advantage of allowing both spotlights to be placed along the
side of the suspect vehicle. The headlights should be on
high beam to increase the visibility into the suspect’s
vehicle.

2. Second Method

The purpose of this method of stopping the suspect

vehicle is to provide the officers with some means of
physical barrier. In this case, the police car is turned in
at an angle behind the suspect car, so that the front left
end of the police car is jutting out in the traffic lane.

In this way, the driver can use the hood of the car for
a barrier and protection, and the passenger officer can use
the rear right fender for the same purpose. This adds
 184

greatly to the psychological pressure on the suspects not to

resist or initiate a gun battle.

3. Third Method

This method will be covered in more detail in order to

follow through with the complete procedure to be used in
stopping vehicles with felony suspects:

1) Step 1: Turn on the red lights and sound the

siren or horn. Use the spotlight if it is at night.

2) Step 2: If a two man car, the passenger officer

should roll his window down and project his weapon out of
the window at the driver of the suspect vehicle.

3) Step 3: Stop the vehicle one car width to the

left of the suspect vehicle, and slightly behind it.

4) Step 4: Give the following orders to the suspects

in a loud, clear and steady voice:
“Police Officers, don’t leave the vehicle, don’t move
unless we order you to do so, or we will shoot. Keep
looking straight ahead.”

5) Continue giving the suspects the following orders:

a) “Driver, lay both hands on top of the

steering wheel, palms up.”

b) “You in the front right, put your hands on

the windshield, palms against the glass.”

c) “You in the rear seat, lay your hands on the

back of the front seat, palms up.”

d) “All of you, keep looking straight ahead.

Don’t move until told to do so.”

Immobilizing the Suspects Vehicle

1. Method 1: When the driver’s window is rolled down.

1) Step 1: Order the driver to slowly move his left
arm out the window.
 185

2) Step 2: Order the driver slowly move his right

hand from the steering wheel and out the window to open the
door from the outside with his right hand. This puts him in
physical disadvantages.

3) Step 3: Order the driver to put his right hand

back on top of the steering wheel.

4) Step 4: Order the driver to slowly reach for the

keys with his left hand, and slowly drop them on the ground.

2. Method 2: When the driver’s window is rolled up.

In this situation, the driver would have to remove his

hands from sight to roll the window down anyway, so this
movement might as well be utilized to open the door. He
should be ordered to raise his left elbow up in the air,
then keeping his elbow high, open the door with his right
hand. In this position the driver would find it more
difficult to pull a “fast one” than if his arm were
completely out of sight while opening the door. Once the
door is open. Steps 3 and 4 would be the same.

3. Method 3: To save time.

While the officers are fully protected by using the

police car as a barricade, simply order the driver to open
the door and drop the ignition keys out into the road. Then
look through the open door, and to the dashboard to make
sure that he didn’t throw out some key other than the
ignition key.

Removing the Suspect from the Vehicle

1. The Driver

The driver should always be removed first. He is

usually the leader. Have him grab the top of the steering.
When his feet are on the ground, have him then place his
hands high in the air. Then have him slowly back out toward
you. He must then be placed in a position where he may be
 186

watched and later searched. The “spread eagle” position

against the fender is good.

2. The Front Passenger

Have the front seat passenger slide over to the driver

side of the car and put his hands on top of the steering
wheels. Then have him repeat the same procedure as the
driver.

3. The Rear Passengers

Have the rear seat passengers put both hands out of the
door windows and open the doors from the outside with their
hands remaining on the outside. When their feet are on the
ground, have them raise their hands high and back out toward
you. If the windows are rolled up, have the passenger in
the rear left side raise his left elbow and open the door
with his right hand. Then place both hands on top of the
front seat. He can then back out in normal way. The
passenger in the right rear seat should then slide over to
the left and repeat the process.

Definition of Handcuffs

It is a device to keep a person from using his arms,

usually of two steel bracelets, fined by a short chain and
fastened around the wrist.

Applying the Handcuffs

Handcuffs should be applied if possible when the

suspect is in the wall search position.

Step 1: Take the handcuffs in the closed, single

locked position, and grip them by the links with the left
hand so that the movable arm of the cuffs is on the bottom,
and keyhole is facing the subject.

Step 2: Tell the subject to put his right hand behind

his back with the back of his hands facing the body.
 187

Step 3: Grab the subject’s fingers on the right hand

with your right hand as though you were shaking hands with
him, only gripping lower to prevent “Indian Wrestling”.
Then bend the fingers outward.

Step 4: Lay the right cuff on his wrist and then give
a quick downward snap so the swinging arm of the cuff swings
around and locks. You can complete the swing with your
fingers if it doesn’t complete by itself. With a little
practice, an officer can become quite proficient at this. A
word of warning, do not bring the cuffs down on the
subject’s wrist with great force. It is not required, and
it can hurt the subject’s wrist. The cuff should touch the
wrist before the downward snap is given.

Step 5: Grab the handcuff links with your right hand

and tell the suspect to put his head against the wall, and
then bring his left hand back in the same manner as before
with the right hand.

Step 6: Grasp his left hand with your left hand as you
did with the right hand, and apply the handcuffs with your
right hand as was done before.

Step 7: Double lock both cuffs.

Step 8: Put your hand over his shoulder and pull him
back to a standing position.

Plastic Handcuffs

Few officers carry an extra pair of handcuffs, yet many

times an officer arrest more than one suspect. In fact,
today multiple arrests are certainly more common than in the
past.

One answer to this problem is the plastic strip

handcuff. This type of restraining device has many
advantages. First, it is relatively inexpensive, and can be
easily purchased by the police officer’s if the police
organization does not provide them. Secondly, they will fit
any person, wrist or ankle. There are occasions where the
suspect had such large wrist, then handcuffs would not fit.
Finally, they are very versatile in their application and
 188

are easily stored in the officer’s carrying case. The only

problem is that some type of cutting pliers is needed to
remove them. Because of their wide use today, most booking
officers have a pair of snipers for this purpose.

When There are Two Officers and Three Prisoners

Use any of the combinations previously mentioned for

one and for two prisoners.
 189

CHAPTER

14

COMMUNITY-ORIENTED POLICING SYSTEM

===========================================================

Community-Oriented Policing System: The Philippine Setting

Basically, it was derived from the “Koban Policing

System” of Japan, sensing its effectivity the Philippine
National Police hierarchy has architected and gradually
embraced a new philosophy in its crime prevention and
control undertaking, which gave birth to the Community
Oriented Policing System (COPS), with the primary purpose of
addressing the crime by knowing its root causes, and to
maintain peace and order through the involvement of the
citizenry.

Definition of Community-Oriented-Policing System

It is new policing concept that combines the

familiarity, trust and sense of belongingness characterized
by the “beat cop” with the professionalism and expertise of
the professional policing model.

What is a Beat Cop

It is a policeman patrolling the streets or locality

around the clock by maintaining direct contact with local
residents to prevent crimes. Patrols may be by foot,
bicycle or mobile.

How will the Objectives of COPS Be Implemented

1. Patrolling the streets and by visiting private

homes and business offices.

2. Control of road traffic.

 190

3. Guidance of juvenile delinquents.

4. Taking drunks under protection.

5. Providing counseling service on troubles and

problems of residents.

Concept of Community-Oriented Policing System

Under this revolutionized concept in modern policing

and a new strategy for delivering basic police service, the
law enforcement officers is given the responsibility for a
limited area of territory. Through this scheme, the officer
get to know its “own neighborhood policemen.”

COPS is a developing philosophy and may need

modifications for the Philippine setting. In fact there
might be modifications for geographical localities. It
requires inputs from all sectors concerned. To be sure, it
is an addition and not supposed to be a substitute for the
traditional police tactics of crime prevention.

What are These NCOBs, COPS/KCs or PCPs

The NCOBs, COPS/KCs or PCPs are mini police-stations

which serves as the centerpiece of the COPS. The following
are its distinct advantage: 1) an information center; 2) a
crime prevention center; 3) an emergency center; and 4) a
merging point for community activity.

New COPS on the Blockss or PCPs Activities

1. Block Box

This is the NCOBs/PCPs center of command and control of

its activities and as the police base from which citizens
may seek police assistance whether in person, by radio or
telephone.

2. Patrol
 191

NCOBs will provide round the clock patrolling to keep

watch over the assigned area.

3. House Visitation

Police officers on patrol visit every home and work

place to offer crime prevention, advised and organized anti-
crime group.

4. Street Questioning

Police officers on patrol may interview within the

bounds of the law as deterrent to persons who intend to
commit a crime.

5. Police Social Services

This project concerns a wide variety of activities such

as physical fitness and sports development, environmental
protection, clean and green, values formation and
educational and livelihood projects.

Duties of the Police Assigned in NCOBs, COPS/KCs & PCPs

1. Desk Watch

The policeman will sit at his desk and entertain

complaints.

2. Sitting Watch

The policeman will sit outside the police box and

observe what is going on.

3. Patrolling

The policeman will patrol his assigned area. This will

include visitation and counseling.

4. Community Organizer
 192

The policeman will assist community centered-

organizations that will aid in the prevention of crimes.

5. Public Advocate

The policeman will be the role model player for the

community to emulate, he will perform public safety services
through the following:

1) Quick response to all emergencies.

2) Information relative to both safety and public

protection.

3) Control and management of traffic.

 193

REVIEW QUESTIONS

PATROL ORGANIZATION & OPERATIONS

==================================================================

INSTRUCTIONS: Select the correct answer for each of the following

questions.

1. It is the primary purpose of patrol.

A. elimination of actual opportunity

B. diminishment of desire and capability
C. development of omni-presence
D. prevention and control of crimes

2. This is done by patrolling the streets within the perimeter

of the beats, not at random, but with a definite target location
where he knows his presence is necessary.

A. clockwise pattern B. counter-clockwise pattern

C. criss-cross patterns D. free-wheeling pattern

3. It suggest little more than inspectional activity, whether

carried out on foot, mobile or some other way.

A. patrol B. police
C. patroullier D. constable

4. It is an alternative patrol system which means the assigning

of the field units in their respective area of responsibility
with prescribed objectives and verifiable tasks schedule of the
day.

A. proactive B. reactive
C. mobile patrol D. beat patrol

5. This term is frequently used to describe a specific

condition or place that requires the patrol officer’s special
attention.

A. attractive nuisances B. patrol hazard

C. all of the above D. non of the above
 194

6. Its methods consist of the fixed post, line beat, and random
patrol, and it is the most expensive type of patrol.

A. mobile patrol B. air patrol

C. helicopter patrol D. foot patrol

7. It is originated from the Greek word “Politeia” meaning

government of a city, and it is applies to civil officers and not
necessarily policeman.

A. patrol B. police
C. patroullier D. constable

8. It is being used in many countries as a simple and

inexpensive means of patrol because of its mobility and stealth.

A. bicycle patrol B. motorcycle patrol

C. helicopter patrol D. mobile patrol

9. The patrol officer to be seen alert and constant patrolling

so as to establish a highly visible police presence, hence, to
make his presence psychologically be felt in spite of his
physical absence, and this is called.

A. atmosphere of omni-presence
B. enhanced police visibility
C. extensive crime prevention and control
D. elimination of the elements of crime

10. The observation of patrol personnel must be keenly aimed at

this, because these are the sources of hazard.

A. criminal elements B. patrol hazard

C. attractive nuisances D. persons and things

11. It is the physical presence of uniformed police personnel

and marked police vehicles in the place where crimes are usually
taking place.

A. police patrol B. police visibility

C. omni-presence D. police operation

12. It is useful for rescue, medical evacuation, and emergency

transportation.

A. bicycle B. motorcycle
C. helicopter D. mobile
 195

13. Is the most extensively used, and the most effective means
of police patrol, considering its speed and mobility.

A. bicycle patrol B. motorcycle patrol

C. helicopter patrol D. mobile patrol

14. It is primary used for traffic control and enforcement,

their speed and maneuverability make them indispensable police
vehicle.

A. bicycle patrol B. motorcycle patrol

C. helicopter patrol D. mobile patrol

15. It is the backbone of police organization.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence

16. Its history is as old as organized society.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence

17. It usually involved night patrols of soldiers on the town or

city.

A. police protection B. crime prevention

C. police visibility D. all of the above

18. Police patrol work involves the following, EXCEPT:

A. crime prevention B. criminal investigation

C. traffic enforcement D. omni-presence

19. To be effective, modern patrol officers must perform the

following sphere of activity, often simultaneously, EXCEPT:

A. calls for service B. elimination of opportunity

C. tactical responses d. strategic problem solving

20. It is the only division in the police organization that can

not possibly be eliminated.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence
 196

21. It is often the only one that performs twenty-four (24)

hours duty.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence

22. It is important because time is of the essence in most

police work.

A. rapid response time B. constant availability

C. first responders D. patrol officers

23. It serves as any eyes and ears of the police organization.

A. patrol officer B. traffic officer

C. beat patrol personnel D. intelligence operatives

24. In so far as the patrol activities fails to eliminate the

elements of crime, the patrol officer is immediately available
with the hereunder reactive police activities, EXCEPT:

A. to investigate B. to apprehend suspects

C. maintain visibility D. to recover stolen property

25. Patrol officer should be practical __________ and encourage

persons to come to them for assistance and advice.

A. police officers B. social workers

C. government employee D. community leaders

26. This is a patrol activity which consists of driving around

the district, and waiting for something to happen.

A. proactive B. reactive
C. mobile patrol D. beat patrol

27. It is the ultimate in the decentralization of the police

service.

A. patrol officer B. traffic officer

C. beat patrol personnel D. intelligence operatives

28. It is the only branch of police service that is practically

without limit in responsibility.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence
 197

29. It is able to perform other police task if there is a need

for special units.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence

30. It is indispensable, and the unit which carries this

activity will continue to be the most important single division
of the police organization.

A. patrol B. traffic
C. investigation D. intelligence

31. It is a condition that is dangerous to young children

because of their inability to appreciate peril.

A. patrol hazard B. attractive nuisances

C. crime prone areas D. places of ill reputes

32. It is the first and foremost in the preparation of police

officers to patrol duty.

A. general preparations B. pre-patrol preparations

C. in-field preparations D. orientation tour

33. Prior going out on patrol, the patrol officers should have
knowledge about their task each day, there is usually a “fall-in”
formation, and this is being called as.

A. general preparations B. pre-patrol preparations

C. in-field preparations D. orientation tour

34. The police officer who is to go out on patrol should have a

debriefing conference with the out-going police officer, and this
is called.

A. general preparations B. pre-patrol preparations

C. in-field preparations D. orientation tour

35. Once in the field, the patrol officer should make

familiarization and inspection of his assignment, and this is
called.

A. general preparations B. pre-patrol preparations

C. in-field preparations D. orientation tour
 198

36. This includes the objectives of protecting lives and

properties, and providing all the other services which are
required or expected from police officers.

A. serve and protect B. participative enforcement

C. repression of crimes D. prevention of crimes

37. It is locally referred to as Community-Oriented Policing

System (COPS) and it is being widely applied by the police
organization in the different places in the country.

A. serve and protect B. participative enforcement

C. repression of crimes D. prevention of crimes

38. It is particularly aimed at ways and means of reducing the

desire to commit crimes, and it is a police responsibility to be
able to identify the would-be offenders.

A. serve and protect B. participative enforcement

C. repression of crimes D. prevention of crimes

39. It is generally accomplished whether having officers present

at specific locations and maintaining a highly visible profile or
by publicizing a highly active undercover operation.

A. serve and protect B. participative enforcement

C. repression of crimes D. prevention of crimes

40. Patrol officers are usually in a position to readily

identify obvious or suspected violation of the laws and to take
enforcement action immediately when possible, and this is:

A. identification & apprehension of offenders

B. traffic flow & collision reduction
C. participative law enforcement
D. repression & prevention of crimes

41. The objective is to determine the causes of traffic

congestion and to relieve it, and this is called.

A. identification & apprehension of offenders

B. traffic flow & collision reduction
C. participative law enforcement
D. repression & prevention of crimes
 199

42. It may result from the permanent assignment of patrol

officer to a particular beat.

A. quality of patrol service

B. acquaintance with hazards
C. pinpointing of responsibility
D. interfere the continuity of service

43. These are the principal duties of patrol force, EXCEPT:

A. to prevent violations B. to give relief information

C. orderly government D. ensure public safety

44. These are the objective of patrol force, EXCEPT:

A. prevention & suppression of crimes

B. apprehension of criminals & preservation of peace
C. regulation of conduct & protection of life & property
D. guarantee an orderly government

45. This is patrol activities that diminished the potential

offenders’ belief in the existence of opportunity to successfully
violate the law.

A. patrol & observation B. control of gatherings

C. answering calls D. miscellaneous activity

46. It is the function that most completely described the patrol

officer’s job.

A. walking the beat B. observation

C. protect the people D. arrest offenders

47. The patrol officer is frequently assigned to public meeting

and assemblies because of this objective.

A. patrol & observation B. control of gatherings

C. answering calls D. miscellaneous activity

48. This means that the patrol officer performs a wide variety
of public services while on duty.

A. patrol & observation B. control of gatherings

C. answering calls D. miscellaneous activity
 200

49. This is a police activity wherein the patrol officer is

dispatched to every conceivable type of emergency.

A. patrol & observation B. control of gatherings

C. answering calls D. miscellaneous activity

50. This is an activity of the patrol officer wherein he is

called upon to serve a variety of complaints that are non-
criminal in character.

A. invest. on patrol B. disposing of complaints

C. arrest of offender D. preservation of
evidence

51. This is an important patrol activity, and this is not to

allow essential evidence to be altered or carried away.

A. inves. on patrol B. disposing of complaints

C. arrest of offender D. preservation of
evidence

52. It relates to complaints or situation on the beat that

requires the patrol officer’s attention.

A. inves. on patrol B. disposing of complaints

C. arrest of offender D. preservation of
evidence

53. It is the primary duty of the patrol officers when they are
called to the scene of the crime.

A. inves. on patrol B. disposing of complaints

C. arrest of offender D. preservation of
evidence

54. Through out this volume, the value of accurate and up-to-
date records and statistical information of police activities has
been stressed.

A. testifying in court B. preparation of reports

C. all of the above D. non of the above

55. It is an activity of the patrol officers, wherein sometimes

they are often called as witness in criminal cases.

A. testifying in court B. preparation of reports

C. all of the above D. non of the above

56. It is the most expensive type of police patrol.

 201

A. foot patrol B. mobile patrol

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

57. It may be used for certain patrol problems in jurisdictions

that contain large park areas.

A. bicycle patrol B. horse patrol

C. T.V. patrol D. beat patrol

58. This has been used in many countries as simple and

inexpensive means of silent transportation.

A. foot patrol B. mobile patrol

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

59. It requires the use of various sea or water crafts

especially where smuggling become common.

A. bicycle patrol B. horse patrol

C. bay & river patrol D. beat patrol

60. Although not a means of transportation, it must not be

overlooked as a type of patrol.

A. bicycle patrol B. horse patrol

C. fixed surveillance D. beat patrol

61. An effective strategy in crime prevention work is:

A. elimination of actual opportunity

B. establishing omni-presence
C. constant and alert patrolling
D. observation of persons and things

62. In spite of a variety of other useful patrol methods, still

the traditional walking beat method is used because of the
following, EXCEPT:

A. financial constraints of the police organization

B. glamorous crime fighting than preventing
C. lack of interest on the part of police executive
D. lack of manpower and material resources

63. This is type of patrol pattern wherein its objectives is to

survey the situation and condition of the area of responsibility.

A. clockwise pattern B. counter-clockwise pattern

C. criss-cross patters D. freewheeling pattern
 202

64. It is the patrolling the length of a street, and it must

have a purpose and objectives.

A. clockwise pattern B. counter-clockwise pattern

C. criss-cross patters D. freewheeling pattern

65. It is done at the last eight (8) hour tour of duty in order
to ensure that nothing unusual happened in area of
responsibility.

A. clockwise pattern B. counter-clockwise pattern

C. criss-cross patters D. freewheeling pattern

66. This type of patrol assignment is particularly effective for

saturation drive coverage on high crime area.

A. undercover B. plainclothes
C. intelligence D. surveillance

67. It is one of the best means of preventive patrol, and it can

be used as barricades in road blocks.

A. foot patrol B. mobile patrol

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

68. It is undoubtedly the best means of locating persons in any

community that is close or part of mountainous area.

A. foot patrol B. horse patrol

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

69. It can improve response time to emergency calls for service,

and it increased apprehension of criminals.

A. foot patrol B. air patrol

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

70. It can cover areas that are not accessible to patrol cars,
or are too widespread to be patrolled by foot.

A. foot patrol B. mobile patrol

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

71. Aside from being highly specialized form of police patrol,

it is likewise expensive to maintain.

A. foot patrol B. bay & river patrol

 203

C. bicycle patrol D. motorcycle patrol

72. Even in the presence of mobile patrol, these are the

necessity of foot patrol, EXCEPT:

A. inspection may necessitate foot patrol

B. offender made submissive
C. supervision is simplified
D. to enhance police visibility

73. These are the prime considerations in stopping a vehicle,

EXCEPT:

A. few escapes B. little traffic

C. squatters area D. little populated

74. It is a device to keep a person from using his arms.

A. plastic handcuffs B. handcuffs

C. restraining device D. steel bracelets

75. It is a policeman patrolling the streets or the locality

around the clock by maintaining contact with the community.

A. beat cop B. patrol officer

C. first responder D. patrolman

76. This is the Police Community Precincts (PCPs) center of

command and control of its activities and as the police base.

A. Block Box B. Barangay Hall

C. Police Detachment D. Sub-Station

77. It is an activity of the Police Community Precincts (PCPs)

that provide round the clock patrolling to keep watch over the
assigned area.

A. standing watch B. patrol

C. vertical patrol D. sitting watch

78. It refers to the activity of police officer who visits every

home and work place to offer crime prevention, advised and
organized anti-crime group.

A. social services B. standing watch

C. house visitation D. street questioning
 204

79. It is an interview made by the patrol officer within the

bounds of the law as deterrent to persons who intend to commit a
crime.

A. social services B. standing watch

C. house visitation D. street questioning

80. This project concerns a wide variety of activities, such as

sports development, educational and livelihood projects.

A. social services B. standing watch

C. house visitation D. street questioning

81. It is a duty of a policeman who sits at his desk and

entertains complaints.

A. desk watch B. sitting watch

C. patrolling D. standing watch

82. It is a police activity, wherein the policeman will sit

outside of the police box and observe what is going on.

A. desk watch B. sitting watch

C. patrolling D. standing watch

83. This includes visitation and counseling.

A. desk watch B. sitting watch

C. patrolling D. standing watch

84. This in an activity in the police box wherein the police

officer assists the community centered organizations that provide
helps in the prevention of crimes.

A. community organizer B. sitting watch

C. patrolling D. public advocate

85. It is refers to the process of role model playing undertaken

by the police officer for the community to emulate.

A. quick response B. public information

C. management of traffic D. public advocate
 205

86. Patrol is also an indispensable service that plays a leading

role in the accomplishment of the police purpose, because of the
following reasons, EXCEPT:

A. it directly eliminate actual opportunity

B. it checks the development of desire
C. it favorably influenced individual attitude
D. it purpose is to maintain peace and order

87. By giving assistance, advice and sympathy to those in

distress, the patrol officer accomplished the following, EXCEPT:

A. prevent wasted lives B. friendship

C. cooperation D. community mobilization

88. This is accomplished by making the presence of patrol

officer know in such a way that even they are not in a specific
location, the would-be fellow will refrain from misbehavior.

A. police patrol B. police visibility

C. omni-presence D. police operation

89. It is usually used for traffic, surveillance, parades and

special events.

A. fixed post B. moving foot patrol

C. vertical patrol D. standing watch

90. It is used where there is considerable foot traffic, as in

business and shopping centers, bars, taverns, high crime areas
and special hazard areas, and in places where there are many
multiple family dwellings.

A. fixed post B. moving foot patrol

C. vertical patrol D. standing watch

91. These are the considerations in determining the size of the

patrol beat, EXCEPT:

A. type of area B. type of criminal activity

C. frequency of crime D. type of people & business

92. These are the advantages of foot patrol, EXCEPT:

A. can provide immediate traffic control

B. more person-to-person contact
C. can develop criminal informants
D. can establish a set of patterns
 206

93. In patrolling, it is advised to walk close to the curb

during day time, and the reason offered for this is:

A. to be seen by many people as possible

B. to be seen by few people as possible
C. not to be exposed from sunlight
D. not to be exposed from cold weather

94. In patrolling, it is advised to walk close to the building

during night time, and the reason offered for this is:

A. to be seen by many people as possible

B. to be seen by few people as possible
C. not to be exposed from sunlight
D. not to be exposed from cold weather

95. It can be used as emergency ambulance when disaster occurs,

it can also carry larger pieces of evidence.

A. mobile patrol B. helicopter patrol

C. bay & river patrol D. bicycle patrol

96. The use of __________ installed to mobile patrol car should

be habitual from among patrol officers, not only for personal
safety but also in setting an example to the general public.

A. safety belt B. bullet proof

C. sirens & blinkers D. megaphone

97. It is also being effectively used by plain clothes patrol

officers for surveillance in high crime prone areas.

A. mobile patrol B. helicopter patrol

C. bay & river patrol D. bicycle patrol

98. These are the advantages of police officer in pursuit

operations, EXCEPT:

A. numerical superiority B. interceptions & roadblocks

C. using marked vehicle D. better knowledge of streets

99. The effectiveness and efficiency of the patrol function can

be enhanced if there is detailed and up-to date information about
crime and criminals, this call for the establishment of:

A. patrol base headquarters

B. crime information center
C. management information center
D. public information office
 207

100. The __________ differs from routine patrol methods in that

patrol officers perform certain specific, predetermined
preventive strategies on a regular and systematic basis.

A. low-visibility patrol
B. directed deterrent Patrol
C. split force patrol
D. apprehension-oriented patrol
 208

P A R T IV
POLICE OPERATION PLANNING
 209

CHAPTER

15

POLICE PLANNING & PROGRAMMING

The task of preparing a police plan and program can not

be completed without an in-depth study and considerable
preliminary inquiry before the outlining of decision and
program of action for future implementation.

In such cases, the person to whom the responsibility

has been delegated must work out all the details completely.
All the legwork of gathering the pertinent data must be
performed, after the approach to the problem has been
carefully planned, and a line of procedure derived.

Ordinary, concise, brief, and to the point plan and

program of action should be prepared so that the end user
can conserve human and logistical requirements in
implementing the project. Such plans and programs should be
supplemented by a more detailed concept of operation and
appropriate agenda, which may be referred to in the event
further particulars, is desired.

Definition of Police Planning

It is a systematic and continuous process of preparing

a set of decision for action in the future, directed in
achieving goal by optimal means and of learning from the
outcome about the possible new sets of decision and new
goals to be achieved.

Definition of Police Programmoing

It is a plan of what is to be done or a set of

instructions outlining the steps to be performed in a
specific and operational undertaking of a police
organization.
 210

Other Definitions of Police Planning

1. The process of combining all aspects of the police

organization and the realistic anticipation of future
problems, the analysis of strategy to detail.

2. The use of rational design or pattern of all police

organization undertakings rather than relying on chance.

3. The act of determining policies and guidelines for

police activities and operations and providing controls and
safeguards for such activities and operations in the police
organization.

Purposes of Police Planning and Programming

1. It implements policy and clarifies it by defining

more precisely an immediate objective and purpose and
outlining what is to be done to achieve it.

2. A plan and program serves as a guide or reference

on both training and performance and simplifies the
direction of group members.

3. The planning and programming process gives

continued attention to the improvement of practices and
procedure.

4. A plan and program enables a check on

accomplishment thereby affecting control.

5. Wise planning and programming assures the most

effective and economical use of resources in accomplishing
organizational purpose.

Classifications of Police Planning and Programming

1. Reactive

Almost all police organizations engage at one time or

another in reactive planning and programming, that is they
develop a plan in response to crisis or when forced to do so
to implement a decisions made by some other person.
 211

2. Contingency

Contingency planning and programming envisions the

possibility that some “special incident” such as riot,
hostage situation, or major transportation disaster may
occur, and is based on the organization’s wish to be
prepared when it does occur, the plan and program often
results from the lesson learned by other organizations that
had face similar events and found that their preparation had
been inadequate.

3. Strategic

Strategic planning requires the organizations to set goals

for at least five years into the future and devise steps
that need to be taken to achieve goals.

4. Operational Efficiency

In operational efficiency planning and programming, current

processes are reviewed, and recommendations for improvements
are made. Examples of that type of planning and programming
are resource allocation studies, studies of investigative
efficiency, the examination of patrol procedures. This
planning and programming process often consist of short-
term, one-time projects, although the planning and
programming really should be conducted to be use wisely as
condition change.

Sequence of Planning and Programming Process

1. Setting Planning and Programming Goals

Normally, the first planning and programming question

is “what needs to be accomplished?” “What is the desired
future steps?” The obviousness of the answer may depend on
the kind of planning and programming being done.

2. Preparing for Planning and Programming

Successful planning and programming requires that some

ongoing planning assignment be made, someone must do the
planning and programming, although who is this may vary
 212

depending on the level or subject of planning or

programming.

3. Identifying the Problems

The first step in beginning to identify problems is to

asses the present situation, describing the current state of
affairs that may involve in scanning the environment,
performing research both inside and outside the
organization.

4. Identifying and Analyzing Alternative Solutions

Once a problem is identified, alternative courses of

action must be build-out for analysis. The planner and
programmer should consider the extent to which the different
courses of action and the criteria for judging the strength
of each course of action. In other words, once the goals are
set, different ways of reaching them must be analyzed and
asses.

Significance and Importance of Planning and Programming

The increasing complexity of police operation demands

the utmost skill and careful planning in order to ensure the
accomplishments of police objectives and missions. Planning
and programming process must be done in all police
organization regardless of size.

People Responsible in Planning and Programming Process

In organization of medium size or larger, there is a

need for a planning unit to assist the police executives in
his administrative duty of planning, and to point out to
operating personnel and to supervisor the need for plans,
and to urge their preparation and development.

In smaller organization, the responsibility for staff

planning may be given to an officer in addition to his
duties.

Planning must include the experience of the line

officers, the facts of the statistician, the opinion of the
 213

analysts, the ideas of every member of the force and the

counsel and advised of every divisions and/or offices that
may play a part in the executions of plans.

Responsibility in Planning and Programming

Police planning shall be done both within and without

the organization. The main concern of the police in external
policy planning is to assists the legislature of the city or
municipal council in determining police guidelines through
the passage of appropriate laws and ordinances and
resolutions for the police to enforce.

On the other hand, the police executive shall be

responsible for establishing internal operational policies
to achieve the objectives and missions of police
organizations.

The police executives shall be responsible for

planning, reporting, and budgeting for the police
organization within existing policies and available
resources.

For police maximum effectiveness he shall be

responsible for the technical operation of the police
organization and the management of its personnel.

Steps in Planning and Programming

1. Frame of Reference

This shall be based on a careful selection on the

matters relating to the situations in which plans are being
developed, and opinions or ideas of persons who may speak
with authority on the subject concerned.

2. Clarifying the Problems

This calls for the identification of the problem,

understanding both its record and its possible solutions.
 214

3. Collecting all Pertinent Facts

Attempts shall not be made to develop a plan until

facts relating to it have been gathered.

4. Analyzing the Facts

After all data have been gathered, a careful analysis

and evaluation shall be made.

5. Developing Alternative Plans

In the initial phases of plan development, several

alternative measures will appear to be logically comparable
to the needs of a situation.

6. Selecting the Most Appropriate Alternative

A careful consideration of all facts usually leads to

the selection of a “best” of alternative proposal.

7. Selling the Plan

A plan to be effectively carried out must be accepted

by persons concerned at the appropriate level of the plans
development.

8. Arranging for Executions of the Plan

The execution of a plan requires the issuance of orders

and directives to concerned unit or personnel, the
establishment of a schedule, and the provision of manpower
and equipment for carrying out the plans.

9. Evaluating the Effectiveness of the Plan

The results of the plan shall be determined, and this

is necessary in order to know whether correct alternative
was chosen, whether the plan was correct, which phase was
poorly implemented, and whether additional planning may be
necessary.
 215

Three Types of Police Plan According to Range

1. Short Range - 1 year

2. Medium Range - 2 years

3. Long Range - 3 years

Types of Research Useful in Making Police Plan

Fact finding research

Conclusion oriented

Decisions oriented

Action research

Job Description of Police Planner

To assist and advise the police executives in the areas

of plans and programs that are beyond the immediate
operational and tactical range; organizational and force
development, policies, doctrines and regulations,
legislative, interagency and international affairs; arms and
equipment research and development; special studies,
research projects and requirements that are needed for the
effective and efficient administration and operation of
police organization.

Mission Statement and General Functions of Police Planners

1. Formulates and supervises the executions of plans

and programs, to include organizational and force
development that are beyond the immediate operational and
tactical range.

2. Develops and monitors the implementations of

policies, doctrines and regulations in collaboration with
the other police offices.
 216

3. Liaisons with the law making body and prepare

position papers on pertinent legislative agenda.

4. Liaisons with the government and non-government

agencies and participates in joint planning activities.

5. Takes staff action on matters pertaining to

research, development, and test arms and equipment of the
police organization

6. Liaisons with the international foreign body and

staff action on foreign bilateral and multilateral matters
and international commitments.

7. Undertakes special studies and research projects

and make position papers needed for the effective and
efficient administration and operation of the police
organization.

8. Prepares accomplishments reports of the police

organizations

9. Maintain and manages the central records system of

the police organization.

10. Provides secretarial services to the police

organizations Weapons System Boards, Rules and Regulations
Boards, and other related bodies.

11. Perform other functions as may be directed by the

proper authorities.

Characteristics of Effective Police Planning

1. Clearly defined objectives and goals

2. Simplicity

3. Flexibility

4. Possibility of attainment

5. Provisions for Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)

 217

6. Economy in terms of resources needed for

implementation

7. Anticipated effect or effects on future

operations.

Objectives in the Execution of Police Plan

1. Protection of persons and properties.

2. Preservation of the peace.

3. Prevention of crime.

4. Repression or suppression of criminal activities.

5. Apprehension of criminals.

6. Enforcement of laws and ordinance.

7. Safeguarding of public health and morals.

8. Prompt execution of criminal writs processes of the

courts.

9. Coordination and cooperation with other law-enforcement

agencies.

Definition of Police Plans

The plans are the results of planning or proposal

design to guide and direct to be performed by the police
organization.

Definition of Police Programs

Are general statements of direction which is not

necessary measurable, but nonetheless expressed in an
organizations’ intent.
 218

Types of Police Plans

1. Procedural

Are those plans relating to standard operating

procedures (SOPs) and are useful as guides to personnel in
such activity as the serving and processing of search
warrant, recording and processing of crime or incident
reports, and the processing of traffic citation, these
procedural plan must be reviewed from time to time as the
need for changes arises to increase operational efficiency.

2. Tactical

Are those plans which are prepared to meet exigencies

encountered by police, such as widespread civil disorders,
unusual crime problems, civil defense needs or major
disasters, this plans are prepared considerably in advance
of expected incidents and are largely based on field
intelligence supplied by supervisory personnel and the
expertise they are able to provide in assessing future
needs.

These plans are designed to guide personnel in

controlling unusual happenings and restoring order as
quickly and as efficiently as possible. The method of
control are substantially the same as ordinary police
operations but must be expanded to meet the requirements of
each occurrence, it is necessary that such plans must be
basic, flexible in nature and adaptable to modification as
the need arises.

3. Operational

Are those designed to give guidance and direction to

personnel in the performance of the normal police
activities. Those are plans which guide the personnel in
activities as the deployment and distribution of personnel
or the search for the suspects or lost persons.

4. Auxiliary Services

Are those plans, which implement normal operation such

as in the recruitment of personnel, police community
relation activities, and the like.
 219

5. Fiscal

Are those plans which relates to those matters for

budget preparation and use and control of funds allotted for
personnel, equipment and supplies.

Procedure in Classifying Police Plans

During the preparation, a plan can have a higher

security classification, but later it can be downgraded to
enable more people to have access.

Implementation Process of Police Plans

The implementation process of police operational plan

has been described as a system of pressure and counter-
pressure akin to political maneuvering in which constant
negotiation goes on and the police executives are exercising
considerable persuasion in their attempt to obtain desire
result.

In other sense, it is simply requires good solid

management. Once a new plan or program has been designed,
attention must be directed toward the following
requirements.

1. Providing necessary resources, to include

financial, material, personnel and authority.

2. Providing direction so that employees know what to

do and why.

3. Providing control to ensure that the directions

are followed.
 220

CHAPTER

16

POLICE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

===========================================================

What is Raid

It is a special type of operation and it is an extreme

measure used when all other measures or means failed.

Definition of Police Raid

A raid must be legal, having its basis in lawful

process and conducted in a legal manner. This will be in a
form of a search warrant or warrant of arrest. The raid may
be in pursuit of a person reasonably believed to be guilty
of a felony when it is known that the felony has just been
committed.

Objectives and Purpose of a Police Raid

1. Apprehend Suspect/s

2. Secure Evidences

3. Recover Stolen Property

4. Confiscate Contraband

5. Prevent the Commission of the Crime

Factors Affecting Success or Effectiveness of a Raid

1. Size of Raiding Party

2. Speed
 221

3. Surprise

4. Superiority of Firepower’s and Equipment

5. Simplicity of Plan and Operation

Composition of Raiding Party

1. Raid Commander, Assistant Raid Commander, Covering

or Surrounding Party.

2. Going-in detail or entering party.

3. In-charge of rendering inoperative the subject’s

vehicle, if any.

4. Recorder, who should keep accurate logs of the

raid, gathers evidence, make inventories and testify in
court.

5. In-charge of the raiding vehicle.

6. Photographer.

Duties of Covering Party

1. Covers approach of going-in detail or entering party.

2. Prevents the escape of criminals.

3. Covers the entire area of the building.

4. Neutralizing fire of barricaded criminals.

Duties of Going-In Detail or Entering Party

1. Calls for surrender of criminals.

2. Effects arrests.

3. Incapacities and dislodges criminals.

 222

4. Searches for evidence.

Factors to be Considered in Planning a Raid

1. The terrain and building should be subjected to close

study.

2. In order to obtain the necessary data for planning, a

reconnaissance/surveillance of the place should be
conducted.

3. The participants should be informed of the nature of

the mission.

4. The specific assignment and position of each member of

the raiding party, the tactics to be employed, the equipment
and transportation to be used, the evaluation of possible
danger points; and the optimum time to be selected should be
stressed.

Things to be Considered in Planning a Raid

1. Need for surveillance.

2. Number of individual to be apprehended. Are they armed?

With what? If uncertain, assumed they are armed.

3. Are photographs and description of subjects available

for use in the briefing?

3. Determine the physical structure of the place where the

criminals are located.

4. Determine all the possible routes.

5. Need to discreetly photograph the place and immediate

area.

6. Type of neighborhood where the hideout is located.

 223

7. Volume and kind of activities in the neighborhood at

various times to determine the most desirable time to
conduct the raid.

8. Street plans of neighborhood for possible roadblocks.

9. Do the men have confidence in the ability of the raid

leader.

10. Consider the 5S’s affecting the success or

effectiveness of a raid.

11. Consider the composition of the raiding party.

12. Does every member of the raiding groups know the raid
plan completely, and the identities and duties of
individuals?

13. What is your move-out plan?

14. What are the instructions concerning the use of

firearms?

15. What are the instructions concerning the possible

handling of traffic?

16. What are the instruction concerning communications, and

signals, etc?

17. How do you identify each other, armbands, passwords,

and insignia, etc?

18. Make sure your plan avoid crossfire.

19. Do you have all the equipment you might need, such as
flashlights, searchlights, vehicle, transceivers,
loudspeakers or megaphone, firearms, teargas, etc?

20. Ask each participant to repeat his duties to the raid

leader.
 224

Principles of Raid Operation

1. Coordination of individual effort is an essential

element in the success of raid.

2. The raiding party should act as a team.

3. The members of the team should hold his assigned

position until orders given by the team leader.

4. The members of the team should thoroughly understand

the objectives, the plan of actions and the orders.

5. Before leaving the headquarters to proceed to the

target, the team leader must conduct a final briefing of
personnel.

6. After assembly of the men at the designated area which

should not too be close to the target area, they should not
assume the appearance of a formal gathering.

7. The raider’s vehicle should be safeguarded to prevent

use by the subject/s and/or targets/s.

8. Vehicles belonging to the subjects should be rendered

inoperative by the simplest available means.

9. A cordon should be posted, depending upon the

availability of men, to prevent possible escape, and
restrain people from wandering.

10. In the event the suspect/s fails to heed the warning to

surrender, entry must be made through one point so that
raiders will not mistake one another.

11. As soon as the raid is completed, guards should be left

to protect the property and to observe or apprehend
associates of the suspect.

12. The raiders then reassemble at a designated place for

final accounting of all the members of the team.
 225

Coordination with Local Police Units

It is imperative that immediately before the service of

a search warrant or warrant of arrest, the team leader
should see to it that proper coordination is made with local
police executive having jurisdiction over the target
premises. The coordinating party is bound merely to relay
that their team is conducting an operation in the area. This
gesture of coordination is not only a manifestation of
courtesy, but also a measure to avoid the possibility of a
mistake encounter.

Dont’s in a Raid

1. Don’t take unnecessary chances.

2. Don’t underestimate the ability or courage of the

subject/s.

3. Don’t raid when not properly prepared.

4. Don’t endanger the lives of by-standers and innocent

people.

5. Don’t use raiders who are not well acquainted with each
other.

6. Don’t forget gas masks when employing tear gas.

7. Don’t be unnecessarily rough on the subject/s.

8. Don’t shoot to kill unless very imperative.

9. Don’t touch the evidence unless seen by witness, or by

the owner or occupants of the place.

What are the Things to be Seized at the Scene of the Raid

1. Weapons which may be used against the raiding party.

2. Articles that might be used as means of suicide.

3. Articles that might be used in escaping.

 226

4. Articles that might be used in the commission of a

crime.

5. Proceeds or fruits of the crime.

Disposition of Money and Valuable Property During Raid

1. Money should be counted and the serial number of bills

noted.

2. Valuables should be sealed in a property envelope in

the presence of the owner.

3. Property envelope should show a complete inventory of

its contents.

4. The owner should initial the outside of the envelope

showing approval of its contents.

5. Raiding officers should sign their names on the outer

part of the envelope.

6. A receipt should be given to the owner of the premises.

However, this is qualified by the decisions of the Supreme
Court declaring as inadmissible in evidence the receipt for
property seized signed by the accused in cases where mere
possession of the items seized is punishable.

Disposition of Articles not Covered with Search Warrant

1. If the articles are illicit or contraband, the same

must be seized.

2. Such articles may be used as evidence to prosecute the

person.

3. Non-contraband articles must be returned to the owners

or must not be seized in the first place.
 227

Duty of Arresting Officers

Arresting units shall at all times take the mug-shots,

modus operandi through the conduct of criminal
interrogation, and fingerprints of all arrested persons for
master file and rouges gallery.

Definition of Search

Search is an examination of an individual person, house

or effects, or other buildings and premises to discover
contrabands or some evidence of guilt to be used in the
prosecution of a criminal action.

What are the Things to be Search

1. Property subject of the offense.

2. Property stolen or embezzled and other proceeds or

fruits of the crime.

3. Property used or intended to be used for committing an

offense.

May Things Illegally Seized be Admitted as Evidence

The fruit of an illegal search are inadmissible as

evidence. Any evidence obtained in violation of the rights
of the people against unlawful searches and seizures shall
be inadmissible for any purpose in any proceedings.

May Articles not Mentioned in the Search Warrant be Seized

Generally, articles not included in the search warrant

may not be seized. However, articles prohibited by statutes,
although not included in the search warrant, may be seized.
Thus, during the progress of a bonafide search for other
commodities illegally possesses, whether with search warrant
or not, contrabands or items declared illegal per se are
discovered, the contraband can be seized. The seizure of
 228

goods wherein the possession of which is forbidden by

statutes violates no constitutional rights.

How to Serve a Search Warrant

A Search Warrant must be served within 10 (ten) days

from its date, and in the following manner:

1. The police officer concerned must go to the place

indicated in the search warrant and take the things
described therein, in the presence of at least one (1)
competent witness who is a resident of the same
neighborhood.

2. The search must be made at daytime, unless

otherwise stated.

3. The officer seizing the property must issue a

detailed receipt of the things seized to the persons whose
possessions it was found, or in the absence of such person,
he must, in the presence of at least one (1) witness, leave
such receipt in the place where such things were seized.

4. As much as possible, during the opening of safes,

drawers, cabinets, tables, etc., the lifting of articles
should be done by the owner of the house or his
representative, or by immediate members of his family to
preclude any suspicion of planting evidence.

5. Thereafter, the officer must immediately deliver

things or property seized to the judge who issued the search
warrant together with an inventory duly verified under oath.

Lawful Warrantless Search

1. When there is consent or waiver.

2. When evidence to be seized is in “plain view”.

3. Customs search or searches made at airports and or

seaports in order to collect duties.
 229

4. Search of moving vehicles may be made without warrant

because it would be impracticable to secure a warrant before
engaging in “hot pursuit”.

5. Routine searches made at or in the interest of national

security such as boarder checks and/ or checkpoints.

6. Stop-and-search or stop-and-frisk, where the search

precedes the arrest, and is allowed on grounds of reasonable
suspicion.

7. Search incidental to lawful arrest

Search of Persons Arrested

1. “Probe,” do not “pat”, a female operatives should be

used to search female suspects.

2. The need to handcuff the subjects.

3. Do not stop the search when weapon is found.

4. Look for prohibited items or evidences.

5. Look for items which may be used to commit suicides.

6. Searches should never cross the line of fire.

7. Do not talk to the suspect while in the course of

search.

8. Do not grant subject’s request to attend something

before, during or immediately after the search.

9. In a search by a single officer, have the gun ready

with the gun at a distance from the subject.

10. Be sure to search every part of the body and clothing.

Types of Search
 230

1. Wall Search

The purpose is to place the subject in an “off-balance”

position requiring the use of both arms and legs to keep him
from falling to the ground. This is the safest type of
search. It does not necessarily require a wall; any object
that can support the weight of the subject can be used. The
procedures are:

1) Require the subject to place both hands on the

wall slightly higher than his waist. Spread hands as far as
possible. Palms should be placed against the wall, finger
extended.

2) Extend the subject’s feet back away from the wall.

Spread them as far as possible, toes pointed out. Buttocks
should not be on an arch position.

3) The subject’s head should be down or bowed at all

times.

4) Follow the hereunder mechanics in executing the

“Wall Search”.

a. If there is only one (1) subject, the leader

of the searching team should placed himself at one side,
while his subordinate is on the other side.

b. To search the other side, the subordinate

should move to the opposite side.

c. If there are two (2) or three (3) subjects,

move one subject to be search on the wall, but out of reach
of the others.

d. Search both sides of subject, the leader

conducting the searches and the subordinate guarding the
other subject.

e. Move one (1) subject at a time.

f. The subordinate should concentrate on the

actions of the subject and not on the action of the leader.
 231

g. When there are more than three (3) subjects,

additional personnel should be summoned.

h. In serious apprehensions, the searcher should

hold his weapon in ready position all throughout the search.

i. The body must be search systematically with

the foot of the researcher place tightly against the
subject’s foot, right with right, left with left, anklebone
against anklebone.

g. Remove any object found, then examine the

palm of the hand, including between the fingers.

2. Standing Search

1) Raise subject’s hand over his head and spread the

feet as far as possible.

2) This is not recommended because the subject is an

“on balance” position.

3. Kneeling Search

1) Subject kneels on the ground with hand raised over

his head.

2) This is also being discouraged for the same reason

as the “standing search.”

4. Prone Search

1) Subject lies on his stomach with arms and legs

outstretched.

2) Subject has both arms and legs free, and is at all

times in an “on-balance” position.

3) Front part of the clothing cannot be searched.

4) This can be extremely dangerous if the subject has

knowledge of judo.

Arrest Defined
 232

Arrest is the taking of person into custody of the law

in order that he may be duty bound to answer for the
commission of an offense.

Who are Exempted from Arrest

1. Senators or Members of the House of Representatives,

while the Congress is in session in all offenses punishable
by not more than six (6) years imprisonment.

2. Diplomatic officials and their domestics.

Techniques in Making Arrest

1. Initial Contact with the Subject

1) Police officer identifies in a clear and audible

voice.

2) Show identification.

3) Inform the subject that he is under arrest, and

immediately narrate the subject’s constitutional rights.

4) Consider the possibility that the subject is

wanted for other crimes.

2. Conduct of Arresting Officer

1) Be natural and pleasant but forceful and

aggressive.

2) Dominate the situation.

3) Voice must have command authority.

4) Demand prompt and absolute obedience.

5) Nervousness should be controlled.

6) Avoid profanity, this reflects personality

weakness.
 233

7) Avoid acting “tough” as the subject will be the

first to detect it.

8) Avoid being reticent or apologetic.

9) Avoid unnecessary conversation.

10) Officer-in-charge does the talking and gives the

command.

Police Officer Making the Arrest

1. Use good judgment in connection with the arrest.

2. Assume that the subject is armed and will take your

life if given an opportunity.

Procedures of Arrest on the Street

1. This should be made from the side or rear when

possible.

2. Subject should be forced toward a building.

3. Avoid congested areas when possible.

Procedures of Arrest at Home, Office, or Business

Establishment

1. Restricts the subject’s movement. Do not grant request

for personal privileges before being searched.

2. Clothing and other things requested should be examined

for weapons or items of evidence before turning them over
the suspects.

Medical Examinations of Arrested Persons

 234

Immediately after the arrest of a person ordered

arrested by the court, or a suspect under investigation, he
should be subjected to a medical examination. Prior to his
release or any change of custody, the suspect should also be
medically examine by a medico-legal officer or, in the
absence of such medico-legal officer, by any government
physician in the area.

General Rules in the Conduct of Police Operations

1. Under all circumstances, the use of force,

including firearms, is justifiable only by virtue of the
Doctrines of Self-Defense and Defense of Strangers. As
stated by the Supreme Court, nobody, including the police
and even the military, is above, but subject to the law.

2. The use of force, especially firearms, shall be

applied only as last resort, when all other peaceful and
non-violent means have been exhausted.

3. Whenever resulted to, only necessary and

reasonable force sufficient to conduct self-defense, defense
of a stranger and/or subdue/overcome the clear and imminent
danger posse or resistance being put up by a malefactor or
group shall be applied.

4. In case of actual shoot-out with the suspect,

panic firing shall be avoided. Panic firing is opening fire
and everyone else follows suit. The police officer in-charge
of the operation shall see to it that he exercises control
over his men and that they shall fire only when necessary.

5. The police officer shall ensure that no innocent

bystanders are hit. Hence, extreme caution shall be observed
when firing in congested areas. Here the practical rules of
shooting only to save life could well be applied.

6. After shoot-out, the police officer shall check

whether the suspect is still alive or has been neutralized.
In case the suspect has been wounded and disabled, he shall
be brought with adequate security to the nearest hospital
for medical treatment.
 235

7. The police siren and megaphone shall be used to

influence/warn the offenders/suspects to stop and peacefully
give up.

8. The use of force specially firearms, shall be

tempered with such considerations as keeping foremost in the
law enforcers mind the safety of the hostage, avoiding
crossfire casualties and preventing collateral damages to
third parties. Reasonable force to neutralize the vehicle
and enemy/suspect’s resistance is sufficient.

9. In case of an unavoidable engagement with the

criminal elements, immediate removal of the casualties from
the crime scene shall be undertaken after the necessary
sketches, pictures and other investigative requirements are
accomplished. The victim bodies shall always be segregated
from those of the suspects. All SOPs of crime scene
investigation shall be strictly followed.

10. Human Rights shall be strictly observed and

respected at all times.

Special Rules in Arrest

1. All arrest shall be effected pursuant to Rule 113

of the Rules on Criminal Procedures, as amended.

2. Warrant of Arrest shall remain effective until the

accused/respondent is arrested or the case against him is
terminated. It shall also cease to be effective upon
released of the accused on bail.

3. If the accused/respondents is not arrested within

ten (10) days from receipt of the warrant of arrest of the
office, unit or station concerned thru the service thereof,
a report shall be submitted to the court of origin within
ten (10) days following the expiration of the original ten-
day validity. In this case, only a xerox copy of the warrant
shall be attached to the report and the original shall be
retained by the office, unit or station to whom it was
delivered for execution. The unexecuted original copy of the
warrant may be xeroxed and furnished other law enforcement
agencies, in the area where the accused/respondents may be
found.
 236

4. A peace officer or a private person may arrest a

person without warrant when in his presence the person to be
arrested has committed, is actually committing, or is about
to commit an offense; or he has personal knowledge of the
facts indicating that the person to be arrested is the one
who has committed the offense, or is a prisoner who has
escaped from penal establishment or place where he is
serving final judgement or temporarily confined while his
case is pending or has escaped while being transferred from
one confinement or another. In all these instances, the
person making the arrest shall observe strict compliance
with the rules of arrest; and with due regards to the
dignity and rights of the individual to be arrested. The
said arrest of any person without warrant shall be disclosed
to a barangay officials or persons of known probity and
integrity in the community before he is taken into the
custody. The person arrested without warrant shall be
forthwith delivered to the nearest police station or jail,
and he shall be proceeded against in accordance with law.

5. In all instances of arrest, the arresting peace

officer or private person shall inform the person to be
arrested of the intention to arrest him, and the cause for
the arrest, unless the person to be arrested is then engaged
in the commission of an offense or is pursued immediately
after its commission or after an escape or flees or forcibly
resists before the officer or the person making the arrest
has opportunity to inform him, or when the giving of such
information will imperil the arrest.

6. In the case of motorized suspect to be arrested,

the siren and megaphone shall be used to warn the occupants
to park their vehicle and give-up peacefully. The arresting
officer shall approach the person on foot with proper back-
up from his companions. The driver and other suspects shall
be requested to get out of the car with both hands visible
to the apprehending officer. If the situation warrants the
arrest, the apprehended suspects shall be brought to the
police station for further investigation.

Rules on Search and Seizures

1. The general rule is that a search and seizure must

be carried through with a judicial warrant, otherwise such
 237

search and seizure become unreasonable and things seized in

violation of this rule, shall be inadmissible for any
purpose in any proceeding.

2. Where the arrest of the accused is lawful, having

been caught in flagrante delicto, there is no need for a
warrant for the seizure of the fruit of the crime as well as
for the body search upon him, the same being incidental to
lawful arrest.

3. The warrantless search and seizure as an

incidental to a suspect’s lawful arrest may extend beyond
the person arrested, to include the premises or surroundings
under his immediate control.

Rules on Check/Choke Points

1. Only mobile checkpoints are authorized and they

shall be established only in conjunction with on-going
operations/situations, or when there is a need to arrest a
criminal or fugitive from justice. The conduct of searches
and arrest in said checkpoints shall be done with civility
and with due regard to the innocent passersby and commuters.
The area where the checkpoints are established shall
properly lighted, eligible and clear signs shall be
exhibited to show that the searches are being conducted.
Enforcement officers shall at all times in uniform with
their identification cards and nameplates on. The unit
manning checkpoint shall always be led by an officer with
the rank of at least inspector. Strictly there shall be no
mulcting, extortion or harassment of drivers, passengers,
traders, etc.

2. In the event checkpoints/roadblocks are ignored

and the motorist/suspects bumped the roadblocks in an
attempt to elude arrest or avoid inspections, the team
leader shall automatically contact the adjacent units to
inform them of the incident, and request them to set
roadblocks, if necessary and conduct pursuit operation of
the fleeing motorist. Warning shot is not encourage due to
the confusion it can create to the driver/passengers of the
vehicles. Megaphone or police siren shall be used instead of
warning shots. Notation of the plate number is a must
 238

because the occupants of the vehicles may possibly elude the

pursuit operation.

3. In the event the occupants of the vehicle fire

towards the personnel manning the checkpoints, overkill
tendencies shall be avoided to avoid tragic and embarrassing
situations which may adversely affect the police
organization and the government, and in the process, reduced
the people’s trust and confidence. Reasonable force to
immobilize the vehicle and-or neutralize the suspect’s
resistance shall be sufficient

Planning Unlawful Assembly/Civil Disturbance Operations

Civil unrest seems to be indigenous to civilization,

although there are times when it is apparent in isolated
situations or among small numbers of people. Laborers,
students, and cause-oriented groups have been most prominent
and dramatic in their efforts to effect immediate changes in
the social practices and standards. They conduct
demonstration, sit-ins, teaching, and non-violent civil
disobedience, which usually begins as non-destructive
incidents but sometimes end in violence and bitter combat.
Some movements include mass criminal conspiracies for the
purpose of interfering with lawful processes. Other produce
spontaneous riotous outburst arising out of ostensibly
peaceful assembly.

The continually recurring conditions of civil unrest

and lawlessness throughout the country make it appears that
it is possible for a major disturbance to occur and at any
time and when there are enough people for a quorum. Given
the right combination of factors, any situation involving
large numbers of people may evolve or explode into an
unlawful assembly. Without immediate decisive police action,
the situation could quickly evolve into a full-scale riot.

Indicators of Unlawful Assembly

1. An increase in the recurrence of the same rumor,

or the sensationalism of rumors of similar design, such as
 239

alleged police abuse, and lost of trust and confidence on

the government.

2. An increase in threatening or insulting signs or

pamphlets in commercial or other public places.

3. An increase in number of incidents of violence or

threats of violence.

4. Disturbances at various locations that appear to

be a similar nature as if designed to test the capabilities
of the police organization or the decisiveness of the
officer-in-charge of an institution such as school, as a
prelude to more serious action later.

5. More than the usual number of disturbance at

places of entertainment or sporting events.

6. Factional gang fighting or warfare or a series of

raids on parties and places of peaceful congregation.

7. Threats and attacks on private property.

8. An increasing need for the use of force in

effecting the arrest, as though there were a planned effort
to “bait” the police.

9. An accompanying increase in the number of

complaints about abusive practices of the police and/or the
government, and the continuing claim that such complaint is
receiving no satisfactory action.

10. Public name-calling and a general attitude of

contempt and disrespect to police officers.

Police Purpose and Objectives During Unlawful Assembly

1. Containment

2. Arrest of Violators

3. Dispersal

4. Re-entry Must be Prevented

 240

5. Established Priorities

Stages in the Formation of Unlawful Assembly

1. Stage 1-First Stage

At this stage the crowd is still functioning as a

conglomeration of individuals.

2. Stage 2-Second Stage

In the second stage, the crowd members lose their

individuality and begin to function as a single unit.

3. Stage 3-Third Stage

By now the mob is functioning as a single unit and its

leaders are in control, any event is likely to precipitate
to violent action or the riot is just waiting to happen.

Procedures in Handling Unlawful Assembly

1. Assess the Situation

2. Communicate

3. Establish a Command Center

4. Take Immediate Action

5. Give the Dispersal Order

Procedures During Dispersal

1. Assign witness at strategic locations who can

testify that they heard the issuance of dispersal order.

2. Order the crowd to disperse.

3. Order all the members of the Civil Disturbance

Management (CDM) contingent to stand ready, guarding the
 241

perimeter, but making it possible for the people to leave as

directed.

4. Expedite the departure of the people who are

commanded to disperse.

5. Repeat the order at least three (3) times so that

many people as possible can hear the giving of dispersal
order.

6. Wait until the expiration of the time limit.

7. At the end of the time limit, arrest the

offenders.

Duties of Police Officers During Strikes and Lock-Outs

1. The key to effective police action at the scene of

a labor management dispute is to be completely fair and
objective.

2. It is not the police role to assume that either

side is right or wrong.

3. The police responsibility is to establish contact

with both the company being struck and the leader of the
strikers and to point out that the police role is to enforce
the law and to protect life and property.

4. Ask for the cooperation of all the parties of both

sides of the dispute.

5. The police concern is compliance with the laws and

protection of the people from personal injury or property
damage.

6. When working at the scene of a strike, provide for

the free flow of pedestrian and vehicle traffic on the
streets, the driveways, and the sidewalks.

7. Handle the matter in such a way that it does not

indicate any alliance or sympathy with either side of the
dispute.
 242

8. Arrest should be made to flagrant violators.

9. Take all necessary information and prepare a

complete report.

10. Worked out for a more appropriate course of action

to resolve matters away of the picket line.

Rules on Unlawful Assembly/Civil Disturbance Management

1. The pertinent provisions of the Public Assembly

Act of 1985, Batas Pambansa Blg. 880, the Labor Code of the
Philippines, as amended, and other applicable laws, shall be
observed during rallies, strikes, demonstration or other
public assemblies.

2. Accordingly, law enforcement agents shall at all

times exercise maximum tolerance.

3. Police officers must be in full uniform with their

identification cards and nameplates on.

4. No excessive reasonable force shall be employed on

such occasions as to maim or wound individuals.

5. Only such forces as may be necessary to prevent or

repel an aggression may be used and only as last resort.

6. Employment of teargas, smoke grenades and water

cannon shall be made under proper advisement and command of
a responsible or superior officer, and must be resorted only
when there is a clear imminent danger to loss of lives and
deliberate destruction’s of properties.

7. No arrest of any leader, organizer or participants

shall be made during public assemblies unless he violates
any of the above mentioned laws, the Revised Penal Code or
any Special Laws.

8. Police assistance when requested must be limited

to protection of lives and properties, and the members of
the law enforcer contingent must bear no firearm, they must
be equipped only with riot sticks, shields, crash helmets
with visor and boots.
 243

9. No public assembly with permit shall be dispersed

except when it becomes violent. At first sign of impending
violence, the Ground Commander shall call the leader/s for
dialogue to prevent possible disturbance.

10. During actual violence, audible warning for

dispersal by the ranking officer must be made, and if after
allowing reasonable lapse of time, operations must be
pursued using such force as may be necessary and reasonable
to prevent or repel an aggression.

Basic Formations During Civil Disturbance Management

Operation

1. Box Formation

It is being used in providing VIP security coverage.

2. “U” Formation

Also being used for VIP security coverage.

3. Line Formation

Basic formation during actual confrontation with the

crowd.

4. Double Line Formation

Formation used during defensive dispersal of the crowd.

5. Arrow Formation

Formation during aggressive dispersal of the crowd.

6. Wedge Formation

Formation during the dispersal of a large number of

crowd.

7. “T” Formation
 244

Also a basic formation in providing VIP security during

negotiations with unruly crowd.

Disaster Identification Problems

When disaster occurs, a tremendous responsibility is

immediately vested on the law enforcement officer to perform
many tasks. A disaster is usually a situation that strikes
suddenly and is totally unexpected. It consists of a single
events or a series of events that may be brought by the
work of the elements of nature or through some man-made
accident.

Disaster Defined

A great natural catastrophe or an extraordinary

accident which plunges scores of people into helpless and
suffering, and it will cause for unusual and superhuman
police activity.

Types of Disasters

1. Fires

2. Explosions

3. Floods

4. Volcanic Eruptions

5. Transportation Accidents

Organization of Disaster Identification Team

1. Who is in charge? When several agencies agree to

work together they may also agree to these questions.
 245

2. Expert assistance is required. Other helps will be

needed, the number and type of persons depending on the
magnitude of each problem. Expert assistance may be required
in a number of fields, including morticians, doctors,
dentists, pathologist, and identification specialists who
shall be able to employ special fingerprint techniques.

Important During Recovery of Body

1. Special equipment. In the rescue process, special

equipment, such as bulldozers, cranes, etc. may be needed to
recover the dead.

2. Record the location of the body. When a victim is

found, the exact place of recovery should be indicated and
the body tagged and numbered.

3. Body Tag Number. Fingerprint card must correspond

to the tag number of the body from which the prints are
taken.

4. Personal effects should be placed in a container

and properly identified as to place of recovery and body
number, and kept it with the body. If there is any question
concerning them, they should be handled as a separate item.

Considerations in a Centralized Morgue

1. Litters and body covers, cadaver bag, blanket or a

sheet needed.

2. Location and size of morgue. The morgue should be

readily accessible to the scene of the disaster and be able
to accommodate a large number of persons who will later
require access.

3. The master numerical log should be established

upon arrival of the body at the morgue.

Procedures During Preliminary Body Examination

 246

1. Physical Characteristics. Teeth for dental works,

operation and other scars, deformed legs, arms or fingers,
amputations, color of hair and eyes, race, approximate
height and weight, age, tattoos and any other identifying
characteristics. Jewelry and pocketbooks contents are most
important.

2. Fingerprinting. The most positive reliable and

infallible means of identification is through
fingerprinting.

3. Jewelry and pocket contents help in the

identification of victims.

4. Clothing also helps in the identification of

victims.

Procedures During Morgue Administration

1. Preservation of remains.

2. Body segregation.

3. Body Case File. It involves description of body

and clothing, fingerprint cards, list of personal effects,
photographs taken, dental chart and detailed results of
medico-legal or autopsy examination.

4. Missing Person Case File. Compare this with the

body case file.

Establishing Positive Identity

1. Comparison of missing person date with recorded

body observations.

2. Death certificate and release of body. Authorities

should be most reluctant to issue death certificates until
all doubts have been resolved.

Disaster Control Procedures

 247

1. Identify the nature and extent of the problem.

2. Communicate your information by radio immediately

3. Administer urgently needed first aid and other rescue

activities.

4. Establish command post with communication.

5. Contain the area.

6. Maintain open emergency lane.

7. Evacuate survivors and other persons in the area whose

lives are in jeopardy.

8. Provide public information services

9. Provide for coordination with other agencies.

10. Arrange for access into the area by authorized people

only.

11. Records the event.

Police VIP Protection Activities

It is a police activity of providing overt and covert

security coverage out of ensuring the security of the lives
and limbs of a person authorized by the law to be protected.

Definition of VIP

It is a person who, because of his sensitive position

is accorded with special protection for his personal safety.

What is Buffer Security

 248

They are security personnel who are deployed between

the subject and the audience.

What is a Buffer Zone

It is an area which separate the VIP from the attacking

audience.

What is an Advance Party

A group of protective personnel to conduct necessary

survey inspections and coordination prior to the arrival of
the VIP.

Modus Operandi of Assassins

1. Close range attack with the use of knife or gun.

2. Use of explosives.

3. Use of a weapon from a distance.

4. Use of automatic weapons, warfare materials and poison

gas.

5. Kidnapping.

6. Crossing thru with the use of vehicle.

Rings of VIP Physical Security

1. 1st Ring - Foot and Mobile Patrol

2. 2nd Ring - Fixed Post

3. 3rd Ring - Close-in Security

Protective Security Procedures

 249

1. The formation regardless of number provides 360

degrees of coverage.

2. The formations always move with principal when he

is outside secured area.

3. As a general rule, agent must be in walking

formation.

4. The type of formation employed will be dependent

on the manpower availability and threats to the detail.

5. The aid remain closest to the principal as his

primary duty is to provide body cover should an attack
occur.

6. Because formation must be flexible, agents must be

prepared to assume vacant position in the formation or
change of formation to maintain 360 degrees concept.

7. When walking in crowds, agents should keep on mind

the expose parts of the principal’s body, the protection of
their weapons, and the importance of watching the hands of
persons in the crowd.

8. When walking with the principal, agents should not

be looking directly with the principal, but looking outward
to watch the crowd and nearby surrounding for possible
attack.

Reactions to Hostile Crowd

1. Do not let the crowd deter you from your

protective task.

2. Thrown objects should be batted down and put in

the place away from the principal.

3. If a suspicious person is seen in the crowd but no

firm indication of intent to harm the principal, the agent
should stand between the individual and the principal until
the principal has pass safely.
 250

4. If the crowd is too large and surrounds the

principal, the formation can go into defensive circle to
move the principal safely through it.

5. Provide close-in security to the principal and

evacuate to safe haven if necessary.
 251

CHAPTER

17

TACTICS OF THE TERRORISTS

===========================================================

Definition of Terrorism

Violence for effect...not...primarily, and sometimes

not all for the physical effect on the actual target, but
rather for its dramatic impact in an audience.

The calculated use of violence or the threat of

violence to attain goals, often political or ideological in
nature, through instilling fear, intimidation or coercion.

Is violent criminal behavior designed to generate fear

in the community, or substantial segments of it, for
political purpose.

Three Broad Categories of Terrorists

1. Crazies

Mentally ill people who will commit terrorist acts

during a period of psychiatric disturbance.

2. Criminals

People who commit terrorist acts for personal rather

than ideological gain.

3. Crusaders

Ideologically inspired individuals or groups...the

political terrorists.
 252

Common Tactics of the Terrorists

1. Bombing

The tactic common to most terror groups-the bomb is a

popular weapon it is cheap to produce, easy to make, has
variable uses, and is difficult to detect and trace after
the event.

2. Hoaxes

Whatever the type IED, the terrorist will often use it

merely to establish credibility, and to show that they mean
business. Once their credibility has been established they
continue to disrupt, though not to destroy by using well
made and placed hoax bombs. The right proportions of hoaxes
with live IED can keep security forces tied up guessing for
a long time.

3. Arson

Although not popular tactic among terrorists, arson has

been used to destroy and disrupt such targets as public
utilities, political headquarters, and more commonly;
economic industrial targets such as shops, factories and
hotels.

4. Hijacking

In any kind of continuing terrorist activity, the

hijacking of vehicles can and should be associated with, and
often gives indications of some future atrocities.
Additionally, hijacked “legitimate” vehicles give the
terrorist an easy means to approach or gain to a closed
government facility.

5. Ambush

It is the fact that the terrorist can choose his own

time and place of operation and, if his intended victim
continually uses the same route, the terrorist can conduct
countless dry rehearsals before actually moving in for the
kill.
 253

6. Kidnapping

Kidnap for Ransom accounts about 8% of the terrorist

incidents, and must still be viewed as a serious option open
to terrorist groups.

7. Hostage Taking

The difference between the kidnapping and hostage

taking is extremely fine in the world of terrorism. However,
the kidnapper would normally regarded as someone who
confines his victim in secret hideaway and makes material
demands, whereas the hostage taker will confront authorities
and openly hold their victim for ransom or some other
reasons.

8. Assassination

It is perhaps the oldest of all terrorist tactics in

the book, and still widely used today.

Description of IEDs

The appearance of IED is up to the imagination of the

bomber. First and foremost, it is an object, regardless its
disguise, that isn’t suppose to be. The kicker to this
statement is “how do I know what is or isn’t supposes to be
where it is?”. There is no grand or perfect answer to this
one.

However, the best man and most effective mechanism is

“you and your alertness”. Who else would be a better idea of
what is or isn’t a suspicious item or situation in your
area. Through a constant sense of awareness, you and the
people who live and work in your particular areas are the
only true defense that exists. The point is “if you think it
doesn’t belong in your area, it probably doesn’t, and if it
is suspicious-do something about it”.
 254

External Appearances of an IEDs

1. Pipe Bomb

Steel or PVC pipe section with end caps in just about

any configuration external fusing as a wick or
clock/battery.

2. Briefcase/Boxes

Any style, color, size including what appears to be

discarded quick food containers. Some may even be as small
as a cigarette package.

3. Postal Service Mail

Especially if the address is screwed up or the return

address/postmark is strange, unexpected or missing. Rigged
envelopes can be a clue to explosive contents.

4. Automobiles/Trucks

By far the most devastating and probably one of the

easiest to plant. Indicator may include strange license
tags, inappropriate decals, or just an unfamiliar car parked
in your area. The bomb can be implanted anywhere in the
vehicle including behind the seats, in the trunk or gasoline
tank.

5. Existing Objects

Those items which seem to have a purpose but could be

substituted or used as a bomb container.

Sub-Classifications of IEDs

1. Delivery

The method of getting the bomb to its objectives

include, but are not limited to the following.
 255

1) Vehicle Bombs

These are vehicles filled with explosive which

made by booby-trapped, or remotely detonated.

2) Laid Charges

These are devices that are put into place by the

terrorist hands.

3) Projected Bombs

These are bombs thrown by hand or some type of

projection device such as Mortar.

4) Postal Bombs

These are devices sent through the mails as

letters or packages.

2. Activation

There are essentially three (3) ways to activate IED:

1) Command Activation

This is done by radio signals, electric leads,

pull wires and/or strikers to name a few.

2) Target Action

These can be activated by the target tripping a

wire, stepping on a pressure device, turning on light, etc.

3) Time Delay

Such activators are clock mechanisms, burning

fuses, chemical delays, atmosphere pressures, etc.

3. Usage

There are two (2) broad categories pertaining to usage:

1) Tactical IEDs
 256

These are normally regarded as being those used

against an individual and can include mail bombs, clamor
devices, culvert bombs, in fact any IEDs can be categorized
as a tactical IEDs.

2) Strategic IEDs

These are considered to be those used

indiscriminately to gain world attention; for example, in
crowded airports, shopping centers, on aircraft and so on.
 257

CHAPTER

18

CRIME STATISTICS
===========================================================

Crime Statistics

It is a science, which deals with the collection,

interpretation, analysis and presentation of quantitative
crime data useful in police operational activities.

Definition of Index Crimes

Are those serious crimes that are readily reported and

that occur with sufficient regularity and frequency so as to
be used as an index of the actual level of criminality,
i.e., murder, homicide, rape, physical injuries, parricide,
robbery, and theft.

Definition of Non-Index Crimes

Are those crimes not falling under the index crimes.

Indictable Crimes

All cases that are defined and penalized under the

Revised Penal Code and Special Laws.

Non-Indictable Crimes

Cases not defined and penalized under the Revised Penal

Code and Special Laws.
 258

Total Crime Volume

Number of crimes committed in a given area over a

period of time. If refers to the total number of crime
incidents reported or brought to the attention of law
enforcement agencies.

Population Density (PD)

The number of inhabitants per unit geographical area.

Formula: PD = No. of Inhabitants

100,000
Where : 240,100 inhabitants as example
= 240,100
100,000
PD = 24.01

Crime Density (CD)

The number of crimes for every 100,000 population in a

given period of time.

It is obtained by dividing the Total Crime Volume (TCV)

by the population density.

Formula: CD = TCV
PD

Where: TCV = 404

PD = 24.01

= 404
24.01

CD = 16.83

Note:

This means that 16.83 incidents transpired for every

100,000 population in a given period.
 259

Weekly Crime Rate

Is the frequency of crime occurrence by weekly for

every 100,000 population during a given period of time. It
is obtained by dividing Crime Density (CD) by the number of
weeks in a given period.

Formula: WCR = Crime Density (CD)

Period of Time

Where CD = 16.83

PT = 12 weeks

16.83
12

WCR = 1.40

Note:

This means that 1.40 incidents transpired for every

100,000 population in a week.

Crime Solution Efficiency

Is the batting average of a law enforcement agency in

the solution of crime. It is obtained by dividing the Number
of Crimes Solved by the Number of Crimes Reported (NCR) for
a given period multiplying the dividend by 100.

Formula CSE = NCS

____ X 100

NCR

Where NSC = 9

NCR = 10

9
___ X 100
10
 260

= 0.9 x 100

CSE = 90%

Note:

The crime is considered solved if the case has already

been filed in court.

Frequency of Crime

Is the frequency of occurrence of a particular crime

incident committed in a given area over a period of time, it
is also similarly known as Crime Clock.

Formula: FC = Total No. of Days

Total No. of Incident

Example: = Period Covered: 01 Jan-15 Nov 99

1. No. of Days = 318

2. No. of Murder Case = 107

= 318
107

= 2.97

Note:

Two represents the days, to get the number of hours, .

97 will be multiplied by 24 hours, hence .97 x 24 = 23.28,
now 23 represent the number of hours.

Then .28 will be multiplied by 60 minutes, .28 x 60 =

16.8, now 16 represent the number of minutes, then .8 will
be multiplied by 60 (seconds), .8 x 60 = 48, then 48
represents the number of seconds.

The frequency of Murder or the Crime Clock for the

crime of Murder is every 2 days, 23 hours, 16 minutes, and
48 seconds, or one Murder case is committed every 71 hours,
16 minutes, and 48 seconds in a given area.
 261

Arrest Rate

Is the batting average of a law enforcement agency in

the accounting of persons with warrant of arrest. It is
obtained by dividing the total number of Wanted Persons
Arrested (WPA) by the total number of Warrant of Arrest
Received (WAR) in a given period multiplying the dividend by
100.

Formula: AR = WPA
____ x 100

WAR

Where WPA = 9

WAR = 10

_9_ x 100
100

= 0.9 x 100

AR = 90%
 262

REVIEW QUESTIONS

POLICE OPERATION PLANNING

==================================================================

INSTRUCTIONS: Select the correct answer for each of the following

questions.

1. It is a systematic and continuous process of acquiring a set

of decisions for action in the future, directed in achieving
goals by optimal means and of learning from the outcome about
possible new sets of decisions and new goals to be achieved.

A. police planning B. police program

C. police plan D. police programming

2. It is a plan of what is to be done or s set of instructions

outlining the steps to be performed in a specific operational
undertaking of police organization.

A. police planning B. police program

C. police plan D. police programming

3. Almost all police organization engaged at one time or

another in the preparation of this plans and programs in response
to crisis or when forced to do so to implement decisions made by
some other body.

A. reactive B. operational efficiency

C. contingency D. strategic

4. It is a plan and programs that often results from the lesson

learned by other police organizations that had face special
incident, and is based on the organization’s wish to be prepared
when does it occur.

A. reactive b. operational efficiency

C. contingency D. strategic

5. It requires the organization to set goals of at least five

years into the future and devise steps that need to be taken to
achieve goals.

A. reactive B. operational efficiency

C. contingency D. strategic
6. In this classification of plans and programs, current
processes are reviewed and recommendations for improvement are
made.
 263

A. reactive B. operational
C. contingency D. strategic

7. It is the sequence of planning and programming process

wherein the questions, “What need to be accomplished?’ and “What
is the desired future steps?” are being asked.

A. identifying the problems

B. analyzing alternative solutions
C. preparing plans & programs
D. setting-up of goals & objectives

8. It requires that on-going planning assignment is to be made,

although who is this may vary depending on the level or subject
of planning or programming.

A. identifying the problems

B. analyzing alternative solutions
C. preparing plans & programs
D. setting-up of goals & objectives

9. It may involve scanning the environment, performing research

and gathering information, and assessment of the present
situation and current state of affair.

A. identifying the problems

B. analyzing alternative solutions
C. preparing plans & programs
D. setting-up of goals & objectives

10. The extent to which the different courses of action and the
criteria for judging the strength of each course of action should
be consider once a problem is identified.

A. identifying the problems

B. analyzing alternative solutions
C. preparing plans & programs
D. setting of goals & objectives

11. This shall be based on a careful selection of the matters

relating to the situation for which plans are being developed.

A. frame of reference B. clarifying the problems

C. analyzing the facts D. collecting pertinent facts
12. This calls of the identification of the problem by
understanding both its records and its possible solutions.

A. frame of reference B. clarifying the problems

 264

C. analyzing the facts D. collecting pertinent facts

13. Developing a plan shall not be attempted until all facts

relating thereto have been gathered, and it is refers to:

A. frame of reference B. clarifying the problems

C. analyzing the facts D. collecting pertinent facts

14. It is being done after all data have been gathered for
careful evaluation.

A. frame of reference B. clarifying the problems

C. analyzing the facts D. developing alternative

15. In the initial phase of plans development, several

alternatives measures will appear to be logically comparable to
the needs of the situation, and it is:

A. selling the plan B. arranging for execution

C. analyzing the facts D. collecting pertinent facts

16. It is the careful consideration of all facts that usually

leads to the selection of a best alternative proposal.

A. frame of reference B. clarifying the problems

C. analyzing the facts D. selecting alternatives

17. A plan to be effectively carried out must be accepted by

persons concerned at the appropriate level of plans development.

A. selling the plan B. clarifying the problems

C. analyzing the facts D. collecting pertinent facts

18. It requires the issuance of orders and directives to unit

personnel concerned, and the provision of manpower and equipment
for carrying out the plans.

A. executive of the plan B. clarifying the problems

C. analyzing the facts D. collecting pertinent facts

19. These are the three types of plans according to range,

EXCEPT:

A. short range B. medium range

C. mid-term range D. long range
20. Information or material that needs to be provided with cover
sheet with one-half inch green border.

A. top secret B. secret

C. confidential D. restricted
 265

21. Information or material that needs to be provided with cover

sheet with one-half inch red border.

A. top secret B. secret

C. confidential D. restricted

22. Information or material that needs to be provided with cover

sheet with one-half inch blue border.

A. top secret B. secret

C. confidential D. restricted

23. It is the results of planning or proposal design to guide

and direct to be performed by the police organization.

A. police plan B. police program

C. police planning D. police programming

24. Are those plans relating to the standard operating

procedures and are useful as guide to personnel purposely to
increase operational efficiency.

A. operational B. fiscal
C. tactical D. procedural

25. Are those plans which are prepared to meet exigencies

encountered by the police organization, and are prepared
considerably in advance of expected incidents.

A. operational B. auxiliary
C. tactical D. procedural

26. Are those plans designed to give guidance and direction to

personnel in the performance of normal police activities.

A. operational B. auxiliary
C. tactical D. procedural

27. Information or material which requires special protection.

A. top secret B. secret

C. confidential D. restricted

28. Are those plan which implement recruitment of personnel and

other normal operations involving organizational activities.

A. operational B. auxiliary
C. tactical D. procedural
 266

29. Are those plans that relate to such matters for budget and
funds preparations.

A. fiscal plan B. budget plan

C. all of the above D. non of the above

30. It is a special type of operations, and it is an extreme

measure used when all other means failed.

A. raid B. arrest
C. search D. seizure

31. These are the factors affecting the success or effectiveness

of a raid, EXCEPT:

A. size & speed B. search & seizure

C. simplicity of plans D. surprise & superiority

32. The following are the objectives and purpose of raid,

EXCEPT:

A. apprehend suspect B. confiscate contraband

C. search & seizure D. recover stolen property

33. These are considerations in preparing police plans, EXCEPT:

A. applicability B. practicability
C. timing D. feasibility

34. The following are the qualifications of the raiding party,

EXCEPT:

A. steady nerves B. leadership

C. good judgment D. nervousness

35. The following are the composition of the raiding party,

EXCEPT:

A. raid commander B. recorder & photographer

C. raiding team D. entering & covering party

36. The following are the duties of the covering party. i.e.,
covers approach, cover the entire area, neutralizing fire of
barricaded criminals and __________.

A. search & seizures B. confiscate contrabands

C. arrest of criminals D. prevent escape of criminals

37. The elements of a successful raid are as follows, EXCEPT:

 267

A. plans & orders B. mission & reconnaissance

C. leadership & control D. instructions & executions

38. One of the factors to be considered in planning a raid is

that the terrain must be subjected to __________.

A. surveillance B. casing
C. observation D. close study

39. It is important to be conducted to the participants, and it

is informing them about the nature of the mission in conducting
police raid.

A. briefing B. de-briefing
C. ask individual role D. informing the mission

40. It is imperative before the service of search warrant or

warrant of arrest in given jurisdiction.

A. reconnaissance B. casing & surveillance

C. close study D. proper coordination

41. It is an examination of an individual or premises to

discover contraband.

A. seizure B. body search

C. search D. stop & frisk

42. A Search Warrant must be served within how many days from
the dated of its issuance.

A. 5 days B. 10 days
C. 15 days D. 20 days

43. What is the purpose why the arresting officer conducts

criminal interrogation, take mug shots, and fingerprints of the
arrested suspect?

A. master file B. rogues gallery

C. all of the above D. non of the above
44. Any evidence obtained in violation of the rights of the
persons against unlawful searches is inadmissible as evidence,
and are considered.

A. warrantless search B. fruits of poisonous tree

C. all of these D. fruit of illegal search

45. The search must always be made during this particular moment
of time, unless otherwise stated.
 268

A. day time B. night time

C. all of the above D. non of the above

46. What is the purpose why there is a need of requesting the

owner of the premises to do the opening of drawers and lifting of
evidence during valid searches.

A. stealing B. avoid planting of evidence

C. taking of property D. recovery of evidence

47. What is required to the police officer after the service of

Search Warrant?

A. submit an inventory B. deliver the property

C. all of the above D. non of the above

48. During the service of Search Warrant, the presence of at

least how many witness are required.

A. 3 witnesses B. 2 witnesses
C. 1 witness D. nothing at all

49. It is the science which deals with the collection,

interpretation, analysis and presentation of quantitative crime
date useful in planning police operational activities.

A. statistics B. crime
C. crime statistics D. all of the above

50. Are those serious crimes that are readily reported and that
occur with sufficient regularity and frequency so as to be used
as a parameter of the actual level of criminality.

A. index crimes B. non-index crimes

C. indictable crimes D. non-indictable crimes

51. Are those crimes not falling under index crimes.

A. index crimes B. non-index crimes

C. indictable crimes D. non-indictable crimes

52. Are those cases that are not defined and penalized under
Revised Penal Code and Special Laws.

A. index crimes B. non-index crimes

 269

C. indictable crimes D. non-indictable crimes

53. It is the number of crime committed in a given area over a

period of time, and it is also refers to the total number of
crime incidents reported to the attention of the police station.

A. crime density B. total crime volume

C. crime rate D. population density

54. It is refers to the number of inhabitants per unit

geographical area.

A. crime density B. total crime volume

C. crime rate D. population density

55. The number of crimes for every 100,000 population in a given

period of time.

A. crime density B. total crime volume

C. crime rate D. population density

56. It is the frequency of crime occurrence by month for every

100,000 population during a given period of time.

A. crime density B. total crime volume

C. crime rate D. population density

57. It is the batting average of the law enforcement agency in

the solution of crimes.

A. arrest rate B. crime solution efficiency

C. crime rate D. frequency of crime

58. It is the frequency of occurrence of a particular crime

incident committed in a given area over a period of time, it is
also commonly known as “Crime Clock.”

A. arrest rate B. crime solution efficiency

C. crime rate D. frequency of crime

59. It is the batting average of the law enforcement agency in

the accounting of persons with warrant of arrest.

A. arrest rate B. crime solution efficiency

C. crime rate D. frequency of crime

60. The municipality “X” is having a total population of

24,404,000. What is the population density of the municipality X?

A. 2.44 B. 4.22
 270

C. 4.24 D. 2.42

61. The municipality “X” which has a population of 244,500

received a total crime volume of 401 for the 1st Qtr., CY: 2005.
What is the crime density during the period covered?

A. 164.34 B. 146.34
C. 164.43 D. 146.43

62. Police Station “X” recorded a crime density of 164.34 and a

crime volume of 401 for the 1st Quarter, Calendar Year: 2005.
What is the average crime rate?

A. 54.78 B. 78.54
C. 78.45 D. 45.78

63. Out of the 50 total crime volume received by Police Station

“X” for the month of March 2005, it was able to solve 40 cases.
What is the crime solution efficiency?

A. 90% B. 80%
C. 70% D. 60%

64. Out of 100 Warrant of Arrest received by Police Station “X”,

it was able to arrest 75 wanted persons. What is the arrest rate?

A. 57% B. 75%
C. 100% D. 50%

65. It is a police activities of providing overt and covert

security coverage out of ensuring the security of the lives and
limbs of a persons authorized by the law to be protected.

A. covert security B. VIP protection activities

C. overt security D. all of the above

66. It is a typical reaction of security personnel in case an

attack unto the VIP that are provided with security coverage,
EXCEPT:

A. sound-off B. cover the VIP

C. evacuate the VIP D. leave the VIP

67. In the rings of the VIP security, the 3rd ring is classified
as __________.

A. fixed post B. close-in

C. foot & mobile D. buffer security
 271

68. It is a group of protective personnel tasked to conduct

necessary survey, inspections and coordination prior to the
arrival of the VIP.

A. buffer security B. buffer zone

C. advance party D. covert & overt security

69. They are security personnel who are deployed between the VIP
and the audience.

A. buffer security B. buffer zone

C. advance party D. covert & overt security

70. It is a person who, because of his or her sensitive position

is accorded with special protection for his or her personal
safety.

A. VIP B. government officials

C. elected officials D. all of the above

71. A great natural catastrophe or an extra ordinary accident

which plunges scores of people into helplessness.

A. disaster B. fire
C. conflagration D. accident

72. It is a basic formation in civil disturbance management that

is being used during defensive dispersal of unruly crowd.

A. “U” Formation B. double line formation

C. line formation D. arrow formation

73. It is a basic formation in civil disturbance management that

is being used during actual confrontation with the crowd.

A. “U” Formation B. double line formation

C. line formation D. arrow formation

74. The following must be used in requesting the driver to park

his vehicles.

A. siren B. megaphone
C. all of the above D. non of the above

75. It is a must before the conduct of pursuit operation, since

the subject vehicles may elude arrest.
 272

A. inform adjacent units B. notation of plate number

C. all of the above D. non of the above

76. Warrant of Arrest shall remain effective until the following

are met, EXCEPT:

A. accused is arrested B. cases is terminated

C. released on bail D. release on custody

77. It must be avoided to avoid tragic and embarrassing

situation which adversely affect the police organizations and the
government.

A. panic firing B. mulcting

C. extortion D. overkill tendencies

78. At this stage of unlawful assembly, the crowd is still

functioning as a conglomeration of individuals.

A. stage one B. stage two

C. stage three D. stage four

79. At this stage of unlawful assembly, the crowd lost their

individuality and begins to function as a single unit.

A. stage one B. stage two

C. stage three D. stage four

80. At this stage of unlawful assembly, the crowd is functioning

as a single unit, any event is likely to precipitate to violent
action or the riot is just waiting to happen.

A. stage one B. stage two

C. stage three D. stage four
81. The following are the types of disasters, EXCEPT:

A. fires & explosions B. transportation accidents

C. conflagrations D. floods & volcanic eruptions

82. Perhaps it is the oldest of all the terrorist tactics in the

book and still widely used today.

A. assassination B. hostage taking

C. kidnapping D. ambush

83. This is particular tactics, wherein the terrorist confront

the authorities and openly hold their victims for ransom or some
other reasons.
 273

A. assassination B. hostage taking

C. kidnapping D. ambush

84. It is eight percent of all the terrorist incidents, and must

still be viewed as a serious option open to terrorist groups.

A. assassination B. hostage taking

C. kidnapping D. ambush

85. It is any kind of continuing terrorist activity, it is

associated with, and often gives indications of some future
atrocity.

A. bombing B. arson
C. hoaxes D. hijacking

86. Although not a popular tactic among terrorist, it is being

uses to destroy and disrupt targets.

A. bombing B. arson
C. hoaxes D. hijacking

87. The tactic common to most terror groups, it is popular

weapon because it is cheap to produce, easy to make, has variable
uses, and it is difficult to detect and trace after the event.

A. bombing B. arson
C. hoaxes D. hijacking

88. There are ideologically inspired individual or groups, and

they are tagged as the political terrorist.

A. crazies B. criminals
C. crusaders D. all of the above

89. It is violence for effect, not primarily, and sometimes not

all for the physical effect of the actual target, but rather for
its dramatic impact on an audience.

A. violence B. criminal acts

C. atrocities D. terrorism

90. It is the fact that the terrorist can choose his own time
and place of operation if his intended victim continually uses
the same route.

A. assassination B. hostage taking

 274

C. kidnapping D. ambush

91. In Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD), it is an object,

regardless of its disguise.

A. hoax bombs B. improvised explosive device

C. explosives D. culvert bombs

92. The external appearance of this type of IED is with steel or

PVC pipe section with end caps.

A. pipe bomb B. brief case bomb

C. postal service bomb D. automobile bomb

93. It is an IED that appears in any style, color, size,

including what easily discarded food containers, some may be even
small as a cigarette package.

A. pipe bomb B. brief case bomb

C. postal service bomb D. automobile bomb

94. These are vehicles filed with explosives which made of

booby-trapped or remotely detonated.

A. vehicle bombs B. laid charges

C. postal bombs D. projected bombs

95. These are devices which are put into place by the terrorist
hands.

A. vehicle bombs B. laid charges

C. postal bombs D. projected bombs

96. It is a sub-classification of IED, and it is method of

getting the bomb to its objectives.

A. delivery B. usage
C. activation D. non of the above

97. These bombs are thrown by hand or some type of projection

device such as mortar.

A. vehicle bomb B. laid charges

C. projected bombs D. postal bomb
98. A terrorist who operates and aspires to win political power
primarily within a single nation.
 275

A. national terrorist B. international terrorist

C. local terrorist D. transnational terrorist

99. It is a factor that influenced contemporary terrorism,

wherein their main objectives is to publicize their cause to the
widest audience.

A. media B. potential for violence

C. communication D. non of the above

100. This is a type of IED that is considered to be used

indiscriminately to gain world attention.

A. tactical IED B. strategic IED

C. all of the above D. non of the above
 276

PARTV
SECURITY & SAFETY MANAGEMENT
 277

CHAPTER

19

INTRODUCTION TO SECURITY AND SAFETY

===========================================================

Security from a layman’s point of view refers to the

security guards whose main function is to protect an office,
building, installation or equipment against trespass, theft,
arson, and other inimical acts. As a security officer, the
job includes the implementation of a viable security
education program which will sell security measures to the
customer-clientele of the private policing activities. It
is also a must to improve the knowledge, and adopt an open
mind regarding the many faceted problems involved in
industrial security management.

What is a Security

Is the state of quality of being secure; freedom from fear

or danger; assurance of certainty. To secure is to make safe
or be protected.

Types of Security

1. Physical Security

Is the broadest branch of security which is concerned

with the physical measures adopted to prevent unauthorized
access to equipment, facilities, materials and document and
to safeguard it from espionage, sabotage, damage and theft.
Physical security does not only cover types of security to
protect equipment, document, facilities and materials
against damage, sabotage or espionage. It also encompasses
protection of personnel from criminal act.

2. Communications Security
 278

Is the protection resulting from the application of various

measures which prevent or delay the enemy or unauthorized
persons in gaining information through the communication
system. This includes:

1) Transmission Security

A component of communications security which

results from all measures designed to protect transmission
from interception, traffic analysis and imitative deception.

2) Cryptographic Security

Results from the provisions of technically sound

crypto-system and their proper use.

3) Physical Security

Providing a safeguards to equipment and material

from access by unauthorized persons.

3. Hotel Security

The protection of assets, guests, personal effect and

other properties in a hotel.

4. Bank Security

A specialized type of physical security in protecting

the assets, personnel and operation of a bank, with special
emphasis on the precaution and measures to safeguard the
cash and assets while in storage; in transit, and during
transactions.

5. Document Security

Is a physical security involving the protection of

documents and classified matters from loss or access by
unauthorized persons, damages, theft and compromise through
disclosure.

6. Personal Security
 279

It is the protection of personnel, especially the

ranking officials of the company from any harm, kidnapping
and other criminal acts. VIP security is also a type of
personal security.

7. Crises Security

A part of VIP security involving hostage taking and

kidnapping of VIPs.

8. Industrial Security

It is a physical security applied to business groups

engaged in industries like manufacturing, assembling,
research and development, processing, warehousing and even
agriculture. It is a form of physical security involving
industrial plant and business enterprises where the
personnel, processes, properties and operations are
safeguarded. Use of protective barriers, and security
lighting, personnel movement control, locks and key
management, guard forces, communications and electronic
hardware are essential, aside from fire prevention and
control programs, emergency plans, industrial safety and
security education programs.

9. Operational Security

It is part of physical security that deals primarily

with the protection of processes, formulas, patents, and
other industrial and manufacturing activities from
espionage, infiltration, loss, compromise, or photocopying.

10. Other Special Types

1) Air Cargo Security

2) School Security

3) Supermarket Security

4) Personnel Security

What is a Security Hazard

 280

Is an act or conditions which results in a situation

conducive to a breach of the protection system and the
subsequent loss or compromise of defense information,
company secrets, or damage to personnel, property or
facilities.

Kinds of Security Hazards

1. Human Hazard

Are the acts or conditions affecting the safe operation

of the facility caused by human action, accidental or
intentional. It includes sabotage, espionage, pilferage and
theft, disloyalty, disaffection and subversive activity.

2. Natural Hazards

Are those caused by natural phenomena which cause

damage, disturbance and problems of the normal functioning
of human activities, including security. It includes floods,
typhoons, earthquakes, lighting storms, volcanic eruptions,
high-velocity winds, tidal waves, etc. It should be noted
that the real problems actually in industrial plants are the
human or man-made hazards, the most common of which are
pilferage, theft, arson, accidents through carelessness, and
sabotage.

Extent and Degree of Risks to Security will be Dependent on

the Following

1. Relative Criticality

It is the importance of the firm with reference to the

national economy and security.

2. Relative Vulnerability

It is the susceptibility of the plant or establishment

to damage, loss or disruption of operation due to various
hazards.
Types of Pilferers
 281

1. Casual Pilferer

One who steals due to his inability to resist the

unexpected opportunity and has little fear of detection.

2. Systematic Pilferer

One who steals with preconceived plans and takes away

any of all types of items or supplies for economic gain.

Some Common Measures Against Pilferage

1. Package Inspection

2. Body Search

3. Garbage and Trash Checks Before Disposal

4. Personnel ID and Management Control

5. Locks and Key Management

6. Property Audits

7. Inspections

8. Asset Inventories

9. Use of Alarm

10. Security Education

 282

CHAPTER

20

PHYSICAL SECURITY MANAGEMENT

===========================================================

What is a Perimeter Barrier

A medium or structure which defines the physical limits

of an installations or area to restrict or impede access
thereto. It is any physical barrier used to supplement the
protection of an inside or outside perimeter.

Basically, barriers are designed to accomplish the

following:

1. Outline of the perimeter of the area to be

secured;

2. Create a physical and psychological impact to

unauthorized entry;

3. Delay intrusion, thus facilitating apprehension of

intruders;

4. Assist in a more efficient, economical employment

of guards; and

5. Facilitate and impose the control of pedestrian

and vehicular traffic.

Two General Types of Physical Barriers

1. Natural Barrier

Include mountains, cliffs, canyons, rivers, seas,

marshes, deserts or terrain difficult to traverse.

2. Man-Made Barrier
 283

Are structural constructions like fences, walls,

floors, roofs, grills, bars, road blocks, or other physical
means to deter or impede penetration.

Types of Perimeter Barriers

1. Wire Fences

Is a type of perimeter barrier made of chain link

design with mesh openings not larger than two inches square,
and made of #9 gauge wire or heavier, minimum height of
which is 8 feet.

2. Building Wall

Masonry wall should have the same height as the chain

link and surmounted by the barbed wire top guards; if the
height is less than the prescribed, additional chain-link as
“topping” is placed to attain the minimum height
requirement.

3. Bodies of Water

It is an additional security measures, surrounding the

establishment.

Kinds of Perimeter Barrier Openings

1. Gates and doors, it must be guarded and locked.

2. Sidewalk elevators, it provides access to areas

within the perimeter barriers and should be locked or
guarded.

3. Utility openings, it may be composed of sewers,

air intakes, exhaust tunnels which penetrate the barriers
and which have cross-sectioned area of 96 sq. in. or more
should be protected by bar grills, etc.

4. Clear Zones, it is an unobstructed area maintained

on both sides of the perimeter barrier. A clear zone of 20
ft. or more is desirable between the barrier and extension
 284

structures and natural covers which may provide concealment

or assistance to a person seeking unauthorized entry. Where
it is impossible to have clear zones because of property
lines or natural features, an increment in the height of the
fencing, increased guard coverage, more security lighting,
or the use of intrusion devices in that portion of the
perimeter barrier should be done.

Additional Protective Measures

1. Top Guard

It is an additional overhang or barbed wire placed on

vertical perimeter fences facing upward and outward with a
45 degrees angle with three to four strands of barbed wires
spaced 6” apart. This will increase the protective height
and prevent easy access.

2. Sentry Stations

Normally provided at the main perimeter entrances to

secure areas located out of doors, and manned by guards on a
full time basis. Sentry Stations should be near at the
perimeter for surveillance at the entrance.

3. Guard Towers

Are house-like structure above the perimeter barriers.

It gives a psychological effect to violators.

4. Protection in Depth

In large open areas or ground where fencing or walling

is impracticable and expensive, warning signs should be
conspicuously placed. The dept itself is protection.
Reduction of access roads and sufficient notices to warn
intruders should be done. Use of animal guards and
intrusion devices can also be done.

5. Signs and Notices

 285

Control signs should be erected where necessary in the

management of unauthorized ingress, and preclude accidental
entry, ID, prohibition, and exclusive areas signs.

Specifications for Using Chain-Link Fences

1. It must be constructed in a 8-foot material

excluding top guard.

2. It must be 9 gauge or heavier.

3. Mesh openings are not to be larger than 2 inches

per side.

4. It should be twisted and barbed salvage at top and

bottom.

5. It should be securely fastened to rigid metal or

reinforced concrete.

6. It must reach within 2 inches of hard ground or

paving.

7. It must reach below surface deep enough on soft

grounds to compensate for shifting soil or sand.

Specifications for Using Barbed Wire

1. Standard barbed wire is twisted, double-strand, 12

gauge wire, with 4 point barbs spaced on equal distance
apart.

2. Barbed wire fencing must be firmly affixed to

posts high excluding top guard.

3. Barbed wire fencing should not be less than 8 feet

high excluding top guard.

4. The distance between strands will not exceed 6

inches and midway between parts.

Specifications on Clear Zones

 286

1. A clear zone of 20 feet or more should exist

between the perimeter barriers and exterior structures,
parking areas, natural or man-made features.

2. A clear zone 50 feet or more should exist between

the perimeter barrier and structures within the protected
areas except when a building wall constitutes part of the
perimeter barrier.

Security Specifications for Windows Openings

Windows of openings less than 18 feet above the ground,

roofs, ledges, etc., or less than 14 feet directly or
diagonally opposite uncontrolled windows in other walls,
fire escapes, or other openings of 96 sq. in. or larger
should be grilled or have steel bar protections.

Security Lightings

Security Lighting provides sufficient illumination to

areas during hours of darkness. Among its other purpose
are:

1. It improves visibility so that intruders can be

seen, identified or apprehended.

2. It gives psychological fear which serves as a

deterrent to thieves, pilferers, trespassers, and saboteurs.

3. It makes the routine work of guard easier of

identifying employees, vehicles, etc. during nighttime.

4. If placed in certain areas, may even reduce the

number of stationary guards, and instead, may require roving
patrol only at night.

Security Lightings Techniques

 287

1. Security lighting should enable a guard to observe

clearly the activities around, and inside the premises
within his jurisdictions.

2. In planning, high contrast between intruder and

background should be provided. When contrast is poor,
increase intensity will improve guard’s ability to see.
3. Lighting boundaries and approaches, as well as the
area and structure is useful to discourage unauthorized
entries and reveal identity of persons. Good lighting
should reveal well boundaring areas, glaring to intruders
and adequate for the guard to observe his positions.

4. Effective lighting should: 1) discourage attempts

to enter the premise; and 2) detection were likely if entry
is attempted.

5. If lighting at night cannot be provided due to

impracticability, other means of protection have to be made
like additional guard posts, roving patrols and animal
guards.

Types of Security Lightings

1. Stationary Luminary

Most common type, consisting of series of fixed

luminous to light a given area continuously with overlap.
These two types are used on the entry gate of employees and
vehicles. It may either be:

1) Glare Protection Type

The intensity is focused to the intruder while the

observer or guard remains in the comparative darkness. The
lighting is toward the approach of an entrance to an
installation. Lights with reflectors increase glare.

2) Controlled Lighting

The width of the lighted-atop can be controlled

and adjusted to suit the security needs. The lighting is
focused sag on a pile of items rather than on the
background.
 288

2. Stand-by Lighting

Similar to continuous lighting, in can be turned on

manually or by special devices or other automatic means,
when there is suspicion of entry.

3. Movable Lighting

Consist of stationary or portable, manually operated

search lights which may be lighted continuously during hours
of darkness or only as needed, and usually supplementary to
either of the first two types.

4. Emergency Lighting

A stand-by lighting which can be utilized in the event

of electrical failure, either due to local equipment or
commercial power failure.

Types of Light Lamps

1. Incandescent Lamps

Common light bulbs in which light is produced by the

resistance of a filament to electric current. For better
concentration of light, metal reflectors are used, and
directed on areas to be lighted.

2. Gaseous Discharge Lamps

Economical to use but take two or five minutes to light

which may be a disadvantage in industrial security lighting.
Examples are as follows:

1) Mercury-Vapor Lamps – blue green color light due

to the presence of mercury vapor.

2) Sodium-Vapor Lamps – emits yellow light, placed

usually in areas to connote special concern, like bridges
and streets.

3) Quarts Lamps – very bright light.

 289

Protective Alarms

Alarm, aural or visual signal given by the annunciator

to security when intruder actuates device in a protected
area. An annunciator is a visual or audible signaling
device which initiates conditions of associated circuits.

Basically, alarm system was designed to alert security

personnel to consummated or attempted intrusions into an
area, building or compound. Each type of alarm is activated
in the event that an intruder tampers with the circuitry, a
beam, or radiated waves; intrusion alarm can be electrical,
mechanical, or electronic. Alarms are also used for fire,
smoke or other emergencies and presence of other hazards.

Types of Protective Alarm Systems

1. Central Station System

Several separate compounds tie their alarm system to a

central station so that in case of need, the central station
calls for assistance to the police, fire department,
hospital or with other government assisting units.

2. Proprietory System

Similar to the central station type except that the

proprietory console is located inside the subscriber’s
installation who owns or base the system.

3. Auxillary System

An installation owned system which is a direct

extension of the local enforcement agency and/or fire
department by special arrangement.

4. Local Alarm System

Consist of ringing up of visual or audible alarm near

the object to be protected. In case of alarm, response will
 290

be made by the local guards and other personnel within sight

or hearing.

Desirable Characteristics of Intrusion Alarm System

Intrusion alarm devices are designed to “detect” and

not to prevent criminal acts and should be used normally as
an adjunct and not a replacement of the human guard forces.

The primary considerations on the choice of a

particular alarm system include stability, durability and
reliability. Desirable characteristics, furthermore, should
include:

1. A detection unit should initiate the alarm upon

intrusion of a human being in the area or vicinity of the
protected object.

2. Panel board central annunciator or operating

console monitoring activities should be removed at all
times. Transmission can be by physical wires or by radio.

3. An annunciator console indicating the audible

and/or aural signal and the specific location of incident so
that proper action can be made by security and other units.

4. Fail-safe features give alarms in the annunciator

when something is wrong with the system.

5. System should be difficult to tamper or render

ineffective by outsiders, competitors or saboteurs.

Operation of Intrusion Alarm System

Intrusion devices emit certain signals to the

annunciator and operate on the following principles:

1. Breaking an Electric Circuit

In a building or compound, all possible points of entry

can be wired by using electrically charged strips of tinfoil
or wire. Any action that will move the foil or wire breaks
 291

the circuit and activate an alarm. The alarm can be local,

or near the area where circuit is broken, or can be
monitored in a distant annunciator or both.

2. Interruption of a Light Beam

This system uses a photo-electric cell or the “electric

eye” which operates on the principles of light rays. In
this system, an invisible light beam is transmitted to a
special receiver. An infrared filter over the light source
makes the beam invisible to intruders. The source of beam
is hidden, and the rays criss-cross a room by the use of
reflecting mirrors until they contact sensitive cells in the
receiver. This device terminates by wire to a console in
the security control room. When an intruder breaks the
beam, an alarm is activated.

The disadvantages of photo-cell include: the beam can

be bypassed by crawling underneath or climbing over it; its
requirements of a rigid or outdoor installations are not so
effective because of fog, smoke, dust, rain and other
obstructions to vision when defuse enough can interrupt the
light and trigger false alarms.

3. Detection of Sound and Vibration

This can be utilized effectively to safeguard enclosed

areas vaults, safes, storage bins, file rooms, warehouses,
and similar enclosures. Supersensitive tiny microphones are
embedded in the walls, ceilings and floors of the enclosure
to be protected by sound or vibrations. These microphones
distributed evenly can detect sound or vibrations of sound
caused by attempts to force entry into the protected area.

The main advantage of this detector device is its

relatively low cost and easy installation. The amplifier
which monitors the sound from the microphone can be adjusted
to suit the sensitivity level requirements. The obvious
disadvantage is its limited application to enclosed vaults,
and depositories where minimum external sound exists. It is
not satisfactory where minimum external sound exists. It is
not satisfactory where high ambient noise level are
encountered because of the proximity to construction sites,
aircraft traffic, and vehicular movements.
 292

4. Space, Motion and Vibration

These systems usually derive their operating principle

from a physical phenomenon known as “Doppler Effect.”
Constant sound waves in a cubicle disturbed by an object
will cause change of frequency and wave motion thereby
causing an alarm to trigger.

5. Electromagnetic Fence

Is an electronic fence consisting of 3 to 5 strands of

wire spaced from 9 to 24 inches above one another which
serves as an antenna, a monitor panel, and an electric
circuitry. When power is put on, an electro-magnetic field
is set among the wires from the top to the ground. An
intruder about two feet from this field will trigger an
alarm. The fence is zoned to pinpoint areas of intrusion to
a monitor located in the operation room of security. This
system is suggested to be located inside the chain-link
fencing to minimize nuisance alarms caused by animals,
debris blown by the wind, and harmless trespassers.

Security Communication System

In any plant or industrial complex, inter and intra

communications is indispensable not only in security work,
but also in the plant operation itself. It is a good
management policy that security should have its own
communication line officers within the installations and to
the outside.

The security force needs a communication landline to

call local law enforcement agencies, the fire department,
ambulance, mobile patrol and other governmental agencies.
Telephone is also needed to contact the agency’s main office
or security force outposts. The following are some means of
communication that can be a useful part of the protective
system:

1. Local telephone exchange

2. Commercial telephone service

3. Inter-communication
 293

4. Two-way radios for security, i.e., base, portable,

and mobile.

5. Security supervising system and “beep-beep.”

6. Paging and recall system

7. “Bull-horns” or megaphones

8. Amplifier or loud speaker system

Identification and Control

Identification and control objective include precluding

unauthorized entry and facilitating authorized personnel to
enter specific areas, as well as preventing the introduction
of material components of harmful materials,
misappropriation, pilferage of installation properties and
recorded classified information.

Identification and control objectives are achieved by:

1. Initially determining who has valid right in the

areas;

2. Limiting access to those persons who have a right

and need to be there;

3. Establishing procedures for positive

identification of persons authorized access into areas;

4. Issuing passes or badges to those authorized to

enter restricted areas;

5. By using access list, identification codes, and

duress code.

What is a Pass System

A pass or badge is issued by security for personnel to

be admitted in the installation. This system precludes those
visitors with escorts and personnel in the access list. The
 294

pass system is for general use and not for restricted areas
like exclusive, limited and controlled areas. The following
are systems recommended:

1. Single Pass or Badge System

Pass is issued for permission to enter different

specific areas by letters, numerals, or colors. For example,
green backgrounds of current passes in the general area, or
white pass with overprinted blue symbols for a certain
specific areas.

2. Pass of Badge Exchange System

Multiple copies of passes are issued to an individual

with the same photograph. The individual exchange his badge
for another color or numeral at the gate. Once inside, if he
needs to enter a restricted area, he exchanges it for one of
another color acceptable in that area.

Visitor, Property, Movement and Vehicle Control

A visitor is any person not regularly employed in a

plant or firm. Strict precautions are taken with visitor
against pilferage, sabotage and other crimes. Plant visitors
can be suppliers, promoters, collectors, customers,
government inspectors, contractors, job-seekers, group
visitors, guided tours, and others.

Passes or badge may be issued to visitors indicating

area to be visited and escorts requirements. Likewise,
movement of packages should be controlled, closely
inspecting all incoming and outgoing packages, with
inspection to all the vehicles. Trucks entering and leaving
the area should be inspected. Trucks have been found to have
special components, items placed inside the spare tire, tool
boxes, and even in fake gasoline tanks.

What is a Protective Lock

A protective lock is defined as a mechanical,

electrical, hydraulic, or electronic devised designed to
 295

prevent entry to a building, room, container or hiding

place.

Four General Groups of Key Locks

1. The Warded Lock

The underlying principle is the incorporation of wards

or obstructions inside the lock to prohibit a key from
operating the bolt unless the key has corresponding notches
cut in it so that it will pass the wards.

2. The Lever Tumbler Lock

Each lever hinges on a fixed point and is held down

against a stop by the pressure of a flat spring. Each lever
has a cut in tilt, and all the gates can be located at
different places. When the proper key is inserted and
turned, notches of various depths raise all the lever
whatever distance is required to line up all the gates
exactly opposite the fence on the bolt. When the key is
turned, a portion of the key catches the bolt and slides it
back. Because there is no resistance to the post entering
the gate, the lock is opened. If the key is not the correct
one and if even one gate does not line up to let the post
slide into it, the lock cannot be opened.

3. The Disc Tumbler Lock

Also known as the woofer tumbler type, has flat metal

tumblers with open center fitted into slots in a plug which
is in turn fitted into a lock case. When the plug is turned,
it activates a cam. The key is removable at 90 to 180
degrees and may be rotated either right or left. The disks
are under spring tension forcing them partially out of the
plug into recesses in the case thereby preventing the
cylinder from turning. Rectangular openings in the disk
tumblers are out into various longitudinal dimensions
requiring corresponding cuts in the key to position the
tumblers. Proper unlocking positioning of the tumblers is
accomplished when they are withdrawn from the recesses in
the body of the lock to position flush with the plug,
allowing the plug to turn the cam which causes the
withdrawal of the bolt.
 296

4. Pin Tumbler Lock

The pin tumbler mechanism depends for its security, on

a number of round pin or tumblers operating on a cylinder.
Each tumbler or pin is divided into two parts: the upper,
which is flat on both, is called the driver; the bottom part
called the pin is rounded or slightly pointed on the lower
end to fit the grooves or cuts in the key. A coil spring
above each driver constantly forces it downward. When the
right key is inserted, the various depths of the cuts in the
key compensate for the different lengths in the pins. The
dividing points between each of the two pins segment are
brought into line with the top of the plug, and allowing it
to rotate in the cylinder. When the plug turns, it carries
with its cam which activates the bolt and other lock
mechanism.

What is a Padlock

A portable and detachable lock having a pivoted or

sliding hasp which posses through a staple ring, or the
like and is then made fast to secured.

What is a Combination Locks

Is a lock that requires manipulation of parts according

to a predetermined combination code of numbers of letters.

What is Key Control

The management of keys in a plant or business

organization to prevent unauthorized individual access to
the keys.

What is a Master Key

 297

It is a special key capable of opening stories of

locks. This key is capable of opening less number of locks
than the grand master.

What is a Master Keying System

A system used in big installations whereby keys can

open a group or groups of locks. This is possible by the use
of interchangeable cylinder cores in the locks. Using locks
with the same key in a facility is not master keying or the
use of a pass key. It is used to operate an inexpensive lock
by moving it in the key hole until it catches a locking belt
and unlocks the mechanism.

Master keying is when a lock operates on a master key

plus an individual or changes key. Master keying is made
possible due to the development of interchangeable cylinder
cores. In matters of seconds, keys and lock combination can
be changed, and this is done by the use of a “control key”.
With this key, all the cores in a locking system can be
changed rendering the existing keys not usable.

Levels of Control in the Master Keying Plan

1. One-Level–Change Key

All locks operated by the change key only and the keys
are different or alike or required. Each key operates its
own lock only. Examples are the houses, stores, cars,
warehouses.

2. Two-Levels–Master Key

All levels operated by change keys and master key.

Master key operates all locks generally of one building.
Example: small school, apartment.

3. Three-Levels–Grand Master Key

All locks operated by change key, master keys, and

grand master keys. Grand master key operates all locks
generally used in large buildings or a facility with several
buildings. Example: office buildings, hospitals.
 298

4. Four-Levels–Great Grand Master Key

All locks operated by change key. Grand master keys and

great grand master keys. Used in great or large complex
system and similar to three levels.

5. Five-Levels–Great-Great Grand Master Key

All locks operated by change key, master key, grand

master key and great grand master key , and great great
grand master key. Example: big universities, complexes,
large industrial complexes.

Pointers for Effective Locks and Key Control

1. Records of all keys issued and names of holders

must be meticulously made regardless of the size of the
establishment.

2. Storage key is important. Duplicate or spare keys

should be stored in a securely locked cabinet in a secure
area.

3. Master key should be ensued on an absolute minimum

number, and must be kept by an individual responsible for
locks and keys.

4. Regular checks should be made in employees with

keys issued.

5. Issuance of keys and locks should be carefully

controlled, and issuance should be on a real-need basis.

6. Periodic re-keying should be considered as

essential security safeguard just as combination of safes
are changed from time to time.

7. A key depository should be provided in a big

plant. Supervisors taking keys should register in registry
book.

What is Maison Keying

 299

The issue of key to open the main entrance and the

office.

What is a Coded Lock

This is a type of lock that can be opened by inserting

a coded card in a slot in the lock, or by pushing the
correct buttons on the surface of the lock.

What is Electronic Lock

It is a type of lock that can be closed and opened

remotely by electronics means.

Types of Fire Protection

1. Automatic Sprinkling System

It is a type of built-in sprinklers which works by the

increase of room temperature and which automatically
operates to put out the fire. Attached and distributed in
the ceilings of the rooms, these sprinklers will go into
action once a fire starts, and those that will open are
those directly above the fire and water is delivered right
where it is needed.

1) Wet Pipe System

The piping has water with pressure, and the water

sprinkler will operate when head is open and water will
continue to flow until shut off.

2) Dry Pipe System

The pipes are filled with air under pressure which

holds the water at the valve located in a room. When
sprinklers head goes into operation, air is released,
trapping the dry pipe valve and allowing water to flow
through the system.

2. Fire Pump
 300

It is a mechanical device of supplying water which can

be manual or motor-driven. These pumps are ideal when
natural supplies of water are readily available like a
rivers, lakes or streams.

3. Stand Pipe

Are G.I steel or plastic pipes located inside a

building from the lowest to the top floor with water under
pressure for use in case of fire. Located near the standpipe
is a fire hose usually enclosed in a glass box handy for
use. In case of fire, the hose is screwed into the standpipe
outlet and a valve is opened to release the water. The water
for standpipe can come from a storage tank at the roof or
from a series of water pumps.

4. Fire Hydrant

A mechanical device strategically located in an

installation or street where a fire hose is connected so
that water with pressure will be available to extinguished a
fire.

5. Portable Hand Extinguishers

It is a fire fighting equipment which can be portable

or in a cart that is used to put out fire depending on the
contents to extinguish certain types of fires as class A to
D. This is the most important and useful piece of fire
fighting equipment in a plant, building, or facility.

Classes of Fires

1. Class “A” Fires

These fires results from the burning of wood, paper,

textiles and other carbonaceous materials. Extinguishment
of this type is by quenching and cooling. Extinguishers
which have water, sand, acid, foam and the special solution
of alkali methyl dust, as found in the load-stream
extinguisher, should be used for this type of fire.
 301

2. Class “B” Fires

Are those caused by flammable liquids like kerosene,

gasoline, benzene, oil products, alcohol and other
hydrocarbon derivations. This type is put out and
controlled by foam, loaded-stream, carbon dioxide, dry-
chemical and vaporizing liquid. If water is used here, it
might even spread the flame, or explosion may ensue.

3. Class “C” Fires

Are those which start in live electrical wires,

equipment, motors, electrical appliances and telephone
switchboards. The extinguisher that should be used for such
fires are carbon dioxide, dry-chemical and vaporizing
liquid, as the soda-type can even electrocute the
extinguisher holder. In case of class “C” fires, source of
electricity should be shut off. It becomes mandatory and
good practice to put fuses in the circuit so that in case of
ground or short, the power will be put off by the blowing of
the fuse, or if circuit breaker is used, it will trip an
open circuit.

4. Class “D” Fires

This fire is the result of the combustion of certain

metals in finely divided forms. These metals can be
magnesium, potassium, powdered aluminum, zinc, sodium,
titanium, lithium and zirconium. This type of fire can be
put-out by GI type, meth LX, Lith X, meth L KY, dry sand and
dry talc.

Recognizing Fire Hazards

1. Cigarette buts or any other evidence of smoking in

a no-smoking area.”

2. Oily rags. Rags which are used around motors are

particularly dangerous. The heat from the motor can easily
set them afire.

3. All heating equipment. Any equipment which

produces heat can also produce fire.
 302

4. Flammable boxes and papers stacked or left next

to heating equipment.

5. Open cans of gasoline, paint, paint thinner,

alcohol and other flammable material.

Principles of Extinguishing Fires

1. Cooling or Quenching

Using water or water solution, the temperature of the

substance is lowered below the burning point.

2. Smothering or Blankering

Oxygen content of air is reduced below 15%-from normal

of 21% in volume by using chemicals, fog, sand blankets,
etc.

3. Starving or Cutting-Off

Supply of fuel or material is cut off, as in gas jet.

Types of Fire Extinguishers

1. Dry Chemical Extinguisher

2. Foam Extinguisher

3. Loaded Stream Extinguisher’

Types of Business Records

1. Class 1 – Vital Records

Includes the records that are irreplaceable; records

wherein reproduction of which does not have the same value
as the original; records needed to recover cash to replace
buildings, equipments, raw materials, finished products and
records needed to avoid delay in restoration of production,
sales and services.
 303

2. Class II – Useful Records

Includes records which loss might cause inconvenience

but could be readily replaced and which would not in the
meantime present an insurmountable obstacle to the prompt
restoration of the business.

3. Class III – Important Records

Include records, the reproduction of which will involve

considerable expense and labor, or considerable delays.
Operating and statistical records belong to this class as
well as those to maintain check on efficiencies, operating
costs, etc. Also included are contracts, customer credit
files, sales records, design in process development, records
of experiments in progress, etc.

4. Class IV – Non-Essential Records

Are the daily files, and routine in nature so that even

if lost or destroyed, will not affect operation and
administration of the plants or firms.

Categories of Storage Containers

1. Class 1

Commercial record safes designed for fire protection.

2. Class 2

Commercial money safes designed for robbery and

burglary protection.

3. Class 3

Security cabinets designed to meet specifications for

safeguarding classified materials.

Some Tests for Safes Fire Resistance

1. Fire Endurance Test

 304

A safe should not have any one time a temperature above

350 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Explain Hazard Test

Test to determine if the sudden rise in temperature

will not cause the safe to rupture. If the safe can
withstand 2000 Degrees Fahrenheit for 30 minutes and will
not crack or open, then it has passed the explosion test.

3. Fire and Impact Test

Aimed at determining the strength of a safe to

withstand the collapse of a building during a fire.

What is a Safe

A metallic container used for the safekeeping of

documents or small items in an office or installation. Safes
can be classified as either robbery and/or burglary
resistant depending upon the use and need. Many safes are
required to be installed in steel-clad concrete blocks to
prevent being carted away by the thieves and robbers.

What is a Vault

A heavily constructed fire and burglar–resistant

container usually a part of the building structure used to
keep and protect cash, documents, and negotiable
instruments. Vaults are bigger than safes but smaller than
security file rooms.

What is a File Room

A cubicle in a building constructed a lighter than a

vault but of bigger size to accommodate limited people to
work on the records inside.
 305

CHAPTER

20

SECURITY SURVEY AND INSPECTION

===========================================================

What is a Security Survey and Inspection

A fact-finding probe to determine the plant’s adequacy

and deficiency in all aspects of security, with the
corresponding recommendations.

What is a Survey

The term applied to the first detailed “look-see”

conducted by a team.

What is Inspection or Follow-up Survey

The term used for succeeding surveys after the initial

survey.

What is a Supplemental Survey

Conducted when there is business reorganization with

corresponding changes in objectives and physical lay-outs of
the complex.

What is a Special Survey

Directed by the management, if the initial survey

appears to have left certain portions or aspects involving
security due to change in policy or operations that will
greatly affect the total security picture.

What is Entrance Conference

 306

A conference or dialogue between the survey team and

the management, and officials of a plant before security
survey is conducted.

What is Exit Conference

A conference similar to entrance conference and it is

done after the completion of the security survey.

Who Performs Security Survey & Inspection

Security survey is performed by qualified security

experts who can be from the organization or outsiders
contracted to do the job. Recommendation will fall into
three categories:

1. human guard;

2. equipment; and

3. procedures.

What is a Security Education Program

The exposure and teaching of employees on security and

its relevance to their work.

What are the Objectives of Security Education Program

1. Guidance for all supervisory and executive levels

of the organization;

2. A mandatory indoctrination on security for all new

personnel before their assignment to their respective jobs;

3. Development of high-degree of security

consciousness among the selected supervisors and other key
personnel in a program that should be containing and
supported by top management;
 307

4. A down-the-line security program aimed at

installing consciousness and dedication through
demonstration, lectures, motivations, and suggestion.

5. To let all the employees informed that they all

belong to the organization and that non-awareness and non-
concern to the security program is tantamount to disloyalty.

6. To develop discipline, loyalty and belongingness.

These attributes when fully imbued will result in
effectiveness and efficiency.

Requisites of Effective Security Education Program

Security education program to be effective must have

the support and sanction of top management, the main thrust
being to acquaint all personnel on the reasons for the
security measures. This program should be given to all
personnel from the work group that has no access to
classified endeavors, to the supervisors and executives
handling sensitive plans and policies of the industrial
firm. The program is given a “follow-through” which will be
continuing and tailored to the specific group levels
depending on their access to restricted work and activity.

Definition of Terms

1. Access List

An authenticated list of personnel given to security

allowing entry to a compound or installation or part
thereof.

2. Audit

An official verification and examinations of accounts

and records.

3. Badge System

A system for personnel movement and control whereby

badges or identification are issued to personnel upon
 308

entering an installation. Visitors are also issued temporary

badges when entering the installations.

4. Background Investigation

A check made on an individual usually seeking

employment through subject’s records in the police files,
educational institutions, places of residence and former
employers.

6. Complete Background Investigation

Same as B.I but more comprehensive to include places of

residence since birth.

7. Controlling

The regulation of many different aspects of business

activity. Controls are needed to standardize quality and
performance, protect assets, measure performance, balance
plans and programs, and motivate individuals.

8. Controlled Area

An area near or adjacent to limited or exclusive areas

where entry is restricted.

9. Coverage Factor

The minimum number of directions from which each point

in the area should be lighted depending upon the use of the
area.

10. Doppler Effect

A physical phenomenon that causes frequency shift if an

object moves in an area permeated by radio frequency
signals. This change in certain types of alarms activates a
signaling unit.

11. Dry-run
 309

Practical test or exercise of a plan or any activity to

test its validity; it is also an operational readiness
exercise.

12. Duress Code

A type of code system so that security personnel when

forced by armed men to enter an installation can give alarm
by the use of certain words in casual conversation with
other personnel in the installation.

13. Exclusion Area

A restricted area containing materials or operation of

security interest.

14. Fail-Safe

A term applied to a device or system that in the event

of failure of a component—the incapacity will be signaled.

15. Peterman

A term used in England for lock pickers, safecrackers,

and penetrators of restricted rooms or areas.

16. Program of Instruction

A list of subjects, number of hours, name of

instructors, venue of training for a certain course.

17. Automated Records

Records accumulated by electronic data processing

system (EDPS) like tapes, memory devices, reels, and storage
cases.

19. Restricted Area

Any area, access to which is subject to special

restriction control.

20. Victimology
 310

A special study concerned with what makes an individual

a victim of crime.

Important Factors on Security Survey

1. Surveys must be exhaustive and complete.

2. Hazards must be identified with specific

recommendations for elimination, neutralization or
reduction.

3. Deficiencies found should be described in detail,

and if possible with photos, sketches, diagrams, maps and
other explanatory notes.

4. Early surveys should be reviewed so that the

current survey will determine the improvement in the former
deficiencies.

5. Recommendations should be consistent with the

current situations, facilities, resources available, and
most of all concomitant with the organization’s objectives
and goals. Time-phasing of the recommendations should be
also recommended especially on execution.
 311

CHAPTER

21

HUMAN RESOURCES IN SECURITY

AND SAFETY INDUSTRY

===========================================================

The Security Guard

The key element in the security survey system of a

plant or installations is the human guard. Without this
human element, all the mechanical, electrical, and
electronic protective aids, as well as security techniques
would be worthless. It is the human guard, as a part of the
security enforcement medium, who contributes the thought
processes and all the human senses to the security system.
The electronic device may sound the alarm, the television
camera may spot the culprit, and the mini-computer may
trigger the red button, but it is the guard responds and
initiates the necessary action.

Procedures in the Selection of Guards

The selection of the guards must be done with care and

meticulousness. The guard occupies an important slot in the
whole security system. Such a guard, to be effective and
useful, must be physically able, mentally alert, morally
responsible, reliable, and must be stable under pressure.
Above all, he must be responsive to his work to a point of
dedication.

The Company and the Contract Guards

There are two different ways in which security guards

are hired or employed. Those who are hired directly under
the payroll of an employer to protect the employer’s
property are called company guard, or “in-house” guards, and
they are considered employees of that company. Government
guards are included in this category.
 312

Other individuals or entities prefer to avail the

services of an outside firm providing security guards on
contract basis. These firms are the private security
agencies, specializing in providing trained security guards.
The security guards employed under contract are employees of
the agency.

In the local setting, there are more contract agency

guards than company or government guards. Their jobs are
all basically the same, the only difference are their
employers.

There are more contract guards from private security

agencies hired by government entities and privately owned
companies or corporations for the reasons that it is more
practical, less expensive, and with better trained
personnel.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Agency and Company Guards

1. Advantages of Agency Guard Force

1) More economical;

2) Security administrative problems are reduced;

3) Problems related to recruitment, pre-employment

investigation and training are eliminated;

4) Absenteeism and vacation leaves are eliminated;

5) Security personnel are separated from co-employee;

6) In case of accidents or deaths, the agency takes

care of the cumbersome details;

7) In case of emergencies, extra guards are easily

available, and

8) In case of company strikes, the agency guards will

be on duty to carry out their assigned duties.

2. Disadvantages of Agency Guard Force

 313

1) Lack of training;

2) Low-caliber employees;

3) No company loyalty;

4) Project poor image;

5) Large turn-over, and

6) Not familiar with plans.

3. Advantages of Company Guard Force

1) Generally high caliber as they receive higher

wages;

2) Generally, they provide better services;

3) Can be trained to handle some of the more complex

security duties;

4) Less turn over;

5) They are more familiar with facilities that they

protect, and

6) They tend to be loyal to the company of which they

are a part.

4. Disadvantages of Company Guard Force

1) Cost more;

2) May be required to join a guard union, and

3) Problem of ensuring availability of back-up

personnel.

Importance of Training to Security Guards

 314

Security organization which does not have an adequate

and continuing training program for its personnel will not
be able to offer efficient and reliable security services.
It is not only dangerous but a criminal act to assign a
guard who has not been properly indoctrinated and trained.
Although the extent and type of training for guard forces
will vary according to the importance, type, vulnerability,
size, and other factors affecting a particular plant or
industrial complex, yet, there are basic subjects and skills
that guards must learn before performing their assigned
duties.

The untrained security guard may do unnecessary harm to

employees in the performance of his job. He may use his
firearm while a simple knowledge in martial arts will
suffice. It will require more untrained guards to perform
certain tasks, to meet the same situation than utilizing
trained ones. Efficient and continuing training is the
effective means in improving the proficiency of guard
personnel. Regardless of how careful the recruitment of
guards is made, seldom will they qualify for immediate guard
duty.

Besides, a trained guard may require re-orientation, if

not training, due to new or revised job requirements can be
gapped by proper training. Saving by limiting is poor
investment and a form of criminal negligence.

Benefits Derived from the Training of Security Guards

1. Good training helps provide for more flexibility

and better physical protection. Fewer personnel and less
time may be required for trained men to perform guard
requirements. Training also helps establish systematic and
uniform work habits. An effective program will help create
attitudes and improve morale.

2. Training in whatever form benefits the guard to

the extent that skills are upgraded which provides increased
opportunities for promotion, improves better understanding
of his relationship to management. Training also increases
self-confidence, and an ingredient needed for work
reliability.
 315

3. Training gives the supervisor better tools to do

his tasks efficiently among his guards. Due to increased
supervisory skills, less time is wasted and fewer mistakes
made. Resulting economies are to benefit the organization.
There will be smoother relations with other agencies. A
good program instills confidence which is an important asset
of the guard force.

The Security Officer

A security officer is charged with directing the work

and observing the behavior performance of the men under his
unit. The effective supervisor must posses the necessary
leadership, human understanding, and job knowledge to do his
work. The principal task of leadership within an
organization is to ensure that the efforts of all members
are estimated to capacity and effectively directed toward
the primary objectives of the organization.

The quality of leadership reflected in the appearance,

spirit, bearing, demeanor, words, action and work of
subordinates. Members of a unit under effective
supervisorship enjoys doing their work, hence, they are
proud of their organization, carry out instructions, and
request cheerfully and willingly, and work indefatigably for
long hours under comfortable conditions without question or
complaint.

In contrast, subordinates under inferior leadership are

frequently dissatisfied with their jobs, dislike their
duties, resent instructions and request from their
superiors, and avoid accepting new responsibilities. Good
leadership transforms indifferent, dissatisfied, disloyal,
and inefficient personnel into loyal, agreeable,
hardworking, interested, and efficient men who derived great
satisfaction in the accomplishment of their assigned tasks.

Goals of Security Officer

 316

The most important role that a security officer can do

is to create in each individual a sense of vigilance,
alertness, careful thinking, and the ability to recognize
and report all security infractions to the proper
authorities and make spot corrections of minor security
violations in order that remedial measures can be instituted
right away.

Security is an all-of-the-time job both for the

individual and the security officer. The security officer
must keep every member of his unit alerted to possible
dangers to security. He must stimulate interest in a
security program and generate the willingness on the part of
every man and woman to be more careful in talking about his
or her job, handling classified information, or guarding
restricted areas. The individual must at all times careful,
alert and ready to act. And it is the goal of a security
officer.
 317

CHAPTER

22

REPUBLIC ACT NO. 5487

===========================================================

What is Republic Act No. 5487

This is an “Act to Regulate the Organization and

Operation of Private Detective, Watchman or Security Guards
Agencies” or the “Private Security Agency Law,” approved and
took effect on 13 June 1969, as amended by PD No. 11, dated
03 October 1972, PD No. 100, dated 17 January 1973, PD No.
1919, and EO No. 393, dated 10 May 1972.

Who is In-Charge with the Implementation of RA No. 5487

The Chief, Philippine National Police (C, PNP) through

the SAGSD, CSG or the former Supervisory Office for Security
and Investigative Agencies, Civil Security Unit (SOSIA, CSU)
as provided by Sec. 35, RA No. 6975, in close coordination
with PADPAO, Inc.

SAGSD is an administrative support unit of the PNP

which is in charge with the supervision, direction and
control of all Private Security Agencies (PSA) and Private
Detective Agencies in the country. The Group Director (CG,
CSG) acts in the name of the C, PNP on matters, duties, and
powers delegated by him to the latter.

Definition of a “Person,” as Provided by RA No. 5487

As used in RA 5487, a person shall include not

only natural persons but also a juridical person such as
corporation, partnership, company or association duly
registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission
(SEC).
 318

Who are the Watchmen or Security Guards

They are any persons who offers or renders personal

service to watch or secure either residential or business
establishment, or both, or any building, compound, or area,
including, but not limited to, logging concessions,
agricultural mining or pasture lands, for hire or
compensation, or as an employee thereof, including any
employee of the national or local government or any agency
or instrumentality thereof and of government-owned or
controlled firms or corporations, who is employed to watch
or secure government buildings, compounds, premises and
other properties other than members of the Armed Forces of
the Philippines, guards of the Bureau of Prisons, Provincial
and City Jail Guards, and members of city and municipal
police forces.

Who are the Private Detectives

A private detectives are any persons who are not a

member of a regular police agency or the Armed Forces of the
Philippines who does detective work for hire, reward, or
commission.

What is a Private Detective Agency

A PDA is any person who for hire or reward or on

commission, conducts or carries on or holds himself out as
conducting or carrying on a detective agency or detective
service.

What is a Private Security Agency

Any person, association, partnership, firm or private

corporation, who/which recruit, trains, furnishes, or
employs any watchman or security guard, or solicits
individual, business firm, private, public or government-
owned or controlled corporation to engage his/its watchmen
or security guards.
 319

License to Exercise Security and Detective Profession

License or certificate to exercise profession is any

document issued by the C, PNP or his duly authorized
representative recognizing a person to be qualified to
perform his duties as security guard or detective.

License to Operate a Security and Detective Agency

It is a document issued by the C, PNP or his duly

authorized representative authorizing a person to engage in
the occupation, calling or employment as security guard or
detective, or a juridical person to establish, engage,
direct, manage or operate an individual or a private
detective agency, private security agency or company
security force after payment of the prescribed dues or fees.

What is a Company Security Force

It is a security force maintained and operated by any

private company/corporation for its own security
requirements.

What is a Government Security Unit

It is a security unit maintained and operated by any

government entity other than military and/or police, which
is established and maintained for the purpose of securing
the office or compound and/or extension of the government
entity.

What do you mean by the term PADPAO, Inc.

The term PADPAO, Inc., means Philippine Association of

Detectives and Private Agencies, Incorporated, the umbrella
organization for PSA and PDA.

What do your mean by the term SAGSD, CSG, PNP

 320

The term SAGSD, CSG, PNP, means Security Agency and

Guards Supervisory Division, Civil Security Group,
Philippine National Police, a government agency involved in
the personal supervision of the affairs of the PSA and PDA.

What are the Branches of SAGSD, CSG, PNP

The branches of the SAGSD, CSG, PNP are as follows: 1)

Administrative Branch; 2) Operations Branch; 3) Research,
Records & Statistics Branch; AND 4) Special Action Branch.

Who May Organize and Maintain PSA and PDA

Any Filipino citizen or a corporation, partnership, or

association, one hundred percent of which is owned and
controlled by Filipino citizens may organize and maintain a
private security agency or private detective agency.

Basic Requirements of Operator or Manager of PSA and PDA

The operator or manager of an agency including managers

of branch offices, must be a Filipino citizen, shall not be
less than 25 years of age, a college graduate and/or a
commissioned officer in the inactive service or retired from
the Armed Forces of the Philippines or the Philippine
National Police, or graduated/taken a course in concepts and
methods in Industrial Security and Security Management
and/or must have adequate training or experience in security
business, of good moral character, not having been convicted
of any crime involving moral turpitude and not suffering
from any of the following disqualifications:

1. Dishonorably discharged or separated from the

Armed Forces of the Philippines or Philippine National
Police or separated for cause from any government entity or
government-owned or controlled corporations;

2. Being mentally incompetent;

3. Being physically unfit;

 321

4. Addicted to the use of narcotic and/or prohibited

drugs and/or substances;

5. Habitual drunkard or alcoholic

6. Elective or appointive government employees who

may be called upon on account of the functions of their
respective offices in the implementation and enforcement of
the provisions of RA 5487, and any person related to such
government employees by affinity or consanguinity in the
third civil degree shall not hold any interest, directly or
indirectly in any security guard or watchman agency on
account of the functions of their respective offices in the
implementation and enforcement of the provisions of RA 5487
as amended, and the rules and regulations implementing the
Private Security Agency Law.

Typical Organizational Structure of PSA, PDA, CSF and GSU

1. Private security agencies shall conform with the

organizational structure, personnel, equipment, training and
clothing as provided for in RA 5487, as amended and its
implementing rules and regulations. The initial; requirement
of 100 guards shall be contracted during the 1 st year of
operation until the 200 guards minimum requirement shall
have been complied with for the succeeding year of
operation.

2. Company security forces shall be organized to

conform substantially with the organizational structure
prescribed for private security agencies.

3. Government security unit shall be organized to

conform with the organizational structure of the government
firm but not contrary to the organizational structure as
prescribed for private security agencies.

Where are the Main/Branch Offices of PSA, PDA, CSF and GSU

All agencies shall maintain a main office in their

registered addresses. Branch offices shall be established
and maintained in other provinces/cities where they have at
least an initial employment of 10 guards during the 1st year
 322

until the 30 minimum guard requirement shall have been

complied in the 3rd year operation. Branch offices
established in region outside NCR shall be required to
register their presence at SAGS District Office and Regional
PADPAO.

What is a Security Service Contract

Private security agencies shall render security

services to their clients only after a service contract duly
notarized shall have been executed between them. Such
contract must stipulate among other things; the money
consideration to be paid by the client to the agency; the
number of hours of security service per guard per day which
the guard himself shall render to the client, and the salary
each individual security guard shall received from agency.

What is the Tenure of Security Personnel

The tenure of security personnel shall be co-terminus

with the service contract between the PSA and the client.
However, the services of any security personnel shall be
terminated on the following grounds:

1. Expiration of contracts;

2. Revocation of license to exercise profession;

3. Conviction of crime involving moral turpitude;

4. Loss of trust and confidence;

5. Physical and mental disability, and

6. Any other violation of the pertinent rules and

regulations.

The Term “Payrolls” as Provided by RA No. 5487

 323

Private security agencies shall prepare payroll with

the name of security guards arranged alphabetically and
numbered consecutively. These payrolls shall be personally
signed by the payees only after receipt of the amounts shown
therein. Separate payrolls for distant detachments/posts
shall be prepared and similarly signed by the payees or his
duly authorized representatives as the case maybe. Payrolls
shall be filed with the main office within 15 days after pay
day. The use of the payroll form shall be in accordance
with the standard format as prescribed by law.

Qualifications of a Watchmen or Security Guards

No person shall be licensed as Security Guard unless he

possesses the following qualifications:

1. Filipino citizen;

2. High school graduate;

3. Physically and mentally fit;

4. At least eighteen (18) years of age but not more

than fifty (50) years old;

5. Has undergone pre-licensing training course, and

6. Must not possess any disqualification

Foreigner or any another person who was already

employed as security guard or private detective prior to the
approval of RA 5487, as amended, shall not be subject to
the above qualifications.

The qualifications of a government security guard who

shall apply for license to exercise his/her profession shall
be as prescribed by the implementing rules and regulations.

Person Exempted from the Pre-licensing Training

1. Veterans and retired military/police personnel or

honorably discharged military/police personnel possessing
 324

all the qualifications mentioned shall be exempted from pre-

licensing seminar which is a requirement for the issuance of
license to exercise profession as a security guard;

2. Graduates of ROTC advance/basic, and/or its

equivalent in the AFP, CAFGU/CHDF, or its equivalent in the
PNP. Training graduates shall be exempted from the required
basic licensing seminar.

What are the Qualifications of a Private Detective

No person shall be licensed as a private detective,

unless, in addition to the initial qualifications, shall
possesses the following:

1. Holder of a baccalaureate degree of Bachelor of

Law, or

2. Holder of a degree of Bachelor of Science in

Criminology, or

3. Graduate of a Criminal Investigation Course

offered by the then PC/INP or the NBI or any police training
school or detective training with authorized/recognized
training center for security guard.

4) Advance ROTC/CMT graduates.

What is the General Scope of Detective Work

A Private Detective shall operate on a covert type of

mission on a specific confidential order issued by his
agency. The nature of his mission may defend on the
contract between the client and the detective agency. It
shall include:

1. Personal Security Investigation/Background

Investigation;
2. Locating missing persons;

3. Surveillance work, and

 325

4. Such other detective work as may become the

subject of contract between the agency and its clients
provided it is not contrary to law, public order, public
policy, morale and good custom.

What is the Territorial Power of the Security Guard

A security guard shall watch and secure the property of

the person, firm or establishment with whom he is or his
agency has a contract for security services. Such services
shall not however, extend beyond the property or compound of
said person, firm or establishment except when required by
the latter in accordance with the terms of their contract to
escort big sums of money or valuables or in some cases, in
hot pursuit of criminal offenders.

What are the Qualifications of Security Officers

No person shall be licensed as a security officer

unless he has the following qualifications:

1. Filipino citizen,

2. Holder of baccalaureate degree;

3. Physically and mentally fit;

4. Has graduated from security officer training

course;

5. Retired personnel of the PNP or AFP; and

6. Must not possess any disqualifications;

What are the Basic Requisites in Applying for License

1. Any person possessing all the qualifications and

none of the disqualifications, may apply for a license or
license certificate to engage in the occupation, calling or
employment as certified guard or private detective.
 326

2. Any person qualified under the rule to engage in

business of private security agency or private detective
agency may file a license to operate.

3. Applicants for Private Security Agency license to

operate shall be required to present a minimum
capitalization of one million pesos (P1,000,000.00) and a
minimum bank deposit of five hundred thousand pesos
(P500,000.00) in order to start its business operation.

Where an Application for License to Exercise Profession or

Permit to Operate a PSA, PDA, CSF and GSU can be Filed

The application to operate a private security

agency/company guard force shall be filed with the office of
the C, PNP thru the C, SAGSD using SAGSD Form No. 01-94 and
SAGSD Form No. 02-94, respectively.

What is the Graduated Scale of License for PSA and PDA

The issuance of license to operate a private security

agency and private detective agency shall conform with the
following graduated scale which shall be approved by the C,
PNP or his duly authorized representatives.

1. PSAs with temporary license to operate having 200

guards or more but not exceeding 1,000 shall be issued a
regular license to operate good for 2 years.

2. New PSAs shall be issued a temporary license to

operate good for 1 year.

3. PSAs with temporary license to operate having

posted 100 guards or more but less than 200 guards shall
upon expiration of such license be issued an extension
period to operate good for 6 months period. No additional
extension of license shall be granted unless the PSAs
concerned shall submit a certification for the posting of at
least an additional 50 guards thereby making a total of 150
or more guards.
4. PSAs with extended temporary license to operate
shall upon expiration of such license but still fail to
comply the 200 guards requirement, shall be granted
 327

additional extension of another 6 month period in order to

complete the 200 guards requirement for the issuance of a
regular license. Otherwise, failure to comply with the 200
guards requirement, shall serve as a basis for the issuance
of cease operation order.

5. License of PSAs which less than 100 guards shall

not be renewed after 1 year of operation.

6. PSAs with cancelled/revoked licenses shall cease

to operate, and within 7 days after having been duly
notified of such cease operation order, shall immediately
deposit all its firearms with the Firearms and Explosive
Division or the ROPD. Thereafter, the C, ROPD shall conduct
an inventory of surrendered firearms which shall receipted,
copy furnished C, SAGSD. Failure of the PSA concerned to
comply shall be liable under PD 1866.

What are the Penalties for Violation of the IRR of RA No.

5487

Without prejudice in the filing of the appropriate

criminal action, the following penalties shall be imposed
after investigation of any guard or detective, private
security guard agency or company security service and
thereafter found guilty of committing any of these offenses
enumerated:

1. For Light Offense

One (1) to thirty (30) days suspension or a fine

ranging from one hundred pesos minimum to five hundred pesos
maximum (P100.00 – P500.00) or both..

2. For Less Grave Offense

One (1) month and one (1) day to six (6) months
suspension or a fine ranging from five hundred pesos minimum
to one thousand pesos maximum (P500.00 – P1,000.00) or both,
and

3. For Grave Offenses

 328

Six (6) months and one (1) day to one (1) year
suspension or a fine ranging from ten thousand pesos minimum
to fifty thousand pesos maximum (P10,000.00 – P50,000.00),or
both or cancellation of license permit.

Summary Power of the Chief, PNP as Provided by RA No. 5487

The Chief, PNP may at any time suspend or cancel the

licenses/permits of private watchman/detective or security
guard agency found violating any of the provisions of RA
5487, as amended, and the Rules and Regulations promulgated
by the Chief, PNP pursuant thereto. The Chief, PNP upon
prior recommendation of PADPAO as concurred by the Director
CSG through SAGSD, may refuse issuance or renewal of
license/permit to operate to any security agency and/or
security guard summarily found to have violated the
provision of RA 5487 and its implementing rules and
regulations.
 329

REVIEW QUESTIONS

SECURITY & SAFETY MANAGEMENT

==================================================================

INSTRUCTIONS: Select the correct answer for each of the following

questions.

1. It is a physical security applied to business groups engaged

in industries, like manufacturing, assembling, research and
development, processing, warehousing and even agriculture.

A. operational security B. industrial security

C. physical security D. special types

2. It is the broadest branch of security which is concerned

with the physical measures to prevent unauthorized access.

A. operational security B. industrial security

C. physical security D. special types

3. Are the acts or conditions affecting the safe operation of

the facility caused by human action, accidental or intentional.

A. security hazards B. man-made hazard

C. natural hazard D. all of the above

4. Are those caused by natural phenomena which caused damage,

disturbance and problems of the normal functioning of human
activities, including security.

A. security hazards B. man-made hazard

C. natural hazard D. all of the above

5. It is the importance of the firm with reference to the

national economy and security.

A. relative criticality B. relative vulnerability

C. all of the above D. non of the above

6. One who steals with pre-conceived plans and takes away any
of all types of items or supplies for economic gain.

A. pilferer B. casual pilferer

C. systematic pilferer D. intruder
 330

7. A medium of structure which defines the physical limits of

an installations to restrict or impede access thereto.

A. natural barrier B. man-made barrier

C. perimeter barrier D. physical security

8. It is a type of perimeter barrier made of chain link with

mesh openings not larger that two inches square, and made or #9
gauge wire or heavier.

A. clear zone B. bodies of water

C. building wall D. wire fence

9. It surmounted by the barbed wire top guards, and if the

height is less than the prescribed, additional topping is placed
to attain the minimum height requirement.

A. clear zone B. bodies of water

C. building wall D. wire fence

10. An unobstructed area maintained on both sides of the

perimeter barrier.

A. clear zone B. bodies of water

C. building wall D. wire fence

11. He may issue or revoke licenses issued to security guards.

A. Chief, PNP B. Mayor

C. Governor D. Secretary, DILG

12. It is an additional overhang barbed wire placed on vertical

perimeter fences facing upward and outward with a 45 degree angle
with three to four strand of barbed wire.

A. topping B. top guard

C. all of the above D. non of the above

13. Are house like structure above the perimeter barriers, it

give psychological effect to violators.

A. guard towers B. sentry

C. guard house D. guard post

14. A conference or dialogue between the survey team and

management officials before security survey is conducted.

A. security survey B. special survey

C. entrance conference D. exit conference
 331

15. It is a fact finding probe to determine a plant’s adequacy

and deficiency in all aspects of security.

A. security inspections B. security survey

C. special survey D. supplemental survey

16. It is the exposure and teaching of employees on security and

its relevance to their work.

A. security education B. security indoctrination

C. security training D. security awareness

17. It is an authenticated list of personnel given to security

allowing entry to a compound or installation thereof.

A. controlling B. access list

C. exclusion area D. controlled area

18. Any area, access to which is subject to special restriction

control.

A. restricted area B. exclusion area

C. controlled area D. coverage factor

19. A restricted area containing materials or operation of

security interest.

A. restricted area B. exclusion area

C. controlled area D. coverage factor

20. It is the key elements in the security survey system of a

plant or installation.

A. security guard B. human guard

C. company guard D. agency guard

21. It is a term used in England for lock pickers, safecrackers,

and penetrators of restricted rooms or areas.

A. doppler effect B. duress code

C. Peterman D. fail safe

22. A term applied to a device or system that in the event of

failure or a component, the incapacity will be signaled.

A. doppler effect B. duress code

C. Peterman D. fail safe
 332

23. It is a practical test of a plan or any activity to test its

validity, it is also an operational readiness exercise.

A. dry run B. run through

C. controlling D. fire drill

24. A system of personnel movement and control whereby badges or

identification are issued to personnel upon entering an
installations.

A. badge system B. identification system

C. pass system D. badge and pass system

25. It is the susceptibility of the plant or establishment to

damage, loss or disruption of operation due to various hazard.

A. relative criticality B. relative vulnerability

C. all of the above D. non of the above

26. It includes records that are irreplaceable, reproduction of

which does not have the same value as the original records.

A. useful records B. vital records

C. important records D. non-essential records

27. How is one classified if he steals primarily because of

irresistible urge due to unexpected opportunity?

A. casual pilferer B. ordinary pilferer

C. systematic D. unusual pilferer

28. The extinguishment of fire by using water solution, and the

temperature is lowered below the burning point.

A. smothering B. starving
C. cooling D. all of the above

29. It is a type of built-in sprinklers which works by the

increase of room temperature, and which automatically operates
the system to put out the fire.

A. wet pipe system B. automatic sprinklers

C. dry pipe system D. stand pipe system

30. These fire results from the burning of wood, paper, textiles
and other carbonaceous materials.

A. Class “A” Fires B. Class “B” Fires

C. Class “C” Fires D Class “D” Fires
 333

31. Private Security Agencies must be registered at what

government agency.

A. DTI B. PNP
C. SEC D. LGU

32. It is the minimum guard requirements for the issuance of

temporary license.

A. 100 B. 1,000
C. 50 D. 200

33. The regular license is good for how many years?

A. 1 year B. 2 years
C. 6 months D. 1 year & 6 months

34. It is the minimum capitalization for PSA.

A. P1,000,000.00 B. P500,000.00
C. P100,000.00 D. non of the above

35. It is the required minimum number of guards to operate

company security forces.

A. 30 B. 200
C. 50 D. 100

36. A PSA with 200 to 499 guards shall pay how much amount of
surety bond to a reputable insurance company.

A. P50,000.00 B. P100,000.00
C. P150,000.00 D. P200,000.00

37. PSAs with 100 guards must initially procure at least how
many firearms for use of its security guards.

A. 10 B. 20
C. 30 D. 70

38. PSAs who have been applying for regular license to operate
must have at least ___ pieces of licensed firearms.

A. 10 B. 20
C. 30 D. 70
 334

39. The stock of ammunitions of the PSAs shall not exceed a

basic load of how many rounds per unit of duly licensed firearms.

A. 20 B. 12
C. 50 D. 25

40. This is quantity of ammunitions to be issued to individual

security guards.

A. 20 B. 12
C. 50 D. 25

41. It is the only instances wherein PDAs & PSAs may be allowed
to use high powered firearms.

A. upsurge of lawlessness and criminality

B. upsurge of bank and armored bank robbery
C. transporting big amount of money
D. providing security to VIPs

42. The prescribed high-powered firearms not exceed how many

percent of the total number of guards employed.

A. 5% B. 10%
C. 15% D. 20%

43. These are the qualifications of a licensed watchman or

security guard, EXCEPT:

A. high school graduate

B. physically & mentally fit
C. 18 to 50 years of age
D. without pre-licensing training

44. It is the key element in the security survey system of a

plant or installation.

A. security guard B. human guard

C. security equipment D. security system

45. There are two different ways in which security guards are
hired or employed, the company guard and the other one is:

A. government guards B. private security agency

C. propriety guards D. in-house guards
 335

46. This is an Act to Regulate the Organization and Operation of

PDAs/PSAs/CSFs/GSUs.

A. PD 1919 B. EO 393
C. RA 5487 D. PD 100

47. They are any person who offers or renders personal service
to watch or secure either residential or business establishment
or both.

A. private detective B. security guards

C. propriety guards D. company guards

48. Are any person who is not a member of the AFP or PNP, but
involved in detective work.

A. private detective B. security guards

C. propriety guards D. company guards

49. It is any person who for hire or reward or on commission,

conducts or carries on or holds himself out in carrying detective
works.

A. PDA B. PSA
C. GSU D. CSF

50. It is any person, association, partnership, firm or private

corporation that employs any watchman or guards.

A. PDA B. PSA
C. GSU D. CSF

51. It is a security force maintained and operated by the

private company/corporation for its own protection and security
requirements.

A. PDA B. PSA
C. GSU D. CSF

52. It is a security unit maintained and operated by any

government entity other than military or police.

A. PDA B. PSA
C. GSU D. CSF

53. It is the umbrella organization for PDA and PSA.

A. PADPAO, Inc. B. SAGSD

C. SEC D. PNP
 336

54. It is a government agency involved in the supervision of the

internal affairs of the PSAs, PDAs, CSFs and GSUs.

A. PADPAO, Inc. B. SAGSD

C. SEC D. PNP

55. It is the age requirement for the operator or manager of

PSA, PDA, CSF, and GSU.

A. 25 years B. 30 years
C. 35 years D. 20 years

56. It is the initial number of guard requirements that must be

contracted for the 1st year of operation of PSA.

A. 100 B. 200
C. 1,000 D. 50

57. What is the minimum number of guard requirements in the

operation of branch offices of PSA.

A. 20 B. 30
C. 10 D. 40

58. __________ are included in the category of in-house guards.

A. government guards B. private security agency

C. propriety guards D. all of the above

59. It is charge with the directing the work and observing the
behavior performance of the men under his unit.

A. security guard B. security supervisor

C. watchman D. security officer

60. The following items must be stipulated in the security

service contract, EXCEPT:

A. money consideration
B. number of hours of security service
C. salary of the security guard
D. commission of the operator

61. It is the effectivity date of the Implementing Rules an

Regulations of R.A. 5487.

A. August 18, 1994 B. October 8, 1994

C. August 28, 1984 D. August 8, 1984
 337

62. It is administrative sanctions that can be imposed to any

applicant who failed to submit the complete requirements in the
renewal of license.

A. cancellation B. revocation
C. nullification D. suspension

63. It shall apply to all PDAs/PSAs/CSFs/GSUs throughout the

Philippines.

A. Private Scty. Law B. RA 5487

C. IRR of RA 5487 D. all of the above

64. It refers to the Summary Power of the Chief, PNP as provided

by R.A. 5487.

A. suspension of license B. cancellation of license

C. all of the above D. non of the above

65. It is the established rules and regulations in the operation

of GSUs, EXCEPT:

A. registration at SAGSD B. registration at CSG

C. both A & B D. registration at SEC

66. Any member of the GSUs shall be required to secure a

__________ to exercise profession at SAGSD.

A. permit B. authority
C. registration D. license

67. How many days prior expiry month of license shall require
PSL holders to undergo NP examinations.

A. 60 days B. 30 days
C. 45 days D. 15 days

68. Neuro-Psychiatric Clearance shall be issued by the

accredited testing centers within how many days after the date of
examination.

A. 60 days B. 30 days
C. 45 days D. 15 days

69. Moribund but previously licensed security agency, means:

A. dying PSA B. viable PSA

C. new PSA D. renewing PSA
 338

70. It refers to the requirements for application for licenses

as security officers, guards, and operators.

A. physical & mental examination

B. medical & dental examination
C. physical agility test examination
D. drug test examination

71. It is an administrative fine to be imposed PSAs/CSFs that

committed for the third offense of posting security personnel not
in uniform.

A. P500.00/guard B. P100.00/guard
C. P250.00/guard D. cancellation of license

72. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards found drunk while on duty.

A. P500.00/guard B. P100.00/guard
C. P250.00/guard D. cancellation of license

73. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards displaying discourteous or rude manner in the performance
of duty.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

74. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards who are assisting criminals.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

75. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards providing confidential information to unauthorized person.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

76. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards apprehended for alarm and scandal.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license
 339

77. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards firing his issued firearms indiscriminately.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

78. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards leaving his post without being properly relived.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

79. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards who are exposing the lives and properties he is supposed
to protect in danger.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

80. It is an administrative penalty to be imposed to security

guards who failure to notify the proper authority on any sign of
impeding disorders.

A. 5 days suspension B. 15 days suspension

C. 30 days suspension D. cancellation of license

81. It is an administrative fine to be imposed PSAs/CSFs that

committed for the second offense of posting security personnel
not carrying the ID, PSL, FALs and DDO.

A. P500.00/guard B. P100.00/guard
C. P250.00/guard D. cancellation of license

82. It is an administrative fine to be imposed PSAs/CSFs that

committed for the first offense of posting security personnel not
covered by written contract.

A. P500.00/guard B. P100.00/guard
C. P250.00/guard D. cancellation of license

83. It is an administrative fine to be imposed PSAs/CSFs that

committed for the third offense that are imposing and collecting
unauthorized deductions.

A. P500.00/guard B. P100.00/guard
C. P250.00/guard D. cancellation of license
 340

84. It is an administrative fine to be imposed PSAs/CSFs that

failed to submit application and requirements for renewal for
license.

A. P500.00/guard B. P100.00/guard
C. P250.00/guard D. P250.00 plus P50.00/day

85. Blue Guard Medal Valor is awarded by whom?

A. SILG B. C, PNP
C. PD, PPO D. RD, PRO 3

86. Letter of Commendation to PSGs is awarded by whom?

A. PSAs Operators B. CSF Managers

C. all of the above D. non of the above

87. It shall be submitted immediately after graduation to the C,

PNP.

A. closing reports B. opening reports

C. participants D. name of course

88. It is required to the License to Operate PSAs/CSFs.

A. displayed B. carried
C. registered D. all of the above

89. Merger of PSAs/PDAs is commonly known as ______ in the

industrial security management.

A. Kabit System B. Illegal Operation

C. Merger of Security D. Moribund Security

90. It is no anymore required to PSAs/PDAs securing temporary

license to operate.

A. pre-inspection B. post-inspection
C. inspection D. continuing inspection

91. It shall not be issued unless prior inspection is conducted

to the applicant agency.

A. regular license B. temporary license

C. license to operate D. permit to operate
 341

92. These are the classifications of offenses as prescribed by

the IRR of R.A. 5487, EXCEPT:

A. serious offense B. light offense

C. grave offense D. less grave offense

93. It is the impossible penalty for light offenses in violation

of IRR of R.A. 5487.

A. 1 day- 30 days susp. or P100.00 – P500.00 fine

B. 1 mo.- 6 mos. susp. or P500.00 - P1,000.00 fine
C. 6 mos.– 1 yr. susp. or P10,000.00-P50,000.00
D. non of the above

94. It is the impossible penalty for less grave offenses in

violation of IRR of R.A. 5487.

A. 1 day- 30 days susp. or P100.00 – P500.00 fine

B. 1 mo.- 6 mos. susp. or P500.00 - P1,000.00 fine
C. 6 mos.– 1 yr. susp. or P10,000.00-P50,000.00
D. non of the above

95. It is the impossible penalty for grave offenses in violation

of IRR of R.A. 5487.

A. 1 day- 30 days susp. or P100.00 – P500.00 fine

B. 1 mo.- 6 mos. susp. or P500.00 - P1,000.00 fine
C. 6 mos.– 1 yr. susp. or P10,000.00-P50,000.00
D. non of the above

96. They have the authority to conduct inspection to

PSAs/PDAs/CSFs/GSUs, EXECPT:

A. C, SAGSD B. C, ROPD
C. PD, PPO D. SAGSD Officer

97. The administrative penalty is prescribed by what particular

provision of the “Private Security Law.”

A. Sec. 8, RA 5487 B. Sec. 38, RA 5487

C. Sec. 28, RA 5487 D. Sec. 48, RA 5487

98. These are authorized to conduct investigation on all

complaints against securities of PSAs or detective of PDAs.

A. C, ROPD B. Inves. Comm., CSG

C. all of the above D. non of the above
 342

99. It must be avoided by the private security personnel, either

physically or otherwise with the strikers.

A. direct contact B. indirect contact

C. confrontation D. carrying of firearms

100. The City or Municipal Mayors has the power to muster or

_________ the members of the agency in case of emergency or in
times of disasters or calamity.

A. organize B. incorporate
C. utilize D. deputize
 343

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Adams, Thomas F., Police Field Operations, Second Edition,

(New Jersey, USA: Prentice Hall, Inc., 1990).

Benatiro, Hiram C., Editor-In-Chief, The Private Security

Industry and the Security Agencies & Guards Supervisory
Division, (Fairview, Quezon City: Citrend Trading and
Printing Services, October 1, 1999).

Barnhart, Clarence L. and Robert K. Barnhart, Editor, The

World Book Dictionary, Volume I, (Illinois, USA: World
Book, Inc., 1990).

Cael, Basilio G., and Juan L. Agas, A Guide to Criminal

Investigation, Quiapo, Manila: Mary Jo Publishing
House, Inc., 2000).

Carter, David C. and Louis M. Radelet, The Police and the

Community, Sixth Edition, (Ohio, USA: Prentice
Hall,Inc., 1999

Cole, George F., The American System of Criminal Justice,

(Pacific Grove, California: Brooks & Cole Publishing
Company, 1992).

Coronel, Miguel G., People Empowerment Against Crime,

(Espana, Manila: Zita Publishing Compnay, 1996).

Corvera, Edwin I., First Responder’s Manual, (Quezon City:

Directorate for Human Resource and Doctrine
Development, NHQ, PNP, 2000).

Conklin, John E., Criminology, 6th ed., (Needham Heights,

MA: A Viacom Company, 1998).

Cunningham, William C., The Growing Role of Private

Security, (Washington DC: National Institute of
Justice, United States Department of Justice,
Government Printing Office, 1984).

De Leon, Sixto O., Handbook on Police Intelligence, (Manila:

Manila Press, Inc., 1982).
 344

De Leon, Sixto O., Security Defense Against Crime, (Manila:

Manila Press, Inc., 1976).

Fitzgerald, Maurice J., Handbook of Criminal Investigation,

(New York, USA: Greenberg Publisher, 1951).

Geller, William A., Editor, Local Government Police

Management, Third Edition, (Washington DC, USA:
International City/County Management Association,
1991).

Goldstein, Herman C., Study on the Common Wisdom of

Policing, (New York, USA: MCGraw-Hill Book Company,
1997).

Hewitt, William H., Police Records Administration, (New

York, USA: Aqueduct Books, 1968).

Iannone, N.F, Supervision of Police Personnel, Fourth

Edition, (New Jersey, USA: Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
1985).

Jardiniano, Pascual F., Police Manual on Public

Accountability, (Manila: PFJ Publishing Co. 1990).

Leonard, V.A. and Harry W. More, Police Organization and

Management, Fifth Edition, (New York, USA: The
Foundation Press, Inc., 1984).

Lyman, Michael D., Criminal Investigation: The Art & The

Science, Second Edition, (New Jersey, USA: Prentice
Hall, Inc., 1999).

Lapuz, Ismael D., Security Officer’s Manual, (Buendia,

Makati City: National Intelligence Coordinating Agency,
1967).

Managuelod, Lucas M., Criminal Investigation, (Quezon City:

Criminal Investigation and Detection Group, HPNP,
1999).

Maniwang, Jose B., Manual for Security Guards, (Quezon City:

TM Specialist Press, 1995).
 345

Marcos, Ferdinand E., Republic Act No. 5487, (Malacanang,

Manila: Office of the President of the Republic of the
Philippines, June 13, 1969).

Marenin, Otwin G., Editor, Policing Change, Changing Police

International Perspectives, (New York, New York:
Garland Publishing, Inc., 1996).

Newman, Donald J. & Patrick R. Anderson, Introduction to

Criminal Justice, Fourth Edition, (New York, USA:
Random House, Inc., 1999).

Nolledo, Jose N., Handbook on the Philippine National

Police, First Edition, (Tandang Sora, Kalookan City:
Philippine Graphic Arts, Inc., 1995).

O’Hara, Charles F., Fundamentals of Criminal Investigation,

Second Edition, (Illinois, USA: Charles C. Thomas
Publisher, 1956).

Olson, James M., The Ten Commandments of Counter-

Intelligence: A Never Ending Necessity, http:www.
cia.gov/csi/studies/fall_winter_2001/article08.html.

Osterburg, James W. and Richard H. Ward, Criminal

Investigation: A Method for Reconstructing the Past,
(Ohio, USA: Andersons Publishing, Co., 1992).

Payton, George T., Patrol Procedure, Fourth Edition,

(California, USA: Legal Book Corp, 1971).

Post, Richard S., Security Administration: An Introduction,

(Springfield, Illinois: Charles C. Tomas Publishing
Co., 1970).

Pursley, Robert D., Introduction to Criminal Justice,

Fourth Edition, (New York, USA: Macmillan Publishing
Company, 1997).

Pfaltgraff, Robert L., Editor., Intelligence Policy and

Security, (Hamden, Connecticut: Archon Books, 1981).
 346

Reotutar, Wilfredo R., Organizational Effectiveness,

Efficiency and Productivity for the Philippine
National Police, First Edition, (Novalichez,
Quezon City: Programs Enterprises, 1999).

Republic Act No. 6975, An Act Establishing the Philippine

National Police Under the Reorganized Department of
Interior and Local Government and for Other Purposes.

Republic Act No. 8551, An Act Establishing the Reform and

Reorganization of the Philippine National Police and
for Other Purpose.

Roberg, Roy R. & Jack C. Kukendall, Police & Society,

(California, USA: Wadsworth Publishing Company, 1993).

Rosenbaum, Dennis P., Editor, Community Crime Prevention:

Sage Criminal Justice System Annual, Volume 22,
(Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications, Co., 1986).

Russel, Lewis A., Corporate and Industrial Security,

(Houston, Texas: Gulf Publishing Company, 1980).

Sarmiento, Recaredo A., Revised Rules and Regulations

Implementing R.A. No. 5487, “Act Governing the
Organization and Operation of Private Security
Agencies and Company Security Forces Throughout the
Philippines, as Amended,” (Quezon City: HNPNP, October
8, 1994).

Sarmiento, Recaredo II A., Rules of Engagement: Revised,

Quezon City: OCPNP, NHQ, PNP, 1997).

Schultz, Donald O. and Loran A. Norton, Police Operational

Intelligence, Revised Second Printing, (Illinois, USA:
Charles C. Thomas Publisher, 1971).

Security.tao.ca, Police Undercover Operations, http://

security.resist.ca/personal/informants2.shtml.

Sennewold, Charles A., Effective Security Management, (Los

Angeles, CA: Security World Publishing Co., Inc.,
1978).
 347

Sheaning, Clifford D., Private Security: Increasingly

Taking Law Enforcement Tasks, (Washington DC: Criminal
Justice Newsletter, 17 September 1991).

Reid, Sue Titus, Crime & Criminology, (New York, New York:
McGraw Hill Higher Education Group, 1997).
Tao, Hanzhang C., Zun Tsu’s Art of War: The Modern Chinese
Interpretation, (Great Britain, UK: Wordsworth
References, Ltd., 1993).

Vinarao, Vicente G., PNP Investigative Manual, (Quezon

City: Directorate for Investigation, NHQ, Philippine
National Police, 1992).

Wilson, Orlando W., Police Planning, Eight Edition,

(Illinois, USA: Charles C. Thomas Publisher, 1997).

__________, Counter Intelligence: Operational Programs,

http://www.csis-scrs.gc.ca/eng/operat/ ci_e.html.

__________, Handouts on Police Basic Intelligence Course,

(Quezon City: Quezon City: Intelligence Training Group,
Directorate for Intelligence, HPNP, 1998).

__________, Humint Employment Service—Jody Gorran on Going

Undercover in the Workplace, http://cp.yahoo.net/
search/ cache? p=cover+and+undercover+operations&=UTF-
8&cop=...

__________, The Intelligence Cycle, (Quezon City:

Intelligence Training Group, Directorate for
Intelligence, HPNP, 1996).

_______________, Combatting Terrorism, (Quezon City: C8

Division, GHQ, Philippine Constabulary, 1990).

_______________, Handbook on PNP Tiered Defense System

Against Terrorism, (Quezon City: Directorate for
Operations, NHQ, PNP, 2002).

_______________, National Security Council, Crisis

Management Manual, (Malacañang, Manila: Office of the
President, 2000).
 348

APPENDIX “A”

AUGUST 2003 BOARD EXAMINATION

Republic of the Philippines

PROFESSIONAL REGULATIONS COMMISSION
Manila

BOARD OF CRIMINOLOGY

CRIMINOLIGISTS Licensure Examination

Tuesday, August 5, 2003 01:30 p.m. – 04:00 p.m.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LAW ENFORCEMENT ADMINISTRATION SET B

INSTRUCTION: Select the correct answer for each of the following

question. Mark only one answer for each item by shading the box
corresponding to the letter of your choice on the answer sheet
provided. STRICTLY NO ERASURE ALLOWED. Use pencil no. 1 only.

MULTIPLE CHOICE

1. The importance of the firm or installation with reference to

the national economy or security:

A. relative security B. relative necessity

C. relative criticality D. relative vulnerability

2. These are the major courses of action that the organization

plans to take in order to achieve its objectives.

A. procedures B. strategies
C. plans D. objectives

3. In this form of authority, personnel do not give orders but

they offer advice. Frequently this advice is based on the high
level of expertise, but the advice carries no formal requirement
of acceptance.

A. democracy B. functional authority

C. line authority D. staff authority

4. The __________ means controlling the direction and flow of

decisions thorough unity of command from top to bottom
organization.

A. audit B. coordination
C. monitoring D. authority
 349

5. PO III Peter P. Factor PNP is assigned to collect available

information concerning the activities of the Red Scorpion Group
(RSG). He is with what unit of the police?

A. anti-juvenile delinquency
B. criminal investigation
C. intelligence operations
D. patrol activities

6. Intelligence can and should do nothing more than.

A. promote better police–citizen interaction

B. enhance the probability of accuracy in report writing
C. improve administrative efficiency particularly in
recruitment and selection
D. increase the number of arrests of criminal syndicate
members

7. PO III Juan D. Tupaz PNP submitted an intelligence report

evaluated as B-5. What does that mean?

A. information is usually from a reliable source and is

possibly true
B. information is usually from a reliable source and is
improbable
C. information is usually from a reliable source and is
probably true
D. information is usually from a reliable source and is
doubtfully true

8. The Neighborhood Team Policing exhibit the following

organizational features, EXCEPT:

A. unified delivery of services

B. low-level flexibility in decision making
C. combined investigation and patrol functions
D. unity of direction

9. Who may be automatically granted height waiver, as provided

under Section 15 of Republic Act No. 8551?

A. police retirables requesting for extension of service

B. member of the cultural minorities duly certified by
the appropriate government agency
C. government employees wishing to transfer to the PNP
D. graduates of Criminology
 350

10. These are plans which require action or assistance from

persons or agencies outside the police organization.

A. management plans B. operational plans

C. tactical plans D. extra-departmental plan

11. Protection of classified document concerning their

preparation, classification, reproduction, handling,
transmission, disposal and destruction.

A. document security B. operational security

C. physical security D. organizational security

12. What is the system of natural or man-made barriers placed

between the potential intruder and the objects, persons and
matters being protected?

A. document security B. communications security

C. physical security D. personnel security

13. Intelligence on the enemy and the characteristics of

operation used in the planning and conduct of tactical
operations.

A. military intelligence B. strategic intelligence

C. combat intelligence D. counter-intelligence

14. The effectiveness and efficiency of the pattern function can

be enhanced if there is detailed and up-to date information about
crime and criminals. This calls for the establishment of:

A. patrol base headquarters

B. crime information center
C. management information center
D. public information office

15. Planning cannot be undertaken without referring to _______

on the entire police organization, community, crime, equipment
inventories, personal data, etc.

A. costs B. data
C. plans D. statement

16. New employees should be briefed on security rules and

regulations of the organization and the importance of observing
them. This process is called:

A. security information B. security reminders

C. security orientation D. security investigation
 351

17. What plans require action or assistance from persons or

agencies outside the police organization?

A. tactical plan B. extra department plan

C. management plan D. all of these

18. This is a patrol program designed to ensure law abiding

citizens feeling of security but the reaction of fear for the
would be violators.

A. double-officer patrol B. single-officer patrol

C. low visibility patrol D. high visibility patrol

19. The transfer of heat from one material to another by direct

contact is called __________.

A. oxidation B. convection
C. conduction D. radiation

20. Developing security consciousness among policemen forms part

of enhancing __________.

A. line intelligence B. strategic intelligence

C. counter intelligence D. artificial intelligence

21. The National Police Commission is attached to the Department

of the Interior and Local Government (DILG) for __________.

A. administrative control
B. operational supervision
C. administration and control
D. policy and program coordination

22. How is one classified if he steals primarily because of

irresistible urge due to unexpected opportunity and little chance
of detection?

A. systematic pilferer B. ordinary pilferer

C. casual pilferer D. unusual pilferer

23. An appeal filed with the Napolcom Regional Appellate Board

(NAB) shall be decided within _____ days from receipt of the
notion of appeal.

A. fifty (50) B. twenty (20)

C. thirty (30) D. sixty (60)

24. In the intelligence functions, the black list includes

__________ forces.
 352

A. unwanted B. friendly
C. neutral D. unfriendly

25. The first step in the planning process is to recognize the

need to plan. Which of the following is NOT a way to discovering
the need to plan?

A. conduct of research B. conduct of training

C. conduct of inspection D. conduct of management audit

26. The special formations used in crowd control include the

wedge, diagonal and deployed line. When a crowd is small enough
not to require a squad, then the formation is:

A. diagonal B. wedge
C. deployed line D. clockwise

27. Under this principle, the chief executive directly controls

two to ten subordinates, who then control two to ten subordinates
each and so on until the bottom of the organization is reached

A. scalar principle B. exception principle

C. unity of command D. span of control

28. What is meant by an evaluation of C-1?

A. information comes from an unreliable source and is

probably true
B. information comes from a fairly reliable source and is
confirmed from other sources
C. information come an unreliable source and is
improbable
D. information comes from fairly reliable source and is
doubtfully true

29. Under physical security, what should be placed between the

prospective intruder and target installation?

A. Hazard B. Net
C. Risk D. Barrier

30. Mr. Jun de las Alas was born on June 1, 1975. Does he meet
the age requirement for entry to the police service in June 1999?
 353

A. No, but he can apply for age waiver

B. Yes, he is only 24 years old and is within the age
requirement
C. Yes, he meets the maximum education requirement
D. No, he has exceeded the maximum age requirement

31. A police officer who manages a police station must use all
of the following skills, EXCEPT

A. conceptual B. technical
C. interpersonal D. communication

32. The planning process generally consists of five (5) steps in

sequential order. Which is the first step?

A. formulation of details of the plan

B. recognition of the need to plan
C. setting up planning objectives
D. gathering and analysis of data

33. The __________ shift is usually the busiest of all patrol

shifts, often accounting for 40% to 50% of all calls for
service.

A. morning shift B. afternoon shift

C. midday shift D. night shift

34. These are barbed wires placed above a vertical fence in order
to increase physical protection of establishments or
installations

A. top tower B. top guard

C. cellar guard D. tower guard house

35. What is the next planning step after the need to plan is
recognized?

A. evaluate alternatives B. formulate the objective

C. execute the plan D. analyze the data

36. This type of patrol performs certain specific, predetermined

preventive strategies in a regular and systematic basis.

A. apprehension-oriented patrol
B. low visibility patrol
 354

C. split-force patrol
D. directed deterrent patrol

37. Among the following applicants for appointment to the police

service, who may be automatically granted height waiver?

A. government employees wishing to transfer to the PNP

B. members of cultural minorities duly certified by the
appropriate government agency
C. police retirables requesting for extension of service
D. graduates of criminology

38. The following changes must be made in police operating

procedures if the investigative skills of patrol personnel are to
be employed to their fullest advantage, EXCEPT

A. patrol supervisor should insist that patrol officers

simply make a brief report and return to
patrol duties’ rather than complete their
investigations
B. patrol officers should be better trained and equipped
to conduct routine investigations
C. patrol officers should be encouraged to devote more
time to the investigation of crimes to which
they respond
D. the patrol supervision should be able to provide the
patrol officer with assistance in determining
whether a case has sufficient merit to warrant
immediate follow-up investigation by the patrol
officer

39. The more complex the organization, the more highly

specialized the division of work, the greater the need for:

A. clearer delineation of functions

B. coordinating authority
C. strictly line discipline
D. finer division of supervision

40. The __________ differs from routine patrol methods in that

patrol officers perform certain specific, predetermined
preventive strategies on a regular and systematic basis.

A. low-visibility patrol
 355

b. directed Deterrent Patrol

C. split Force Patrol
D. apprehension-oriented Patrol

41. PO II Carlo Y. Alba and PO I Angelo S. Suba report only to

one (1) supervisor. This is the principle of ________________.

A. unity of command B. delegation of authority

C. span of control D. chain of command

42. PO III Serafin B. Alta frequents clubs, places of amusement

and entertainment known to be habitually visited by his subject
and his subject’s associates. PO III Alta’s undercover assignment
is called.

A. multiple assignment B. social assignment

C. work assignment D. dwelling assignment

43. Which of the following statements is FALSE?

A. classified information must not be discussed by one

friends and members of the family
B. classified information should be known only by one
person
C. cabinets with classified documents must be secured
with padlocks and security measures at all times.
D. all classified documents must be safeguarded

44. Assessing organizational strengths and witnesses is usually

known as:

A. force field analysis B. delphi techniques

C. simulation model D. forecasting

45. These regulations establish the specifications of uniform

and the manner in which they are to be worn:

A. personnel transaction regulations

B. firearms regulations
C. uniform regulations
D. equipment regulations

46. Police visibility in strategic and crime prone areas

projects __________ thus, an effective crime prevention strategy.

A. police omnipresence B. police effectiveness

B. police discretion D. police authority
 356

47. Which of the following trait or ability is most important

for a police officer?

A. personal integrity and honesty

B. physical stamina and bearing
C. courageous
D. high intelligence

48. In 2001, there were 200,450 crimes reported to the Police

Station of Municipality A. If the population of Municipality A is
5 Million, what is the crime rate?

A. 3509 D. 4010
C. 4250 D. 4009

49. If a complaint or incident is NOT fully disposed of as a

result of the first investigation, a __________ report should be
submitted

A. investigation report B. case disposition report

B. follow-up report D. crime report

50. The advantages of a strong patrol are more than make up for
slightly inferior performance. More patrolmen are then made
available for emergency and the more active and widespread the
patrol, the more apparent is their presence, thus, promoting the
impression of __________.

A. suspenseness B. effectiveness
C. omnipresence D. efficiency

51. What is the importance of a firm or installation in relation

to national security referred to?

A. relative security B. relative necessity

C. relative criticality D. relative vulnerability

52. When heat is transmitted by a circulating medium, the method

is called ________________.

A. radiation B. oxidation
C. convection D. conduction
53. The ____________ list includes and citizens who are cleared
to attend meeting in Malacañang.

A. white list B. black list

C. target list D. access list
 357

54. The attestation function over police appointment is vested

in the:

A. Civil Service Commission

B. National Police Commission
C. Professional Regulations Commission
D. Department of Interior and Local Government

55. Selling security within the organization sets and maintains

a climate of __________ and appreciation of the department’s
objectives.

A. participation B. clear
C. understanding D. collaboration

56. Mr. Jaime del S. Rio was born on May 1, 1975. Does he meet
the age requirement for entry to the police service in June 2002?

A. No, he has exceeded the minimum age requirement

B. Yes, he is only 27 years old and is within the age
requirement
C. No, but he can apply for age waiver
D. Yes, he meets the maximum education requirement

57. What is the evaluation of an intelligence report which is

“the information comes from a completely reliable source and is
probably true”?

A. B-2 B. A-2
C. A-3 D. B 1

58. In 2001, physical injuries numbered 12,500 out of a total

crime volume of 60,500. What percent of the total crime volume is
attributed to physical injuries?

A. 18.7% B. 20.7%
C. 25.7% D. 4.8%

59. Patrol officers are useful in crime solution if they are

properly trained in criminal investigation. Which of the
following cannot be undertaken by them?

A. He can locate and question the suspect if he

apprehends
B. He can identify available evidences
 358

C. He can take note of statements of the suspect

D. He can issue the treasury checks to fellow policemen

60. SPO I Edna E. Castro PNP evaluated the information gathered

as “completely reliable, source probably true”. What is the type
of evaluation?

A. A-5 B. A-1
C. A-4 D. A-2

61. It is ongoing process which ensures that new risks are

recognized and that established deterrents remain necessary and
cost effective.

A. inspection B. interrogation
C. risk analysis D. evaluation

62. What type of patrol performs certain specific, predetermined

preventive strategies on a regular and systematic basis?

A. split-force patrol B. low visibility patrol

C. apprehension-oriented D. directed deterrent patrol

63. A patrol beat refers to a:

A. number of crimes to be solved

B. number of residents to be protected
C. location of police headquarters
D. geographical area to be patrolled

64. It is the importance or installation in relation to national

security.

A. relative criticality B. relative indispensability

C. relative security D. relative vulnerability

65. It is the formal process of choosing the organizational

mission and overall objective both the short and long term as
well as the divisional and individual objectives based on the
organizational objectives.

A. planning B. organizing
C. directing D. managerial decision-making
 359

66. A __________ is usually for the purpose of waiting for the

anticipated arrival of a suspect who is either wanted for
investigation or who is expected to commit a crime at a certain
location.

A. stake out B. cops and robbers game

C. follow up D. surveillance

67. How is the crew complement of a Mobile Patrol Division

organized into shifts for each turn of duty?

A. daily four-shift B. daily five-shift

C. one-shift daily D. daily three-shift

68. The formulation of conclusions from the theory developed,

tested and considered valid as a result of interpretation is
called.

A. collection B. integration
C. evaluation D. deduction

69. In 2001, murder accounted for 10% of all index crimes. If

the total index crimes were 25,000, how many were murder
incidents?

A. 250 B. 2,500
C. 500 D. 5,000

70. As much as possible, the preparation of the overall

development plan of the police organization should be
participated in by the heads of all staff service, operational
and administrative support units. This policy is:

A. desirable; offices can be properly trained in planning

B. undesirable; the presence of too many officers will
create confusion
C. undesirable; there will be problems of credits
grabbing after plan is formulated
D. desirable; the officers will know the organization
better and a sense of ownership of the plan is
promoted
71. The following questions are tests for accuracy of
information, EXCEPT:

A. Does the report agree or disagree with available and

related intelligence?
B. Is the reported fact or event known in advance
C. Is it the same or consistent with known modus
operandi?
 360

D. Is the information about the target or area of the

operation?

72. Natural hazards such as storms, earthquakes, floods or lahar

cannot be prevented from occurring. To minimize the disastrous
effects of these phenomena, the security officer must prepare a:

A. guard deployment plan B. security education plan

C. civil defense plan D. disaster or emergency plan

73. It involves segregation or deviants into isolated geographic

areas so that they can easily be controlled.

A. coercion B. quarantine
C. conversion D. containment

74. What management principle provides that only one officer be

in direct command or supervision of each officer.

A. span of control B. unity of command

C. chain of command D. line of authority

75. What is referred to as total number of police officers

assigned to patrol duties?

A. effective strength B. mandatory strength

C. actual strength D. authorized strength

76. When police patrols are increased beyond normal levels, this
is called __________?

A. reactive patrol B. directed deterrent patrol

C. citizen patrol D. proactive patrol

77. What is the method of collection information wherein the

investigator tails or shadows the persons or vehicles?

A. research B. surveillance
C. casing D. photography

78. Before a security expert can recommend what type of security

will be needed by an industrial establishment, there is a need
for him to undertake a:

A. security training B. security check

C. security survey D. security education

79. When one procures information about subject secretly; he is

performing _________ collection method.
 361

A. routine B. overt
C. active D. covert

80. Under this principle, each group reports to an individual

who is part of a supervisory group that answers to a higher
supervisor and so on until a group of administrators report to
the chief executive.

A. unity of command B. span of control

C. scalar principle D. aggregation principle

81. Which of the following is NOT patrol pattern?

A. clockwise B. zigzag
C. criss-cross D. stationary

82. To what unit do policeman in plainclothes belong when they

infiltrate and gather information about criminal syndicates?

A. budget B. planning
C. Intelligence D. Patrol

83. Which of the following statement is TRUE?.

A. Performance evaluation measures credibility of the

police personnel.
B. Performance evaluation is not a basis for salary
increases of promotion.
C. Performance evaluation is done once a year among
police personnel.
D. Performance evaluation is implemented to determine
the quality of work performance or personnel.

84. Line units such as the patrol section or investigation

section in police stations prepare their work programs in which
areas are called.

A. budget B. management
C. operational plans D. tactical plan
85. What is referred to as the knowledge pertaining to
capabilities, vulnerabilities and probable course of actions of
foreign nations?

A. combat intelligence B. national intelligence

C. police intelligence D. strategic intelligence

86. How are coded messages converted to intelligible language?

 362

A. encoding B. processing
C. labeling D. decoding

87. The type of undercover operation wherein techniques are

applied for a longer time and is considered as the most different
investigative activity, yet the most rewarding.

A. casing B. undercover operation

C. penetration D. surveillance

88. As Security Director of Company B, you should know how many

beds, are normally available in a multiple injury situation and
how many __________ patients can be processed at a single time.

A. wounded B. emergency
C. female D. male

89. A person’s suitability to be given a security clearance is

determined through a process called __________.

A. security training B. security education

C. security promotion D. security investigation

90. This patrol method utilizes disguise deception and lying in

wait rather than upon high visibility patrol techniques?

A. decoy patrol B. high visibility patrol

C. directed patrol D. low visibility patrol

91. What police plans refer to actions to be taken at a

designated location and under specific circumstances?

A. management plans B. tactical plans

C. operating plans D. procedural plans

92. What type of organization consciously coordinates the

activities of two or more persons towards a given objective?

A. flexible organization B. formal organization B.

C. informal organization D. non-flexible organization
93. Who among the following meets the age qualification for
appointment to the police service?

A. Rey who is 20 years old

B. Dennis who is 17 years old
C. John who is 22 years old
D. Santi who is 35 years old
 363

94. The cover observation of an area, a building or stationary

object in order to gAin information is called:

A. undercover works B. penetration

C. casing D. surveillance

95. If a fire in a warehouse is about to involve barrels of

bleaching powder, the greatest danger would be from:

A. fast-burning flare-up that could not be controlled

B. an explosion
C. the impossibility of using water on the fire
D. a toxic and irritant gas

96. Which of the following is not included in the patrol

function?

A. Response to citizen calls

B. Investigation of crimes
C. Routine preventive patrol
D. Inspection of identified hazards

97. Disaster preparedness and control plans should include

__________ so that people who are directly involved should know
the extent of the incident.

A. evacuation services B. identification services

C. counseling services D. public information services

98. An intelligence report classified as A-2 means __________.

A. the information comes from a completely reliable

source and is doubtfully true
B. the information comes from a completely reliable
source and is probably true
C. the information comes from a usually reliable source
and is probably true
D. the information comes from a usually reliable source
and is possibly true

99. It ensures the question “what is to be accomplished by the

plan?”

A. objectives B. planning assumptions

C. problem D. planning environment

100. P/C Insp. Pedro D. Gayco was assigned to prepare the work
program of his division which must be analyzed from the point of
 364

view of the nature, time and place of the tasks, and measured in
terms of resource requirements?

A. Tactical plan B. Management plan

C. Procedural plan D. Operational plan
 365

APPENDIX “B”

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS IN POLICE

ORGANIZATION & ADMINISTRATION

===========================================================

1. B 26. A 51. A 76. B

2. A 27. A 52. B 77. A
3. D 28. A 53. D 78. B
4. C 29. A 54. C 79. A
5. C 30. B 55. B 80. B
6. C 31. C 56. A 81. A
7. B 32. D 57. C 82. D
8. D 33. D 58. A 83. A
9. B 34. D 59. B 84. A
10. C 35. A 60. B 85. B
11. D 36. C 61. C 86. B
12. B 37. D 62. B 87. B
13. D 38. B 63. A 88. C
14. D 39. C 64. D 89. A
15. C 40. B 65. C 90. B
16. A 41. A 66. B 91. D
17. C 42. C 67. A 92. D
18. C 43. B 68. C 93. A
19. A 44. B 69. B 94. A
20. B 45. A 70. A 95. C
21. C 46. A 71. B 96. B
22. C 47. A 72. A 97. A
23. C 48. C 73. A 98. D
24. B 49. A 74. A 99. D
25. C 50. D 75. A 100. B
 366

APPENDIX “C”

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS ON POLICE

INTELLIGENCE & SECRET SERVICE

===========================================================

1. A 26. A 51. A 76. A

2. C 27. D 52. B 77. B
3. B 28. B 53. A 78. D
4. A 29. C 54. B 79. B
5. D 30. B 55. D 80. D
6. A 31. B 56. C 81. C
7. B 32. A 57. B 82. A
8. B 33. C 58. B 83. D
9. A 34. B 59. A 84. C
10. B 35. A 60. C 85. A
11. C 36. A 61. A 86. D
12. C 37. B 62. D 87. A
13. B 38. C 63. C 88. C
14. B 39. D 64. C 89. B
15. A 40. B 65. B 90. D
16. D 41. A 66. B 91. D
17. A 42. A 67. B 92. A
18. C 43. B 68. C 93. B
19. A 44. A 69. B 94. C
20. A 45. A 70. B 95. D
21. B 46. B 71. A 96. D
22. B 47. C 72. C 97. C
23. D 48. D 73. B 98. B
24. A 49. B 74. C 99. D
25. B 50. A 75. A 100. C
 367

APPENDIX “D”

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS IN PATROL

ORGANIZATION & OPERATIONS

===========================================================

1. A 26. B 51. D 76. A

2. D 27. A 52. A 77. B
3. A 28. A 53. C 78. C
4. A 29. A 54. B 79. D
5. B 30. A 55. A 80. A
6. D 31. B 56. A 81. A
7. B 32. A 57. B 82. B
8. A 33. A 58. C 83. C
9. A 34. C 59. C 84. A
10. D 35. D 60. C 85. D
11. B 36. A 61. C 86. D
12. C 37. B 62. D 87. D
13. D 38. C 63. A 88. C
14. B 39. D 64. C 89. A
15. A 40. A 65. B 90. B
16. A 41. B 66. B 91. C
17. A 42. A 67. B 92. D
18. D 43. D 68. B 93. A
19. B 44. D 69. B 94. B
20. A 45. A 70. C 95. A
21. A 46. B 71. B 96. A
22. B 47. B 72. D 97. D
23. A 48. D 73. C 98. C
24. C 49. C 74. B 99. B
25. B 50. B 75. A 100. B
 368

APPENDIX “E”

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS IN

POLICE OPERATION PLANNING

===========================================================

1. A 26. A 51. B 76. D

2. D 27. D 52. D 77. D
3. A 28. B 53. B 78. A
4. C 29. C 54. D 79. B
5. D 30. A 55. C 80. C
6. B 31. C 56. C 81. C
7. A 32. C 57. B 82. A
8. C 33. A 58. D 83. B
9. A 34. D 59. A 84. C
10. B 35. C 60. A 85. D
11. A 36. D 61. A 86. B
12. B 37. C 62. A 87. A
13. D 38. D 63. B 88. C
14. C 39. A 64. B 89. D
15. D 40. D 65. B 90. D
16. D 41. C 66. D 91. B
17. A 42. B 67. C 92. A
18. A 43. C 68. C 93. B
19. C 44. B 69. A 94. A
20. A 45. A 70. A 95. B
21. B 46. B 71. A 96. A
22. C 47. C 72. B 97. C
23. A 48. C 73. C 98. A
24. D 49. C 74. C 99. A
25. C 50. A 75. B 100. B
 369

APPENDIX “F”

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS IN

SECURITY & SAFETY MANAGEMENT

===========================================================

1. B 26. B 51. D 76. C

2. C 27. A 52. C 77. C
3. B 28. C 53. A 78. C
4. C 29. B 54. B 79. C
5. A 30. A 55. A 80. B
6. C 31. C 56. A 81. C
7. C 32. A 57. B 82. B
8. D 33. B 58. A 83. A
9. C 34. A 59. B 84. D
10. A 35. A 60. D 85. A
11. A 36. B 61. B 86. C
12. B 37. C 62. A 87. A
13. A 38. D 63. C 88. A
14. C 39. C 64. C 89. A
15. B 40. D 65. C 90. A
16. A 41. A 66. D 91. A
17. B 42. B 67. A 92. A
18. A 43. D 68. D 93. A
19. B 44. A 69. A 94. B
20. B 45. B 70. A 95. C
21. C 46. C 71. A 96. C
22. D 47. B 72. D 97. A
23. A 48. A 73. A 98. C
24. A 49. A 74. D 99. A
25. B 50. B 75. D 100. B
 370

APPENDIX “G”

ANSWERS TO AUGUST 2003 BOARD EXAMINATION

===========================================================

1. C 26. B 51. B 76. A

2. C 27. B 52. B 77. C
3. C 28. C 53. D 78. B
4. D 29. D 54. A 79. D
5. C 30. B 55. B 80. A
6. D 31. A 56. B 81. D
7. B 32. B 57. C 82. B
8. B 33. C 58. C 83. D
9. B 34. C 59. D 84. B
10. C 35. C 60. D 85. D
11. A 36. D 61. B 86. D
12. B 37. B 62. C 87. B
13. D 38. A 63. D 88. A
14. B 39. A 64. A 89. D
15. C 40. B 65. A 90. B
16. B 41. B 66. A 91. B
17. C 42. C 67. D 92. B
18. D 43. B 68. D 93. C
19. B 44. D 69. C 94. B
20. B 45. C 70. D 95. B
21. D 46. A 71. C 96. B
22. B 47. A 72. C 97. C
23. D 48. D 73. C 98. B
24. D 49. A 74. C 99. A
25. B 50. B 75. B 100. D
 371

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

DR. OSCAR GATCHALIAN SORIANO is actively involved in

the academe, more particularly in the field of Criminology
education.

He earned his Bachelor of Science in Criminology

(BSCrim) and Master of Science in Business Administration
(MSBA) from Araullo University, Cabanatuan City. His Master
of Arts in Criminology (MACrim) and Doctor of Philosophy in
Criminology (PhDCrim) from Philippine College of
Criminology, Sta. Cruz, Manila.

Dr. Soriano is also a resource person on review classes

in the Licensure Examination for Criminologist (LEC), and
one of most sought-after lecturer and speaker on anti-drug
seminars and symposia, and reviewers in the different review
centers for the Licensure Examination for Criminologists
(LCE) in the country.

He is adjudged as Outstanding Criminologist for

Calendar Year 2003 on the search spearheaded by the
Professional Criminologists Association of the Philippines
(PCAP), and a recipient of the much coveted award for the
Most Outstanding Alumni in the Field of Criminology for
Calendar Year 2003, awarded by Araullo University,
Cabanatuan City.

Dr. Soriano is also a member of the Regional Quality

Assessment Team of the Commission on Higher Education III
(RQAT, CHEDRO III)—for Criminology Education, and appointed
Board of Director for Region III by the PCAP. He is also an
active member of the Philippine Educator’s Association in
Criminology Education (PEACE) and Philippine Association of
Graduate Educators (PAGE).

His first book, Comprehensive Drug Education Manual, is

complemented by the publication of his three (3) other
books, entitled Human Behavior and Crisis Management Manual,
Handbook on Police Intelligence, and Basic Police Report
Writing, and is now being followed by his recently published
work, entitled “Compendium in Law Enforcement
Administration: Review Materials for Board Examination.”